Preface
Contents
Machine Features
Guides Provided with the Machine
About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
- Structure of the guide
- Conventions Used in This Guide
Menu Map
1 Legal and Safety Information
- Notice
2 Installing and Setting up the Machine
3 Preparation before Use
- Loading Paper
- Precautions for Outputting Paper
4 Printing from PC
5 Operation on the Machine
6 Using Various Functions
- Functions Available on the Machine
- Functions
7 Status/Job Cancel
8 Setup and Registration (System Menu)
- System Menu
9 User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting)
10 Troubleshooting
11 Appendix

KYOCERA 870B61102RS3NL2 User Manual

Displayed below is the user manual for 870B61102RS3NL2 by KYOCERA which is a product in the Laser Printers category. This manual has pages.

Related Manuals

KYOCERA P7040cdn Manual

KYOCERA TASKalfa 306ci Manual

KYOCERA TASKalfa 2552ci MFP A3 Colour Manual

KYOCERA TASKALFA 6052CI MFP LAS COL A3 Manual

KYOCERA TASKALFA 3252CI MFP LAS COL A3 Manual

KYOCERA TASKALFA 4052CI MFP LAS COL A3 Manual

KYOCERA TASKALFA 5052CI MFP LAS COL A3 Manual

kyoceradocumentsolutions.com

ECOSYS P4060dn

0QFSBUJPO(VJEF

> Preface

Preface

Thank you for purchasing this machine.

This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly, perform routine maintenance, and take

simple troubleshooting measures as needed so that the machine can always be used in the optimum condition.

Please read this Operation Guide before using the machine.

We recommend the use of our genuine toner containers, which have passed rigorous quality

control testing, to maintain quality.

The use of non-genuine toner containers may cause failure.

We will not be liable for any damages caused by the use of third party supplies in this machine.

A label is affixed to our genuine supplies, as shown below.

Checking the Equipment's Serial Number

The equipment's serial number is printed in the location shown in the figure.

You'll need the equipment's serial number when contacting your Service Representative. Please check the number

before contacting your Service Representative.

Contents

Preface ..................................................................................................................................... i

Contents.................................................................................................................................. ii

Machine Features .................................................................................................................. ix

Guides Provided with the Machine ..................................................................................... xii

About the Operation Guide (this Guide) ........................................................................... xiii

Structure of the guide.................................................................................................. xiii

Conventions Used in This Guide................................................................................. xiv

Menu Map ............................................................................................................................ xvii

1 Legal and Safety Information ................................................................... 1-1

Notice ................................................................................................................................. 1-2

Safety Conventions in This Guide ............................................................................. 1-2

Environment .............................................................................................................. 1-3

Precautions for Use ................................................................................................... 1-4

Laser Safety (Europe) ............................................................................................... 1-5

SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA) ........................................................................... 1-6

Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power ...................................... 1-7

Compliance and Conformity ...................................................................................... 1-7

Radio Tag Technology .............................................................................................. 1-8

Other precautions (for users in California, the United States) ................................... 1-8

EN ISO 7779 ............................................................................................................. 1-8

EK1-ITB 2000 ............................................................................................................ 1-8

Wireless Connection (Mexico only) ........................................................................... 1-8

Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN (If equipped) ................................. 1-8

Limited Use of This Product (If equipped) ................................................................. 1-9

Legal Information .................................................................................................... 1-10

Energy Saving Control Function ............................................................................. 1-16

Automatic 2-Sided Print Function ............................................................................ 1-16

Resource Saving - Paper ........................................................................................ 1-16

Environmental benefits of "Power Management" .................................................... 1-16

Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program ............................................................... 1-16

2 Installing and Setting up the Machine ..................................................... 2-1

Part Names (Machine Exterior) ........................................................................................ 2-2

Part Names (Connectors/Interior) .................................................................................... 2-4

Part Names (With Optional Equipments Attached) ........................................................ 2-5

Connecting the Machine and Other Devices .................................................................. 2-6

Connecting Cables ............................................................................................................ 2-7

Connecting LAN Cable .............................................................................................. 2-7

Connecting USB Cable ............................................................................................. 2-8

Connecting the Power Cable .................................................................................... 2-8

Power On/Off ..................................................................................................................... 2-9

Power On .................................................................................................................. 2-9

Power Off .................................................................................................................. 2-9

Using the Operation Panel ............................................................................................. 2-10

Operation Panel Keys ............................................................................................. 2-10

Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle ...................................................................... 2-11

Assigning Functions to Function Keys .................................................................... 2-12

Touch Panel ..................................................................................................................... 2-13

Home Screen .......................................................................................................... 2-13

Display for Device Information ................................................................................ 2-16

Display Setting Screen ............................................................................................ 2-16

Functions Key ......................................................................................................... 2-17

Using the Screen ..................................................................................................... 2-17

Display of Keys That Cannot Be Set ....................................................................... 2-18

Entering Numbers ................................................................................................... 2-19

iii

Using the Enter Key ................................................................................................ 2-20

Using the Quick No. Search Key ............................................................................. 2-20

Help Screen ............................................................................................................ 2-21

Login/Logout ................................................................................................................... 2-22

Login ....................................................................................................................... 2-22

Logout ..................................................................................................................... 2-23

Default Settings of the Machine ..................................................................................... 2-24

Setting Date and Time ............................................................................................ 2-24

Network Setup ................................................................................................................. 2-25

Configuring the Wired Network ............................................................................... 2-25

Configuring the Wireless Network ........................................................................... 2-27

Setting Wi-Fi Direct ................................................................................................. 2-31

Configuring NFC ..................................................................................................... 2-33

Energy Saver Function ................................................................................................... 2-34

Low Power Mode .................................................................................................... 2-34

Sleep ....................................................................................................................... 2-34

Auto Sleep ............................................................................................................... 2-35

Sleep Rules (models for Europe) ............................................................................ 2-35

Sleep Level (Energy Saver) (models except for Europe) ........................................ 2-35

Energy Saver Recovery Level ................................................................................. 2-35

Weekly Timer Settings ............................................................................................ 2-35

Power Off Timer (models for Europe) ..................................................................... 2-36

Quick Setup Wizard ......................................................................................................... 2-37

Installing Software .......................................................................................................... 2-39

Software on DVD (Windows) .................................................................................. 2-39

Installing Software in Windows ............................................................................... 2-40

Uninstalling the Software ........................................................................................ 2-45

Installing Software in Mac Computer ...................................................................... 2-46

Checking the Counter ..................................................................................................... 2-48

Additional Preparations for the Administrator ............................................................. 2-49

Strengthening the Security ...................................................................................... 2-49

Command Center RX ...................................................................................................... 2-51

Accessing Command Center RX ............................................................................ 2-52

Changing Security Settings ..................................................................................... 2-53

Changing Device Information .................................................................................. 2-54

E-mail Settings ........................................................................................................ 2-55

Creating a New Custom Box ................................................................................... 2-59

Printing a Document Stored in a Custom Box ......................................................... 2-60

3 Preparation before Use ............................................................................. 3-1

Loading Paper ................................................................................................................... 3-2

Precaution for Loading Paper ................................................................................... 3-2

Selecting the Paper Feeder Units ............................................................................. 3-3

Loading in Cassette 1 ............................................................................................... 3-4

Loading in Cassette 2 ............................................................................................... 3-7

Loading Envelopes or Cardstock in the Cassettes ................................................. 3-10

Loading in the Large Capacity Feeder .................................................................... 3-14

Loading in the Side Feeder ..................................................................................... 3-16

Precautions for Outputting Paper .................................................................................. 3-18

Paper Stopper ......................................................................................................... 3-18

Envelope Stack Guide ............................................................................................. 3-18

Stack Level Adjuster ............................................................................................... 3-19

4 Printing from PC ........................................................................................ 4-1

Printer Driver Properties Screen ............................................................................... 4-2

Displaying the Printer Driver Help ............................................................................. 4-3

Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings (Windows 8.1) .................................... 4-3

Printing from PC ................................................................................................................ 4-4

Printing on Standard Sized Paper ............................................................................. 4-4

Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper ...................................................................... 4-6

Banner Printing ......................................................................................................... 4-9

Canceling Printing from a Computer ....................................................................... 4-15

Printing from the Handheld Device ............................................................................... 4-16

Printing by AirPrint .................................................................................................. 4-16

Printing by Google Cloud Print ................................................................................ 4-16

Printing by Mopria ................................................................................................... 4-16

Printing with Wi-Fi Direct ......................................................................................... 4-16

Printing with NFC .................................................................................................... 4-17

Printing Data Saved in the Printer ................................................................................. 4-18

Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing the Job ............................... 4-18

Printing Documents from Private Print Box ............................................................. 4-19

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Private Print Box ......................................... 4-19

Printing Document from Stored Job Box ................................................................. 4-20

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Stored Job Box ........................................... 4-20

Printing Document from Quick Copy Box ................................................................ 4-21

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Quick Copy Box .......................................... 4-21

Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box .......................................................... 4-22

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Proof and Hold Box .................................... 4-22

Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor) ............................................................ 4-23

Accessing the Status Monitor .................................................................................. 4-23

Exiting the Status Monitor ....................................................................................... 4-23

Quick View State ..................................................................................................... 4-23

Printing Progress Tab ............................................................................................. 4-24

Paper Tray Status Tab ............................................................................................ 4-24

Toner Status Tab .................................................................................................... 4-24

Alert Tab .................................................................................................................. 4-25

Status Monitor Context Menu .................................................................................. 4-25

Status Monitor Notification Settings ........................................................................ 4-26

5 Operation on the Machine ........................................................................ 5-1

Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray ......................................................................... 5-2

Program .............................................................................................................................. 5-6

Registering Programs ............................................................................................... 5-6

Recalling Programs ................................................................................................... 5-7

Editing Programs ....................................................................................................... 5-7

Deleting Programs .................................................................................................... 5-8

Application ......................................................................................................................... 5-9

Installing Applications ................................................................................................ 5-9

Activating Applications ............................................................................................ 5-10

Deactivating Applications ........................................................................................ 5-11

Uninstalling Applications ......................................................................................... 5-11

Registering Shortcuts ..................................................................................................... 5-12

Adding Shortcuts ..................................................................................................... 5-12

Editing Shortcuts ..................................................................................................... 5-13

Deleting Shortcuts ................................................................................................... 5-13

Canceling Jobs ................................................................................................................ 5-14

Using Document Boxes .................................................................................................. 5-15

What is Custom Box? .............................................................................................. 5-15

What is Job Box? .................................................................................................... 5-15

What is Removable Memory Box? .......................................................................... 5-15

Basic Operation for Document Box ......................................................................... 5-16

Creating a New Custom Box ................................................................................... 5-21

Editing Custom Box ................................................................................................. 5-22

Deleting Custom Box .............................................................................................. 5-23

Storing Documents to a Custom Box ...................................................................... 5-23

Printing Documents in Custom Box ........................................................................ 5-24

Moving Documents in Custom Box ......................................................................... 5-25

Deleting Documents in Custom Box ....................................................................... 5-25

Operating using Removable USB Memory ................................................................... 5-26

Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory ........................................ 5-26

Check the USB Memory Information ....................................................................... 5-27

Removing USB Memory .......................................................................................... 5-27

Using the Internet Browser ............................................................................................ 5-28

Launching and Exiting the Browser ......................................................................... 5-28

Using the Browser Screen ...................................................................................... 5-29

Manual Staple .................................................................................................................. 5-30

6 Using Various Functions .......................................................................... 6-1

Functions Available on the Machine ............................................................................... 6-2

About Functions Available on the Machine ............................................................... 6-2

Custom Box ............................................................................................................... 6-2

Removable Memory .................................................................................................. 6-4

Functions ........................................................................................................................... 6-5

Paper Selection ......................................................................................................... 6-5

Fold ........................................................................................................................... 6-7

Collate/Offset ............................................................................................................ 6-8

Staple/Punch ............................................................................................................. 6-9

Paper Output ........................................................................................................... 6-12

EcoPrint ................................................................................................................... 6-13

Zoom ....................................................................................................................... 6-13

Combine .................................................................................................................. 6-14

Margin/Centering, Margin ........................................................................................ 6-15

Booklet .................................................................................................................... 6-16

Duplex ..................................................................................................................... 6-18

Cover ....................................................................................................................... 6-19

Form Overlay .......................................................................................................... 6-20

Page # ..................................................................................................................... 6-21

Text Stamp .............................................................................................................. 6-23

Bates Stamp ............................................................................................................ 6-24

Job Finish Notice ..................................................................................................... 6-25

File Name Entry ...................................................................................................... 6-25

Priority Override ...................................................................................................... 6-25

Delete after Printed ................................................................................................. 6-26

Encrypted PDF Password ....................................................................................... 6-26

JPEG/TIFF Print ...................................................................................................... 6-26

XPS Fit to Page ....................................................................................................... 6-26

7 Status/Job Cancel ..................................................................................... 7-1

Checking Job Status ......................................................................................................... 7-2

Details of the Status Screens .................................................................................... 7-3

Checking Detailed Information of Jobs ..................................................................... 7-6

Checking Job History ....................................................................................................... 7-7

Checking the Detailed Information of Histories ......................................................... 7-8

Sending the Log History ............................................................................................ 7-8

Job Operation .................................................................................................................... 7-9

Pause and Resumption of Jobs ................................................................................ 7-9

Canceling of Jobs ...................................................................................................... 7-9

Priority Override for Waiting Jobs ............................................................................. 7-9

Reordering Print Jobs ............................................................................................. 7-10

Device/Communication ................................................................................................... 7-11

Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies) ................... 7-12

8 Setup and Registration (System Menu) .................................................. 8-1

System Menu ..................................................................................................................... 8-2

Operation Method ..................................................................................................... 8-2

System Menu Settings .............................................................................................. 8-3

Counter ..................................................................................................................... 8-6

Cassette/MP Tray Settings ....................................................................................... 8-6

Common Settings ...................................................................................................... 8-9

Home ....................................................................................................................... 8-22

Document Box/Removable Memory ....................................................................... 8-22

Printer ...................................................................................................................... 8-23

Report ..................................................................................................................... 8-26

System/Network ...................................................................................................... 8-30

User Login/Job Accounting ..................................................................................... 8-49

User Property .......................................................................................................... 8-50

Date/Timer/Energy Saver ........................................................................................ 8-50

Adjustment/Maintenance ......................................................................................... 8-53

Internet .................................................................................................................... 8-55

Application ............................................................................................................... 8-55

9 User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) .. 9-1

Overview of User Login Administration .......................................................................... 9-2

Managing the Users from PC .................................................................................... 9-2

Enabling User Login Administration ............................................................................... 9-3

Setting User Login Administration .................................................................................. 9-4

Changing User Properties ......................................................................................... 9-4

User Login Administration for Printing ....................................................................... 9-7

Group Authorization Settings .................................................................................... 9-9

Guest Authorization Set. ......................................................................................... 9-11

Obtain NW User Property ....................................................................................... 9-13

Simple Login Settings ............................................................................................. 9-15

ID Card Settings ...................................................................................................... 9-17

PIN Code Authorization ........................................................................................... 9-18

Using User Login Administration .................................................................................. 9-19

Login/Logout ........................................................................................................... 9-19

Overview of Job Accounting .......................................................................................... 9-20

Enabling Job Accounting ............................................................................................... 9-21

Job Accounting Access ........................................................................................... 9-21

Job Accounting (Local) .................................................................................................. 9-22

Adding an Account .................................................................................................. 9-22

Restricting the Use of the Machine ......................................................................... 9-23

Editing an Account .................................................................................................. 9-23

Deleting an Account ................................................................................................ 9-25

Job Accounting for Printing ..................................................................................... 9-26

Configuring Job Accounting .......................................................................................... 9-28

Default Setting ......................................................................................................... 9-28

Counting the Number of Pages Printed .................................................................. 9-30

Print Accounting Report .......................................................................................... 9-32

Using Job Accounting .................................................................................................... 9-33

Login/Logout ........................................................................................................... 9-33

Apply Limit ....................................................................................................................... 9-34

Unknown User Settings .................................................................................................. 9-35

Unknown ID Job ...................................................................................................... 9-35

Registering Information for a User whose ID is Unknown ....................................... 9-36

10 Troubleshooting ...................................................................................... 10-1

Regular Maintenance ...................................................................................................... 10-2

Toner Container Replacement ................................................................................ 10-2

Replace the Waste Toner Box ................................................................................ 10-5

Loading Paper ......................................................................................................... 10-6

Replacing Staples (1,000-Sheet Finisher) .............................................................. 10-7

vii

Replacing Staples (4,000-Sheet Finisher) .............................................................. 10-8

Replacing Staples (Folding Unit) ........................................................................... 10-10

Disposing of the Punch Waste .............................................................................. 10-12

Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................ 10-16

Solving Malfunctions ............................................................................................. 10-16

Machine Operation Trouble ................................................................................... 10-16

Printed Image Trouble ........................................................................................... 10-19

Remote Operation ................................................................................................. 10-21

Responding to Messages ...................................................................................... 10-23

Adjustment/Maintenance .............................................................................................. 10-34

Overview of Adjustment/Maintenance ................................................................... 10-34

Drum Refresh ........................................................................................................ 10-34

Calibration ............................................................................................................. 10-34

Laser Scanner Cleaning ........................................................................................ 10-34

Developer Refresh ................................................................................................ 10-35

Clearing Paper Jams ..................................................................................................... 10-36

Jam Location Indicators ........................................................................................ 10-36

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 1 ............................................................ 10-37

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 2 ............................................................ 10-40

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 3 and 4 (500-sheet×2) ........................... 10-43

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 3 (1,500-sheet×2) .................................. 10-45

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 4 (1,500-sheet×2) .................................. 10-47

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 5 (Side Feeder) ..................................... 10-50

Remove any jammed paper in the Multipurpose Tray .......................................... 10-52

Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 1 ....................................................... 10-53

Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 2 (500-sheet×2) ................................ 10-57

Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 2 (1,500-sheet×2) ............................. 10-58

Remove any jammed paper in the Bridge Unit ..................................................... 10-60

Remove any jammed paper in the Mailbox ........................................................... 10-61

Remove any jammed paper in the 1,000-Sheet Finisher ...................................... 10-62

Remove any jammed paper in the 4,000-sheet Finisher (Inner) ........................... 10-65

Remove any jammed paper in the 4,000-sheet Finisher (Tray A) ........................ 10-66

Remove any jammed paper in the 4,000-sheet Finisher (Tray B) ........................ 10-70

Remove any jammed paper in the Folding Unit .................................................... 10-73

Remove any jammed paper in the Folding Tray ................................................... 10-78

Clearing a Staple Jam ................................................................................................... 10-83

Clearing a Staple Jam of the 1,000-Sheet Finisher .............................................. 10-83

Clearing a Staple Jam of the 4,000-Sheet Finisher .............................................. 10-86

Clearing a Staple Jam of the Folding Unit ............................................................. 10-88

11 Appendix .................................................................................................. 11-1

Optional Equipment ........................................................................................................ 11-2

Overview of Optional Equipment ............................................................................. 11-2

Optional Applications .............................................................................................. 11-7

Starting Application Use .......................................................................................... 11-7

Checking Details of Application ............................................................................... 11-8

Character Entry Method .................................................................................................. 11-9

Entry Screens .......................................................................................................... 11-9

Entering Characters .............................................................................................. 11-11

Paper .............................................................................................................................. 11-12

Basic Paper Specifications .................................................................................... 11-12

Choosing the Appropriate Paper ........................................................................... 11-13

Special Paper ........................................................................................................ 11-15

Specifications ................................................................................................................ 11-19

Machine ................................................................................................................. 11-19

Printer Functions ................................................................................................... 11-21

Paper Feeder (500-sheet×2) ................................................................................. 11-22

Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2) ............................................................... 11-22

Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) .................................................................................... 11-22

viii

1,000-Sheet Finisher ............................................................................................. 11-23

4,000-Sheet Finisher ............................................................................................. 11-24

Punch Unit (For 1,000-Sheet/4,000-Sheet Finisher) ............................................. 11-24

Mailbox .................................................................................................................. 11-25

Folding Unit ........................................................................................................... 11-25

Job Separator Tray ............................................................................................... 11-26

Banner Tray .......................................................................................................... 11-26

Glossary ......................................................................................................................... 11-27

Index ............................................................................................................................ Index-1

> Machine Features

Machine Features

The machine is equipped with many useful functions.

Using Various Functions (page 6-1)

Here are some examples.

Optimize your office workflow Save energy and cost

Access to frequently used

functions with just one touch

(Program)

You can preset frequently used

functions.

Once you register frequently used

settings as favorite, you can call up

the settings easily. Using this favorite

brings the same results even if

operated by another person.

Program (page 5-6)

Save frequently used documents

in the machine (Custom Box)

You can save the frequently used

document in the machine and print it

when needed.

Creating a New Custom Box

(page 5-21)

Save energy as needed

(Energy Saver function)

The machine is equipped with Energy

Saver function that automatically

switched into Low Power Mode or

Sleep Mode. You can set appropriate

Energy Saver Recovery Level

depending on the operation.

In addition, set the machine to

automatically turn OFF and recovered

at a specified time for each day of the

week.

Energy Saver Function

(page 2-34)

Save energy and cost Create attractive documents

Reduce paper use

(Paper Saving Printing)

You can print originals on both sides

of the paper. You can also print

multiple originals onto one sheet.

Program (page 5-6)

Create a booklet

(Booklet)

It is useful when preparing handout.

You can create a magazine,

pamphlet, or other booklet from

originals.

A booklet, such as a magazine, is

made by folding at the center.

The cover page can be printed onto

colored paper or heavy paper.

Booklet (page 6-16)

Print a stamp on the documents

(Text Stamp / Bates Stamp)

It is useful when adding text or date.

You can add desired text and date as

a stamp.

Text Stamp (page 6-23)

Bates Stamp (page 6-24)

On Off

> Machine Features

Strengthen security

Protect data on the hard disk/SSD

(Encryption / Overwrite)

You can overwrite the unnecessary

data that remains on the hard disk/

SSD automatically.

To prevent an external leakage, the

machine is able to encrypt data

before writing it to the hard disk/SSD.

Data Security (page 8-47)

Prevent loss of finished

documents (Private Print)

Temporarily saving print jobs in the

main unit document box and

outputting them when in front of the

device can prevent documents from

being taken by others.

Printing Data Saved in the Printer

(page 4-18)

(Card Authentication)

You can log in simply by touching an

ID card. You don't need to enter your

user name and password.

Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card

Authentication Kit" (page 11-6)

Strengthen security Use functions more efficiently

Strengthen security

(Settings for Administrator)

Various functions are available for

administrators to strengthen security.

Strengthening the Security

(page 2-49)

Expand functions as necessary

(Application)

The functionality of the machine can

be expanded by installing

applications.

Applications that help you perform

your daily more efficiently such as an

authentication feature are available.

Application (page 5-9)

Install the machine without

concerning the network cables

(Wireless Network)

If there is a wireless LAN

environment, it is possible to install

the unit without worrying about the

network wiring. In addition, Wi-Fi

Direct, etc. are supported.

Configuring the Wireless Network

(page 2-27)

Setting Wi-Fi Direct (page 2-31)

Configuring NFC (page 2-33)

OK !

> Machine Features

Use functions more efficiently

Use USB memory

(USB Memory)

It is useful when you need to print

documents outside your office or you

cannot print documents from your

PC.

You can print the document from the

USB memory by plugging it directly

into the machine.

Printing Documents Stored in

Removable USB Memory

(page 5-26)

Skip the error job

(Job Skip Functions)

When paper empty error occurs at

the cassette by specifying the special

paper size or type, the machine skips

the error job and perform the next

job.

Error Job Skip (page 8-51)

Perform remote operation

(Command Center RX)

You can access to the machine

remotely to print data.

Administrators can configure the

machine behavior or management

settings.

Command Center RX

(page 2-51)

xii

> Guides Provided with the Machine

Guides Provided with the Machine

The following guides are provided with the machine. Refer to each guide as needed.

The contents of the guides are subject to change without notice for the purpose of improvement of machine

performance.

Printed Guides

Guides (PDF) on the DVD (Product Library)

Install the following versions of Adobe Reader to view the manuals on the DVD.

Version 8.0 or later

Start using the

machine quickly

Quick Guide

Explains how to use basic functions of the machine, how to use convenient

features, how to perform routine maintenance, and what to do when problems

occur.

For safe use of the

machine

Safety Guide

Provides safety and cautionary information for installation environment and use of

the machine. Be sure to read this guide before using the machine.

Safety Guide (ECOSYS P4060dn)

Indicates the space required for machine installation, and describes the

cautionary labels and other safety information. Be sure to read this guide before

using the machine.

Use the machine

thoughtfully

Operation Guide (This Guide)

Explains how to load paper and perform basic operations, and indicates default

settings and other information.

Use the ID card Card Authentication Kit (B) Operation Guide

Explains how to perform authentication using the ID card.

Strengthen security

Data Security Kit (E) Operation Guide

Explains how to introduce and use the Data Security kit (E), and how to overwrite

and encrypt data.

Easily register

machine information

and configure settings

Command Center RX User Guide

Explains how to access the machine from a Web browser on your computer to

check and change settings.

Print data from a

computer

Printer Driver User Guide

Explains how to install the printer driver and use the printer function.

Directly print a PDF file KYOCERA Net Direct Print Operation Guide

Explains how to print PDF files without launching Adobe Acrobat or Reader.

Monitor the machine

and printers on the

network

KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide

Explains how to monitor your network printing system (the machine) with

KYOCERA Net Viewer.

Print without using the

printer driver

PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference

Describes the native printer language (PRESCRIBE commands).

PRESCRIBE Commands Technical Reference

Describes the PRESCRIBE command functions and control for each type of

emulation.

xiii

> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)

About the Operation Guide (this Guide)

Structure of the guide

The Operation Guide contains the following chapters.

Chapter Contents

1Legal and Safety Information Provides precautions regarding use of the machine and trademark information.

2Installing and Setting up the

Machine

Explains part names, cable connections, installation of the software, login,

logout, and other matters related to administration of the machine.

3Preparation before Use Explains preparations and settings that are required in order to use the

machine, such as how to load paper.

4Printing from PC Explains the basic steps for printing.

5Operation on the Machine Explains the basic procedures for using the machine, such as using document

boxes.

6Using Various Functions Explains convenient functions that are available on the machine.

7Status/Job Cancel Explains how to check the status of a job and the job history, and how to cancel

jobs being printed or waiting to print. Also explains how to check paper and

toner levels, and how to check the device status.

8Setup and Registration

(System Menu)

Explains System Menu and how it relates to the operation of the machine.

9User Authentication and

Accounting (User Login,

Job Accounting)

Explains user login and job accounting.

10 Troubleshooting Explains what to do when toner runs out, an error is displayed, or a paper jam

or other problem occurs.

11 Appendix Describes convenient options that are available for the machine. Provides

information on media types and paper sizes, and gives a glossary of terms.

Explains how to enter characters, and lists the specifications of the machine.

xiv

> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)

Conventions Used in This Guide

Adobe Reader XI is used as an example in the explanations below.

Certain items are indicated in this guide by the conventions described below.

NOTE

The items that appear in Adobe Reader vary depending on how it is used. If the Table of Contents or tools do not

appear, refer to Adobe Reader Help.

Convention Description

[Bold] Indicates keys and buttons.

"Regular" Indicates a message or setting.

Click to move from the current page to the previously

displayed page. This is convenient when you want to

return to the page from which you jumped to the

current page.

Click an item in the Table of

Contents to jump to the

corresponding page.

CAUTION

Indicates that personal injury or

mechanical damage may result

from insufficient attention to or

incorrect compliance with the

related points.

NOTE

Indicates supplemental

explanations and reference

information for operations.

IMPORTANT

Indicates operational

requirements and restrictions to

operate the machine correctly,

and avoid damage to the

machine or property.

Refer to

Click the underlined text to jump

to the corresponding page.

> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)

Conventions Used in Procedures for Operating the Machine

In this Operation Guide, continuous operation of the keys on the touch panel is as follows:

Actual procedure Procedure indicated in this guide

Select the [System Menu/Counter] key.



Select [ ].



Select [Date/Timer/Energy Saver].



Select [Date/Time].

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Date/Timer/Energy

Saver] > [Date/Time]

Select [Next] of "Job Accounting Setting".



Select [Change] of "Job Accounting".

"Job Accounting Setting" [Next] > "Job Accounting"

[Change]

User Login/Job Accounting

User Login Setting:

Unknown User Settings:

Job Accounting Setting:

m020168_01

User Login/Job Accounting - Job Accounting Setting

Change

Job Accounting:

Job Accounting Access:

Job Accounting (Local): Apply Limit: Change

Change

m020174_01

xvi

> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)

Size and Orientation of Paper

Paper sizes such as A4, B5, and Letter can be used in both the horizontal and vertical orientations. To distinguish the

orientations when these sizes are used, "R" is added to sizes used in the horizontal orientation. In addition, the following

icons are used to indicate paper placement orientations on the touch panel.

Orientation Setting Position

(X=Length, Y=Width)

Icons on the touch

panel

Indicated size in this

Guide*1

*1 Paper sizes that can be used vary depending on the function and source tray. For details, refer to the

following.

Specifications (page 11-19)

Vertical

orientation

Cassette A4, B5, Letter .etc

Multipurpose

tray

Horizontal

orientation

(-R)

Cassette A4-R, B5-R, Letter-R

.etc

Multipurpose

tray

xvii

> Menu Map

Menu Map

This is a list of menus displayed on the touch panel. Depending on the settings, some menus may not be displayed.

Some menu names may differ from their reference titles.

Custom Box Open Print Functions Paper Selection (page 6-5)

Collate/Offset (page 6-8)

Staple/Punch Staple (page 6-9)

Punch (page 6-11)

Paper Output (page 6-12)

Combine (page 6-14)

Margin/Centering (page 6-15)

Booklet (page 6-16)

Duplex (page 6-18)

Cover (page 6-19)

Form Overlay (page 6-20)

Page # (page 6-21)

Job Finish Notice (page 6-25)

File Name Entry (page 6-25)

Delete after Printed (page 6-26)

Priority Override (page 6-25)

EcoPrint (page 6-13)

Zoom (page 6-13)

Fold (page 6-7)

Text Stamp (page 6-23)

Bates Stamp (page 6-24)

Program (page 5-6)

Custom Box

xviii

> Menu Map

Custom Box Open Move (page 5-25)

Delete (page 5-25)

Search(Name) (page 5-17)

Page Selection (page 5-17)

Detail (page 5-17)

Preview (page 5-19)

Detail (page 5-16)

Search(Name) (page 5-16)

Search(No.) (page 5-16)

Add/Edit Box (page 5-21)

Job Box Private Print/Stored Job (page 4-19, page 4-20)

Quick Copy/Proof and Hold (page 4-21, page 4-22)

Job Box

xix

> Menu Map

Removable

Memory

Print Functions Paper Selection (page 6-5)

Collate/Offset (page 6-8)

Staple/Punch Staple (page 6-9)

Punch (page 6-11)

Paper Output (page 6-12)

Margin (page 6-15)

Duplex (page 6-18)

Job Finish Notice (page 6-25)

Priority Override (page 6-25)

EcoPrint (page 6-13)

Fold (page 6-7)

Text Stamp (page 6-23)

Bates Stamp (page 6-24)

Encrypted PDF Password (page 6-26)

JPEG/TIFF Print (page 6-26)

XPS Fit to Page (page 6-26)

Detail (page 5-17)

Open (page 5-26)

Up (page 5-26)

Memory Information (page 5-27)

Remove Memory (page 5-27)

Printing Jobs (page 7-3)

Storing Jobs (page 7-5)

Device/Communication (page 7-11)

Paper/Supplies (page 7-12)

Removable

Memory

Status/

Job Cancel I

> Menu Map

Quick Setup Wizard Network Setup (page 2-37)

Energy Saver Setup (page 2-37)

Counter (page 2-48)

Cassette/MP Tray Settings Cassette 1 (page 8-6)

Cassette 2 (page 8-6)

Cassette 3 (page 8-6)

Cassette 4 (page 8-6)

Cassette 5 (page 8-6)

MP Tray Setting (page 8-7)

Common Settings Language (page 8-9)

Default Screen (page 8-9)

Buzzer (page 8-9)

Paper Settings Media Type Setting (page 8-10)

Custom Paper Size (page 8-10)

Default Paper Source (page 8-10)

Show Paper Setup Message (page 8-11)

Paper Source for Cover (page 8-11)

Special Paper Action (page 8-11)

Measurement (page 8-12)

Error Handling Duplexing Error (page 8-13)

Finishing Error (page 8-13)

No Staple Error (page 8-13)

Finished Pages Exceeded (page 8-13)

Punch Waste Full Error (page 8-13)

Paper Mismatch Error (page 8-13)

Inserted Paper Mismatch (page 8-14)

Paper Jam before Staple (page 8-14)

Paper Output (page 8-14)

Function Key Assignment (page 8-15)

System

xxi

> Menu Map

Common Settings Function Defaults Zoom (page 8-15)

Margin Default (page 8-15)

EcoPrint (page 8-15)

Collate/Offset (page 8-15)

Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) (page 8-15)

File Name Entry (page 8-15)

JPEG/TIFF Print (page 8-16)

XPS Fit to Page (page 8-16)

Keyboard Layout (page 8-16)

Optional Keyboard Type (page 8-16)

System Stamp (page 8-16)

Manual Staple (page 8-18)

Offset Documents by Job (page 8-18)

Low Toner Alert Level (page 8-19)

Toner Waste Full Alert (page 8-19)

Offset One Page Documents (page 8-19)

Display Status/Log (page 8-20)

Message Banner Print (page 8-20)

Customize Status Display (page 8-20)

Message Board Settings (page 8-21)

Numeric Keypad Settings (page 8-21)

Show Power Off Message (page 8-22)

Home Customize Desktop (page 2-14)

Customize Taskbar (page 2-14)

Wallpaper (page 2-14)

Document Box/Removable

Memory

Custom Box (page 5-15)

Job Box Quick Copy Job Retention (page 8-22)

Deletion of Job Retention (page 8-22)

Quick Setup Registration (page 8-22)

xxii

> Menu Map

Printer Emulation (page 8-23)

EcoPrint (page 8-23)

Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) (page 8-23)

Override A4/Letter (page 8-23)

Duplex (page 8-23)

Copies (page 8-23)

Orientation (page 8-23)

Form Feed Timeout (page 8-23)

LF Action (page 8-24)

CR Action (page 8-24)

Job Name (page 8-24)

User Name (page 8-24)

Paper Feed Mode (page 8-24)

MP Tray Priority (page 8-24)

Auto Cassette Change (page 8-24)

Wide A4 (page 8-24)

Resolution (page 8-25)

KIR (page 8-25)

Printing Job Terminator (page 8-25)

xxiii

> Menu Map

Report Print Report Status Page (page 8-26)

Font List (page 8-26)

Network Status (page 8-26)

Service Status (page 8-26)

Optional Network Status (page 8-27)

Configuration List (page 8-27)

Data Sanitization Report (page 8-27)

Sending Log History Auto Sending (page 8-27)

Sending Log History (page 8-27)

Destination (page 8-27)

Job Log Subject (page 8-27)

Personal Information (page 8-27)

Settings

Auto Sending (page 8-27)

Destination (page 8-28)

Subject (page 8-28)

Log Reset (page 8-28)

Device Log History

Settings

Device Log History (page 8-28)

Auto Sending (page 8-28)

Destination (page 8-28)

Subject (page 8-28)

Secure Comm. Error

Log

Secure Comm. Error Log (page 8-29)

Auto Sending (page 8-29)

Destination (page 8-29)

Subject (page 8-29)

System/Network Network Host Name (page 8-30)

Wi-Fi Direct Settings Wi-Fi Direct (page 8-30)

Device Name (page 8-30)

IP Address (page 8-30)

Auto Disconnect (page 8-30)

Wi-Fi Settings Wi-Fi (page 8-31)

Setup (page 8-31)

TCP/IP Setting (page 8-33)

Restart Network (page 8-34)

xxiv

> Menu Map

System/Network Network Wired Network

Settings

TCP/IP Setting (page 8-35)

LAN Interface (page 8-37)

Bonjour (page 8-37)

IPSec (page 8-37)

Protocol Settings SMTP (E-mail TX) (page 8-37)

POP3 (E-mail RX) (page 8-37)

ThinPrint (page 8-38)

FTP Server (Reception)

(page 8-38)

LPD (page 8-38)

NetBEUI (page 8-38)

Raw (page 8-38)

WSD Print (page 8-39)

SNMPv1/v2c (page 8-39)

SNMPv3 (page 8-39)

Enhanced WSD (page 8-39)

Enhanced WSD over SSL

(page 8-39)

IPP (page 8-39)

IPP over SSL (page 8-40)

HTTP (page 8-40)

HTTPS (page 8-40)

LDAP (page 8-40)

VNC (RFB) (page 8-40)

VNC (RFB) over SSL (page 8-40)

EnhancedVNC over SSL

(page 8-41)

Security Settings (page 8-41)

Proxy (page 8-41)

Ping (page 8-42)

Restart Network (page 8-42)

xxv

> Menu Map

System/Network Optional Network Basic (page 8-42)

Wireless Network (page 8-43)

Primary Network (Client) (page 8-45)

Security Level (page 8-45)

Interface Block

Setting

USB Host (page 8-46)

USB Device (page 8-46)

USB Storage (page 8-46)

Optional Interface 1 (page 8-46)

Optional Interface 2 (page 8-46)

Data Security Hard Disk/SSD Initialization (page 8-47)

Data Sanitization (page 8-48)

Software Verification (page 8-48)

Optional Function (page 8-48)

Bluetooth Settings Bluetooth Keyboard (page 8-48)

Search Device (page 8-48)

Restart Entire Device (page 8-49)

Remote Service Settings (page 8-49)

NFC (page 8-49)

Remote Operation (page 8-49)

xxvi

> Menu Map

User Login/Job Accounting User Login Setting User Login (page 9-3)

Local User List (page 9-4)

Group Authorization

Set.

Group Authorization (page 9-9)

Group List (page 9-9)

Guest Authorization

Set.

Guest Authorization (page 9-11)

Guest Property (page 9-11)

Obtain NW User Property (page 9-13)

Simple Login

Settings

Simple Login (page 9-15)

Simple Login Key (page 9-15)

ID Card Settings Keyboard Login (page 9-17)

Additional Authentication

(page 9-17)

PIN Code Authorization (page 9-18)

Job Accounting

Setting

Job Accounting (page 9-21)

Job Accounting Access (page 9-21)

Job Accounting

(Local)

Print Accounting Report

(page 9-32)

Total Job Accounting (page 9-30)

Each Job Accounting (page 9-31)

Accounting List (page 9-22)

Default Setting (page 9-28)

Apply Limit (page 9-34)

Unknown User

Setting

Unknown ID Job (page 9-35)

User Property (page 9-36)

User Property (page 9-4)

xxvii

> Menu Map

Date/Timer/Energy Saver Date/Time (page 8-50)

Date Format (page 8-50)

Time Zone (page 8-50)

Auto Panel Reset (page 8-50)

Auto Error Clear (page 8-50)

Low Power Timer (page 8-50)

Panel Reset Timer (page 8-50)

Sleep Timer (page 8-51)

Ping Timeout (page 8-51)

Error Job Skip (page 8-51)

Error Clear Timer (page 8-51)

Sleep Rules (models for Europe) (page 8-51)

Sleep Level (models except for Europe) (page 8-52)

EnergySaver RecoveryLevel (page 8-52)

Weekly Timer Settings (page 8-52)

Power Off Rule (models for Europe) (page 8-53)

Power Off Timer (models for Europe) (page 8-53)

Adjustment/Maintenance Drum Refresh (page 8-53)

Auto Drum Refresh (page 8-53)

Drum Heater*1 (page 8-53)

Laser Scanner Cleaning (page 8-53)

Developer Refresh (page 8-54)

Open Toner Cover (page 8-54)

System Initialization (page 8-54)

Display Brightness (page 8-54)

Silent Mode (page 8-54)

Memory Diagnostics (page 8-54)

Calibration (page 8-54)

Calibration Cycle (page 8-54)

Internet (page 8-55)

Application (page 8-55)

*1 This setting does not appear in some regions.

1-1

1 Legal and Safety

Information

Please read this information before using your machine. This chapter provides information on the following topics.

Notice ................................................................................................................................................................. 1-2

Safety Conventions in This Guide ............................................................................................................ 1-2

Environment ............................................................................................................................................. 1-3

Precautions for Use ................................................................................................................................. 1-4

Laser Safety (Europe) .............................................................................................................................. 1-5

SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA) .......................................................................................................... 1-6

Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power ..................................................................... 1-7

Compliance and Conformity .................................................................................................................... 1-7

Radio Tag Technology .............................................................................................................................. 1-8

Other precautions (for users in California, the United States) ................................................................. 1-8

EN ISO 7779 ............................................................................................................................................ 1-8

EK1-ITB 2000 .......................................................................................................................................... 1-8

Wireless Connection (Mexico only) ......................................................................................................... 1-8

Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN (If equipped) ................................................................ 1-8

Limited Use of This Product (If equipped) ................................................................................................ 1-9

Legal Information ................................................................................................................................... 1-10

Energy Saving Control Function ............................................................................................................ 1-16

Automatic 2-Sided Print Function .......................................................................................................... 1-16

Resource Saving - Paper ....................................................................................................................... 1-16

Environmental benefits of "Power Management" ................................................................................... 1-16

Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program .............................................................................................. 1-16

1-2

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Notice

Safety Conventions in This Guide

The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect the user,

other individuals and surrounding objects, and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine. The symbols and their

meanings are indicated below.

WARNING: Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient

attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.

CAUTION: Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage may result from

insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.

Symbols

The  symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings. Specific points of attention are indicated

inside the symbol.

... [General warning]

... [Warning of high temperature]

The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions. Specifics of the prohibited

action are indicated inside the symbol.

... [Warning of prohibited action]

... [Disassembly prohibited]

The  symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed. Specifics of

the required action are indicated inside the symbol.

... [Alert of required action]

... [Remove the power plug from the outlet]

... [Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground connection]

Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide are

illegible or if the guide itself is missing (fee required).

1-3

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Environment

The service environmental conditions are as follows:

Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine.

• Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight.

• Avoid locations with vibrations.

• Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations.

• Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air.

• Avoid poorly ventilated locations.

If the floor is delicate against casters, when this machine is moved after installation, the floor material may be damaged.

During printing, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one's health. If, however, the

machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely large number of

prints, the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain the appropriate environment for print work, it is suggested that the

room be properly ventilated.

Temperature 50 to 90.5 °F (10 to 32.5 °C)

Humidity 10 to 80%

1-4

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Precautions for Use

Cautions when handling consumables

CAUTION

Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.

Keep parts which contain toner out of the reach of children.

If toner happens to spill from parts which contain toner, avoid inhalation and ingestion, as well as contact with your eyes

and skin.

• If you do happen to inhale toner, move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of water. If

coughing develops, contact a physician.

• If you do happen to ingest toner, rinse your mouth with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the contents of

your stomach. If necessary, contact a physician.

• If you do happen to get toner in your eyes, flush them thoroughly with water. If there is any remaining tenderness,

contact a physician.

• If toner does happen to get on your skin, wash with soap and water.

Do not attempt to force open or destroy parts which contain toner.

Other precautions

Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner

container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.

Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight.

Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40 °C while avoiding sharp changes of temperature

and humidity.

If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the paper from the cassette and the Multipurpose

(MP) Tray, return it to its original package and reseal it.

1-5

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Laser Safety (Europe)

Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body. For this reason, laser radiation emitted inside this machine is

hermetically sealed within the protective housing and external cover. In the normal operation of the product by user, no

radiation can leak from the machine.

This machine is classified as Class 1 laser product under IEC/EN 60825-1:2014.

Regarding CLASS 1 laser products, information is provided on the rating label.

1-6

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA)

1. Safety of laser beam

This machine has been certified by the manufacturer to Class 1 level under the radiation performance standards

established by the U.S.DHHS (Department of Health and Human Services) in 1968. This indicates that the product is

safe to use during normal operation and maintenance. The laser optical system, enclosed in a protective housing and

sealed within the external covers, never permits the laser beam to escape.

2. The CDRH Act

A laser-product-related act was implemented on Aug. 2, 1976, by the Center for Devices and Radiological Health

(CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA). This act prohibits the sale of laser products in the U.S. without

certification, and applies to laser products manufactured after Aug. 1, 1976. The label shown below indicates

compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States.

The position of the rating label is show below.

3. Maintenance

For safety of the service personnel, follow the maintenance instructions in the other section of this manual.

4. Safety switch

The power to the laser unit is cut off when the front cover is opened.

XXXX

1-7

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of

Power

Caution: The power plug is the main isolation device! Other switches on the equipment are only functional switches and

are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source.

Attention: Le débranchement de la fiche secteur est le seul moyen de mettre l'appareil hors tension. Les interrupteurs

sur l'appareil ne sont que des interrupteurs de fonctionnement: ils ne mettent pas l'appareil hors tension.

Compliance and Conformity

Hereby, KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc. declares that the radio equipment type ECOSYS P4060dn is in compliance

with Directive 2014/53/EU.

The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:

https://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.eu/index/service/dlc.html

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 and

Part 18 of the FCC Rules.

These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This

equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the

instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference

will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television

reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the

interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

• The use of a non-shielded interface cable with the referenced device is prohibited.

CAUTION — The changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void

the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including

interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all

persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other transmitter.

* The above statements are valid only in the United States of America and Canada.

NOTE — Use shielded interface cables.

Module name, Option Software Ver. Frequency band in which the

radio equipment operates:

Maximum radio-frequency power

transmitted in the frequency band in

which the radio equipment operates:

IB-51 (option) 2.2.6 2.4GHz 100mW

IB-35 (option) 2014.12 2.4GHz 100mW

Transmitter Module(SRD) 2005.11 13.56MHz 0.2nW

Industry Canada ICES-003 Compliance Label: CAN ICES-3B/NMB-3B

1-8

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Radio Tag Technology

In some countries the radio tag technology used in this equipment to identify the toner container may be subject to

authorization and the use of this equipment may consequently be restricted.

Other precautions

(for users in California, the United States)

Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

EN ISO 7779

Maschinenlärminformations-Verordnung 3. GPSGV, 06.01.2004: Der höchste Schalldruckpegel beträgt 70 dB (A) oder

weniger gemäß EN ISO 7779.

EK1-ITB 2000

Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen. Um

störende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden, darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld

platziert werden.

Wireless Connection (Mexico only)

The operation of this equipment is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) it is possible that this equipment or device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this equipment or device must

accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:

(1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe

aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada.

Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN

(If equipped)

Wireless LAN allows information to be exchanged between wireless access points instead of using a network cable,

which offers the advantage that a WLAN connection can be established freely within an area in which radio waves can

be transmitted.

On the other hand, the following problems may occur if security settings are not configured, because radio waves can

pass through obstacles (including walls) and reach everywhere within a certain area.

Secretly Viewing Communication Contents

A third person with malicious objectives may intentionally monitor radio waves and gain unauthorized access to the

following communication contents.

• Personal information including ID, passwords, and credit card numbers

• Contents of email messages

Illegal Intrusion

A third party with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to personal or company networks and conduct the

following illegal actions.

• Extracting personal and confidential information (information leak)

1-9

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

• Entering into communication while impersonating a specific person and distributing unauthorized information

(spoofing)

• Modifying and retransmitting intercepted communications (falsification)

• Transmitting computer viruses and destroying data and systems (destruction)

Wireless LAN cards and wireless access points contain built-in security mechanisms to address these problems and to

reduce the possibility of these problems occurring by configuring the security settings of wireless LAN products when

the product is used.

We recommend that customers take responsibility and use their judgment when configuring the security settings and

that they ensure that they fully understand the problems that can occur when the product is used without configuring the

security settings.

Limited Use of This Product (If equipped)

• Radio waves transmitted from this product may affect medical equipment. When using this product in a medical

institution or in the vicinity of medical instruments, either use this product according to the instructions and

precautions provided by the administrator of the institution or those provided on the medical instruments.

• Radio waves transmitted from this product may affect automatic control equipment including automatic doors and fire

alarms. When using this product in the vicinity of the automatic control equipment, use this product according to the

instructions and precautions provided on the automatic control equipment.

• If this product is used in devices that are directly related to service including airplanes, trains, ships, and automobiles

or this product is used in applications requiring high reliability and safety to function and in devices requiring accuracy

including those used in disaster prevention and crime prevention and those used for various safety purposes, please

use this product after considering the safety design of the entire system including adoption of a failsafe design and

redundancy design for reliability and safety maintenance of the entire system. This product is not intended for use in

applications requiring high reliability and safety including aerospace instruments, trunk communication equipment,

nuclear power control equipment, and medical equipment; hence, the decision as to whether to use this product in

these applications needs to be fully considered and determined.

Sólo México (Mexico only)

Este equipo utiliza el módulo de interfaz de red inalámbrica modelo LBWA1ZZ1CA para conectarse a las redes

Inalámbricas.

1-10

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Legal Information

Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide without the prior written consent of KYOCERA Document

Solutions Inc. is prohibited.

Regarding Trade Names

• PRESCRIBE and ECOSYS are registered trademarks of Kyocera Corporation.

• KPDL is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation.

• Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Internet Explorer, Excel and PowerPoint are registered trademarks or

trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and/or other countries.

• PCL is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.

• Adobe Acrobat, Adobe Reader and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

• Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.

• IBM and IBM PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.

• AppleTalk, Bonjour, Macintosh, and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

• All European language fonts installed in this machine are used under licensing agreement with Monotype Imaging

Inc.

• Helvetica, Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype GmbH.

• ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Bookman, ITC ZapfChancery and ITC ZapfDingbats are registered trademarks of

International Typeface Corporation.

• ThinPrint is a trademark of Cortado AG in Germany and other countries.

• UFST™ MicroType® fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc. are installed in this machine.

• This machine contains the software having modules developed by Independent JPEG Group.

• This product contains NetFront Browser of ACCESS CO., LTD.

• ACCESS, ACCESS logo and NetFront are trademarks or registered trademarks of ACCESS CO., LTD. in the United

States, Japan and other countries.

• iPad, iPhone and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

• AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.

• iOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license by

Apple Inc.

• Google and Google Cloud Print™ are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of Google LLC.

• Mopria™ is registered trademarks of Mopria™ Alliance.

• Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Direct are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance.

All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies. The

designations ™ and ® will not be used in this Operation Guide.

1-11

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

GPL/LGPL

This product contains GPL (http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html) and/or LGPL (http://www.gnu.org/licenses/lgpl.html)

software as part of its firmware. You can get the source code, and you are permitted to copy, redistribute and modify it

under the terms of GPL/LGPL. For further information including availability of the source code, visit

https://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com/gpl/.

OpenSSL License

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following

conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following

disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following

disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment:

"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.

(http://www.openssl.org/)"

4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived

from this software without prior written permission.

For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.

5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without

prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.

6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software

developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED

WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND

FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR

ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR

SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON

ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE

OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE

POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Original SSLeay License

This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so

as to conform with Netscapes SSL.

This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to. The

following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the

SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the

holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).

If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used.

This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the

package.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following

conditions are met:

1-12

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following

disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement:

"This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"

The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-).

4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must

include an acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE

FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,

DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,

WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN

ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e.

this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]

Monotype Imaging License Agreement

1Software shall mean the digitally encoded, machine readable, scalable outline data as encoded in a special format as

well as the UFST Software.

2 You agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights, styles and

versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (Typefaces) solely for your own customary business or

personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype Imaging. Under the terms of

this License Agreement, you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three printers. If you need to have access to the

fonts on more than three printers, you need to acquire a multiuser license agreement which can be obtained from

Monotype Imaging. Monotype Imaging retains all rights, title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights

are granted to you other than a License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement.

3 To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging, you agree to maintain the Software and other proprietary

information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable procedures regulating access

to and use of the Software and Typefaces.

4 You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces, except that you may make one backup copy. You

agree that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the original.

5 This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces, unless sooner terminated. This License

may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not

remedied within thirty (30) days after notice from Monotype Imaging. When this License expires or is terminated, you

shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the Software and Typefaces and documentation as

requested.

6 You agree that you will not modify, alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile the Software.

7 Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery, the Software will perform in accordance with

Monotype Imaging-published specifications, and the diskette will be free from defects in material and workmanship.

Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs, errors and omissions.

The parties agree that all other warranties, expressed or implied, including warranties of fitness for a particular

purpose and merchantability, are excluded.

8 Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and Typefaces is

repair or replacement of defective parts, upon their return to Monotype Imaging.

In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits, lost data, or any other incidental or consequential

damages, or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and Typefaces.

9 Massachusetts U.S.A. law governs this Agreement.

1-13

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

10 You shall not sublicense, sell, lease, or otherwise transfer the Software and/or Typefaces without the prior written

consent of Monotype Imaging.

11 Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data

and Computer Software clause at FAR 252-227-7013, subdivision (b)(3)(ii) or subparagraph (c)(1)(ii), as appropriate.

Further use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in

FAR 52.227-19 (c)(2).

12 You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement, understand it, and agree to be bound by its terms and

conditions. Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not contained in this Agreement. No

change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized representatives of each party.

By opening this diskette package, you agree to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement.

Knopflerfish License

This product includes software developed by the Knopflerfish Project.

http://www.knopflerfish.org

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following

conditions are met:

- Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following

disclaimer.

- Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following

disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

- Neither the name of the KNOPFLERFISH project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or

promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE

EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF

SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)

HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR

TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS

SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Apache License (Version 2.0)

Apache License

Version 2.0, January 2004

http://www.apache.org/licenses/

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION

1. Definitions.

"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1

through 9 of this document.

"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License.

"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are

under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, "control" means (i) the power, direct or

indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of

fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.

"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License.

"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software source

code, documentation source, and configuration files.

1-14

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form, including

but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types.

"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the License, as

indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided in the Appendix

below).

"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from) the

Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an

original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain

separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof.

"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any modifications or

additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work

by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For

the purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to the

Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code

control systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of

discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise

designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a Contribution."

"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been

received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work.

2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to

You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce,

prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such

Derivative Works in Source or Object form.

3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a

perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent

license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license

applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their

Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was

submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit)

alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent

infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date

such litigation is filed.

4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with

or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following conditions:

(a)You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and

(b)You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and

(c)You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark,

and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of

the Derivative Works; and

(d)If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute

must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices

that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text

file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or documentation, if provided along with the

Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices

normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the

License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an

addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be

construed as modifying the License.

You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license

terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such Derivative Works as

a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated

in this License.

1-15

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally submitted for

inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License, without any

additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any

separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions.

6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks, or product

names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and

reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.

7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and

each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF

ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE, NON-

INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible

for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your

exercise of permissions under this License.

8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or

otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in writing,

shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential

damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work (including

but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other

commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages.

9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose

to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights

consistent with this License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only on Your own behalf and on

Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold

each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your

accepting any such warranty or additional liability.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work.

To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by brackets

"[]" replaced with your own identifying information. (Don't include the brackets!) The text should be enclosed in the

appropriate comment syntax for the file format. We also recommend that a file or class name and description of

purpose be included on the same "printed page" as the copyright notice for easier identification within third-party

archives.

Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance with the

License. You may obtain a copy of the License at

http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0

Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS

IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for

the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License.

1-16

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Energy Saving Control Function

The device comes equipped with a Low Power Mode where energy consumption is reduced after a certain amount of

time elapses since the device was last used, as well as a Sleep where printer function remains in a waiting state but

power consumption is still reduced to a minimum when there is no activity with the device within a set amount of time.

Low Power Mode (page 2-34)

Sleep (page 2-34)

Power Off Timer (models for Europe) (page 2-36)

Automatic 2-Sided Print Function

This device includes 2-sided printing as a standard function. For example, by printing two 1-sided originals onto a single

sheet of paper as a 2-sided print, it is possible to lower the amount of paper used.

Duplex (page 6-18)

Printing in duplex mode reduces paper consumption and contributes to the conservation of forest resources. Duplex

mode also reduces the amount of paper that must be purchased, and thereby reduces cost. It is recommended that

machines capable of duplex printing be set to use duplex mode by default.

Resource Saving - Paper

For the preservation and sustainable use of forest resources, it is recommended that recycled as well as virgin paper

certified under environmental stewardship initiatives or carrying recognised ecolabels, which meet EN 12281:2002* or

an equivalent quality standard, be used.

This machine also supports printing on 64 g/m2 paper. Using such paper containing less raw materials can lead to

further saving of forest resources.

* : EN12281:2002 "Printing and business paper - Requirements for copy paper for dry toner imaging processes"

Your sales or service representative can provide information about recommended paper types.

Environmental benefits of "Power Management"

To reduce power consumption when idle, this machine is equipped with a power management function that

automatically activates energy-saving mode when the machine is idle for a certain period of time.

Although it takes the machine a slight amount of time to return to READY mode when in energy-saving mode, a

significant reduction in energy consumption is possible. It is recommended that the machine be used with the activation

time for energy-saving mode set to the default setting.

Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program

We participate in the ENERGY STAR® Program.

We provide the products complied with ENERGY STAR® to the market.

ENERGY STAR® is an energy efficiency program with the goal of developing and promoting the use of products with

high energy efficiency in order to help prevent global warming. By purchasing the products

complied with ENERGY STAR®, customers can help reduce emissions of greenhouse gases during product use and

cut energy-related costs.

2-1

2 Installing and Setting

up the Machine

This chapter provides information for the administrator of this machine, such as part names, cable connection, and

software installation.

Part Names (Machine Exterior) ..................... 2-2

Part Names (Connectors/Interior) ................. 2-4

Part Names (With Optional Equipments

Attached) ....................................................... 2-5

Connecting the Machine and Other Devices ..... 2-6

Connecting Cables ........................................ 2-7

Connecting LAN Cable ....................... 2-7

Connecting USB Cable ....................... 2-8

Connecting the Power Cable .............. 2-8

Power On/Off ................................................ 2-9

Power On ............................................ 2-9

Power Off ............................................ 2-9

Using the Operation Panel .......................... 2-10

Operation Panel Keys ....................... 2-10

Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle . 2-11

Assigning Functions to Function

Keys .................................................. 2-12

Touch Panel ................................................ 2-13

Home Screen .................................... 2-13

Display for Device Information .......... 2-16

Display Setting Screen ..................... 2-16

Functions Key ................................... 2-17

Using the Screen .............................. 2-17

Display of Keys That Cannot Be

Set .................................................... 2-18

Entering Numbers ............................. 2-19

Using the Enter Key .......................... 2-20

Using the Quick No. Search Key ...... 2-20

Help Screen ...................................... 2-21

Logout ............................................... 2-23

Default Settings of the Machine .................. 2-24

Setting Date and Time ...................... 2-24

Network Setup ............................................ 2-25

Configuring the Wired Network ......... 2-25

Configuring the Wireless Network .... 2-27

Setting Wi-Fi Direct ........................... 2-31

Configuring NFC ............................... 2-33

Energy Saver Function ............................... 2-34

Low Power Mode .............................. 2-34

Sleep ................................................. 2-34

Auto Sleep ........................................ 2-35

Sleep Rules (models for Europe) ...... 2-35

Sleep Level (Energy Saver) (models

except for Europe) ............................ 2-35

Energy Saver Recovery Level .......... 2-35

Weekly Timer Settings ...................... 2-35

Power Off Timer (models for Europe) 2-36

Quick Setup Wizard .................................... 2-37

Installing Software ....................................... 2-39

Software on DVD (Windows) ............ 2-39

Installing Software in Windows ......... 2-40

Uninstalling the Software .................. 2-45

Installing Software in Mac

Computer .......................................... 2-46

Checking the Counter ................................. 2-48

Additional Preparations for the

Administrator ............................................... 2-49

Strengthening the Security ............... 2-49

Command Center RX .................................. 2-51

Accessing Command Center RX ...... 2-52

Changing Security Settings .............. 2-53

Changing Device Information ........... 2-54

E-mail Settings .................................. 2-55

Creating a New Custom Box ............ 2-59

Printing a Document Stored in a Custom

Box .................................................... 2-60

2-2

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Machine Exterior)

Part Names (Machine Exterior)

1 Operation Panel

2 Power Switch

3 Waste Toner Box Cover

4 Cassette 1

5 Cassette 2

6 Handles

7 Main Power Switch

8 USB Memory Slot

9 Paper Stopper

10 Main Tray

11 Front Cover

12 First Printed Side Support

2-3

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Machine Exterior)

13 Paper Length Guide

14 Paper Width Guide

15 Paper Width Adjusting Tab

16 Support Tray Section of the Multipurpose Tray

17 Multipurpose Tray

18 Paper Width Guide

19 Right Cover 1 Lever

20 Right Cover 1

14 15

2-4

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Connectors/Interior)

Part Names (Connectors/Interior)

1 Option Interface Slot

2 Network Interface Connector

3 USB Port

4 USB Interface Connector

5 Toner Container

6 Toner Container Cover

7 Waste Toner Box

8 Waste Toner Box Cover

2-5

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (With Optional Equipments Attached)

Part Names (With Optional Equipments

Attached)

1 Tray 1 to 7 (tray 1 is the top tray)

2 Tray A

3 Tray B

4 Job Separator Tray

5 Folding Tray

Optional Equipment (page 11-2)

6 Cassette 3

7 Cassette 4

8 Cassette 5

9 Finisher Tray

10 Control Section of the Finisher

Manual Staple (page 5-30)

2-6

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting the Machine and Other Devices

Connecting the Machine and Other Devices

Prepare the cables necessary to suit the environment and purpose of the machine use.

When Connecting the Machine to the PC via USB

When Connecting the Machine to the PC on the Network

Cables that Can Be Used

NOTE

If you are using wireless LAN, refer to the following.

Configuring the Wireless Network (page 2-27)

Connection Environment Function Necessary Cable

Connect a LAN cable to the

machine.

Printer LAN cable (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX,

1000BASE-T)

Connect a USB cable to the

machine.

Printer USB2.0 compatible cable (Hi-Speed USB

compliant, Max. 5.0 m)

IMPORTANT

Using a cable other than a USB 2.0 compatible cable may cause failure.

USB

Network

Network cable

connection

Wi-Fi connection*1

Wi-Fi Direct

connection*1

Wi-Fi access point

Tablet

*1 Only for models with Wi-Fi.

2-7

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting Cables

Connecting Cables

Connecting LAN Cable

1Connect the cable to the machine.

1Connect the LAN cable to the network interface connector.

2Connect the other end of the cable to the hub.

2Power on the machine and configure the network.

Network Setup (page 2-25)

2-8

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting Cables

Connecting USB Cable

1Connect the cable to the machine.

1Connect the USB cable to the USB interface connector located on the right side of the

body.

2Connect the other end of the cable to the PC.

2Power on the machine.

Connecting the Power Cable

1Connect the cable to the machine.

Connect one end of the supplied power cable to the machine and the other end to a power

outlet.

IMPORTANT

Only use the power cable that comes with the machine.

2-9

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Power On/Off

Power On/Off

Power On

1Turn the power switch on.

Power Off

1Turn the power switch off.

The confirmation message for power supply off is displayed.

It takes about 3 minutes for power off.

Show Power Off Message (page 8-4)

CAUTION

If this machine will be left unused for an extended period (e.g. overnight), turn it off at the power switch. If the

machine will not be used for an even longer period of time (e.g. vacation), remove the power plug from the

outlet as a safety precaution.

IMPORTANT

Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to protect it from humidity.

2-10

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Using the Operation Panel

Using the Operation Panel

Operation Panel Keys

1[Home] key: Displays the Home screen.

2[Numeric Keypad] key: Displays numeric keys on the touch panel.

3 Function Key: These keys enable various functions and applications, including document box, to be registered.

4[Job Separator] indicator: Lights when there is paper in the job separator tray.

5[Status/Job Cancel] key: Displays the Status/Job Cancel screen.

6[System Menu/Counter] key: Displays the System Menu screen.

7[Reset] key: Returns settings to their default states.

8[Stop] key: Cancels or pauses the job in progress.

9[Start] key: Starts printing operations and processing for setting operations.

10 [Authentication/Logout] key: Authenticates user switching, and exits the operation for the current user (i.e. log out).

11 [Energy Saver] key: Puts the machine into Sleep Mode. Recovers from Sleep if in Sleep Mode.

12 [Attention] indicator: Lights or blinks when an error occurs and a job is stopped.

13 [Memory] indicator: Blinks while the machine is accessing the hard disk or USB memory (general purpose item).

14 [Processing] indicator: Blinks while printing or receiving print data.

15 Touch Panel: Displays icons for configuring machine settings.

Assigning Functions to Function Keys (page 2-12)

134

5 6 7 8 9 10 11

14 13 12152

2-11

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Using the Operation Panel

Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle

The angle of the operation panel can be adjusted.

2-12

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Using the Operation Panel

Assigning Functions to Function Keys

Function keys are keys to which various functions and applications, including document box, can be assigned.

Frequently used functions and applications can be assigned and the screen can easily be displayed.

For this machine, the following functions are pre-assigned; however, alternative functions can be registered by

re-assigning these functions.

•[F1] (Function key 1): Custom Box

•[F2] (Function key 2): Job Box

•[F3] (Function key 3): Removable Memory

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Function Key Assignment]

2Configure the settings.

1Select [Change] to enable the function key to be set.

2Select the function to be assigned.

NOTE

If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with

administrator privileges. The factory default login user name and login password are set as

shown below.

Function Description Reference page

None No function has been assigned. —

Custom Box Displays the Custom Box screen. page 5-21

Job Box Displays the Job Box screen. page 4-18

Removable Memory Displays the Removable Memory screen. page 5-26

Internet Browser*1

*1 This function is displayed by configuring or registering from Operation Panel.

Displays the Internet Browser screen. page 5-28

Program*1 Calls up the registered program. The icon

will change according to the function of the

program.

page 5-6

Application Name*1 Displays the selected applications. page 5-9

2-13

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Touch Panel

Home Screen

This screen is displayed by selecting the [Home] key on the operation panel. Touching an icon will display the

corresponding screen.

You can change the icons to display on the Home screen as well as its background.

Editing the Home Screen (page 2-14)

* The appearance may differ from your actual screen, depending on your configuration and option

settings.

No. Item Description

1Message Displays the message depending on the status.

2Desktop Displays function icons including the functions registered in

program. Icons that are not displayed on the first page will

appear by changing the page.

3Screen-switching

keys

Use these buttons to switch between desktop pages.

NOTE

You can also switch views by touching the screen and moving

the finger sideways (i.e. swiping).

4Taskbar Displays task icons.

5[Logout] Logs out the current user. This is displayed when user login

administration is enabled.

6Login User Name Displays the logged-in user name. This is displayed when

user login administration is enabled. Selecting "Login User

Name" will display the information of the logged-in user.

Logout

Custom Box Job Box Removable

Memory

Select the function.

Admin

Internet Browser

ProgramSystem

Paper

Settings

Status/

Job Cancel

Device

Information

Language HelpWi-Fi Direct

Program A Program B Program C Program D

mm0101_01

Logout

Select the function.

Admin

Custom Box Job Box

Removable

Memory

mm0101_02

ProgramSystem

Paper

Settings

Status/

Job Cancel

Device

Information

Language HelpWi-Fi Direct

Internet Browser

Program A Program BProgram C Program D

122

2-14

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Editing the Home Screen

You can change the background of the Home screen as well as which icons are displayed.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [Home]

2Configure the settings.

The available settings are shown below.

Available Functions to Display on Desktop

NOTE

If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in

with administrator privileges. The factory default login user name and login password are

set as shown below.

Item Description

Customize

Desktop

Specify the function icons to display on the desktop.*1

Select [Add] to display the screen for selecting the function to

display. Select the function to display and [OK].

Select an icon and [Previous] or [After] to change the display

position of the selected icon on the Desktop.

To delete an icon from desktop, select the desired one and select

[Delete].

*1 Displays a maximum of 59 function icons including the installed applications and the

functions that can be used when options are installed.

Customize

Taskbar

Specify the task icons to display on the taskbar.*2

*2 8 task icons can be displayed.

Wallpaper Configure the wallpaper of the Home screen.

Value: Images 1 to 8

Function Icon Description Reference page

Custom Box*1 Displays the Custom Box

screen.

page 5-21

Job Box*1 Displays the Job Box screen. page 4-18

Removable

Memory*1

Displays the Removable Memory

screen.

page 5-26

Internet Browser Displays the Internet Browser

screen.

page 5-28

2-15

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Available Functions to Display on Taskbar

Program Calls up the registered program.

The icon will change according

to the function of the program.

page 5-6

Application Name*2 Displays the selected

applications.

page 5-9

*1 Selected at the time of shipment from factory.

*2 The icon of the application appears.

Function Icon Description Reference

page

Status/Job Cancel*1

*1 Selected at the time of shipment from factory.

/ Displays the Status screen. If an

error occurs, the icon will show "!".

Once the error clears, the display

will return to normal.

―

Device

Information*1

Displays the Device Information

screen. Check the system and

network information.

You can also check information on

the options that are used.

page 2-16

Language*1 Displays the Language setting

screen in System Menu.

page 8-9

Paper Setting*1 Displays the Paper setting screen in

System Menu.

page 8-6

Wi-Fi Direct Wi-Fi Direct is set and a list of

information relating to the machine

that can use the network appears.

page 8-30

System Menu*1 Displays the System Menu screen. page 8-2

Help*1 Displays the Help screen. page 2-21

Program*1 Displays the program list screen. page 5-6

Message Board Displays the Message Board

screen.

NOTE

To use this function, set "Message

Board" to [ON] in System Menu.

Command Center RX User

Guide

page 8-21

Function Icon Description Reference page

2-16

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Display for Device Information

Shows device information. Allows you to check system and network information, as well as options that are used.

1[Home] key > [Device Information]

2Check the device information.

Display Setting Screen

The following procedure is an example of the screen for printing from Custom Box.

Tab Description

Identification/Wired

Network

You can check ID information such as the model name,

serial number, host name and location, and the IP

address of the wired network.

Wi-Fi*1

*1 Displayed only when the Wireless Network Interface Kit is installed.

The Wireless Network Interface Kit is an option for some models. Contact your dealer

or our sales or service representatives for detail.

IB-35 "Wireless Network Interface Kit" (page 11-5)

You can check ID information such as the model name,

serial number, host name and location, and the IP

address of the wireless network.

Software Ver./Capability You can check the software version and performance.

Option You can check information on the options that are used.

1 Shows an image of the output

paper.

2 Original : Shows the size of the

document to be printed.

Zoom : Shows the

magnification of the

document to be printed.

Paper : Shows the size of the

output paper.

3 Displays the Quick Setup screen.

4 Set the print functions.

5 Remaining amount of toner.

6 Displays the time.

7 Displays registered shortcuts.

8 Displays the output tray.

9 Displays the paper source.

3456

2-17

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Functions Key

To configure the settings for functions, select the tab and press the function key.

Using the Screen

Touch panel keys that are pressed are outlined in red.

Function key

Tab

Select [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

System Menu

1/2

m01010101_01

Quick Setup Wizard

Cassette/MP Tray Settings

Home

System/Network

Report

Common Settings

Document Box/Removable Memory

Printer

Counter

User Login/Job Accounting

2-18

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Display of Keys That Cannot Be Set

Keys of features that cannot be used due to feature combination restrictions or non-installation of options are in a non-

selectable state.

Normal Grayed out Hidden

In the following cases, the key is

grayed out and cannot be selected.

• Cannot be used in combination

with a feature that is already

selected.

• Use prohibited by user control.

•[Preview] has been selected.

Cannot be used because an option

is not installed.

NOTE

If a key that you wish to use is grayed out, the settings of the previous user may still be in effect. In this case, select

the [Reset] key and try again.

If the key is still grayed out after the [Reset] key is selected, it is possible that you are prohibited from using the

function by user control. Check with the administrator of the machine.

Staple

/Punch

OffOff

Combine

Staple

/Punch

OffOff

Combine

Staple

/Punch

OffOff

Combine

2-19

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Entering Numbers

When entering numbers, numeric keys appear on the touch panel if you select the [Numeric Keypad] key on the

operation panel or select the area in which the number is entered.

Example: When entering the number of copies

Example: When entering the login user name

1 Enter numbers and symbols.

2 Clear entered numbers.

3 Quick No. Search key.

Using the Quick No. Search Key (page 2-20)

4 Entry by numeric keys is confirmed.

Using the Enter Key (page 2-20)

5 Close the numeric keypad.

NOTE

Numeric keys do not appear on the touch panel if an optional numeric keypad is installed.

234

User Name

Password

# Keys

Cancel

# Keys

lg0301_02

User Name

Password

# Keys

Cancel

# Keys

lg0301_02

2-20

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Example: When searching for a box number

Using the Enter Key

The Enter key has the same function as the key with the Enter mark (

), such as the [OK  ] key and the [Close  ].

Using the Quick No. Search Key

The Quick No. Search key performs the same action as the [No.] displayed on the touch panel. Use the Quick No.

Search keys to perform an action by simply entering a number directly using the numeric keys. For example, you can

specify the Custom Box by its box number or recall a stored program by its program number.

NOTE

• Moving your finger while touching the top of the numeric keypad enables you to freely move to any key. (Drag

operation)

• For print screen, you can set numeric keys to be displayed in advance. In addition, you can select the layout for

numeric keys that are used on the application.

Numeric Keypad Settings (page 8-21)

No. Name Owner Used

Add/Edit Box

1/2

0001 BOX 1

Detail Open

Custom Box

Search(No.)

Search(Name)

Program

63.0 MB

b0101_01

0002 BOX 2 492.0 KB

0003 BOX 3 12.6 㻹㻮

0004 BOX 4 0.0

0005 BOX 5 0.0

0006 BOX 6 24.5 MB

No. Name Owner Used

Add/Edit Box

1/2

0001 BOX 1

Detail Open

Custom Box

Search(No.)

Search(Name)

Program

63.0 MB

b0101_01

0002 BOX 2 492.0 KB

0003 BOX 3 12.6 㻹㻮

0004 BOX 4 0.0

0005 BOX 5 0.0

0006 BOX 6 24.5 MB

No. Name Owner Used

Add/Edit Box

1/2

0001 BOX 1

Detail Open

Custom Box

Search(No.)

Search(Name)

Program

63.0 MB

b0101_01

0002 BOX 2 492.0 KB

0003 BOX 3 12.6 㻹㻮

0004 BOX 4 0.0

0005 BOX 5 0.0

0006 BOX 6 24.5 MB

2-21

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Help Screen

If you have difficulty operating the machine, you can check how to operate it using the touch panel.

To show the Help screen for a function, select [Help] on the panel of the setting screen of that function. The Help screen

shows explanations of functions and how to use them.

1Display the Paper Selection screen.

2Select [Help] on the panel.

Selecting [Help] on the Home Screen

Show the Help list.

Paper Selection (page 6-5)

1 Help titles.

2 Displays information about functions and

machine operation.

3 Displays the Help list.

4 Closes the Help screen and returns to the

original screen.

5 Scrolls up and down when the help text cannot

be displayed in its entirety on a single screen.

Select paper source by choosing a

Cassette or MP Tray.

Selecting Paper Source

1/2

End

Setting Procedure

1. Press [Functions].

2. Press [Paper Selection].

Other Help

h02010225201_01

Select paper source by choosing a

Cassette or MP Tray.

Selecting Paper Source

1/2

End

Setting Procedure

1. Press [Functions].

2. Press [Paper Selection].

Other Help

h02010225201_01

2-22

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Login/Logout

If you are setting a function that requires administrator rights, or if user login administration is enabled, you must enter

your login user name and login password.

Normal login

1Enter the login user name and login password to login.

1If this screen is displayed during operations, select [Login User Name] to enter the login

user name.

2[Login Password] > Enter the login password > [OK]

2Select [Login].

NOTE

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

You will be unable to login if you forget your login user name or login password. In this event, login with administrator

privileges and change your login user name or login password.

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

NOTE

•[# Keys] can be selected to enter the number with the numeric keys on the operation

panel.

• If user login administration is enabled, authentication destinations are displayed and

either [Local] or [Network] can be selected as the authentication destination.

• To authenticate by ID card, select [ID Card Login].

User Name

Password

abcdef

********

# Keys

Cancel

# Keys

lg0301_01

2-23

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Login/Logout

Simple Login

If this screen is displayed during operations, select a user and log in.

Logout

To logout from the machine, select the [Authentication/Logout] key to return to the login user

name/login password entry screen.

Users are automatically logged out in the following circumstances:

• When the machine enters the sleep state.

• When the auto panel reset function is activated.

NOTE

If a user password is required, an input screen will be displayed.

Simple Login Settings (page 9-15)

Select the user to login.

01 No.

Keyboard

1/2

04 05 06

07 08 09

10 11 12

lg0601_01

2-24

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine

Default Settings of the Machine

The default settings of the machine can be changed in System Menu. Before using this machine, configure such settings

as date and time, network configuration, and energy saving functions as needed.

Setting Date and Time

Follow the steps below to set the local date and time at the place of installation.

Set the date, time and time difference from GMT of the region where the machine is used.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Date/Timer/Energy Saver]

2Configure the settings.

[Time Zone] > [Date/Time] > [Date Format]

NOTE

For settings that are configurable from System Menu, refer to the following:

Setup and Registration (System Menu) (page 8-1)

NOTE

• To make changes after this initial configuration, refer to the following:

Date/Timer/Energy Saver (page 8-50)

• The correct time can be periodically set by obtaining the time from the network time server.

Command Center RX User Guide

Item Description

Time Zone Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest listed

location from the list. If you select a region that utilizes summer

time, configure settings for summer time.

Date/Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine.

Value: Year (2000 to 2037), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31),

Hour (00 to 23), Minute (00 to 59), Second (00 to 59)

Date Format Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is

displayed in Western notation.

Value: Month/Day/Year, Day/Month/Year, Year/Month/Day

2-25

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

Network Setup

Configuring the Wired Network

The machine is equipped with network interface, which is compatible with network protocols such as TCP/IP (IPv4),

TCP/IP (IPv6), NetBEUI, and IPSec. It enables network printing on the Windows, Macintosh, UNIX and other platforms.

Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the Windows network.

Be sure to connect the network cable before configuring the settings.

Connecting LAN Cable (page 2-7)

For other network settings, refer to the following:

Network (page 8-30)

For other network settings, refer to the following:

Network (page 8-30)

Configuration Method Description Reference Page

Configuring the Connection

from the Operation Panel

on This Machine

Use Quick Setup Wizard when configuring the

network in a wizard-style screen, without setting

individually in System menu.

Quick Setup Wizard (page 2-

37)

Use Wired Network Settings or Optional Network to

configure the network in details from System menu.

Wired Network Settings

(page 8-35)

Optional Network (page 8-42)

Configuring Connections

on the Web Page

For the equipped network interface, the connection

can be set by using Command Center RX. For the

optional IB-50, the connection can be set by using

the dedicated Web page.

Command Center RX User

Guide

IB-50 Operation Guide

Setting the Connection by

Using the Setup Utility of

IB-50

This is the setup tool included in the CD of IB-50. You

can use it on Windows.

IB-50 Operation Guide

NOTE

When you want to switch to the network interface other than Wired (default) after installing an optional Network

Interface Kit (IB-50) and a Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-35 or IB-51), select the desired setting on "Primary

Network (Client)".

Primary Network (Client) (page 8-45)

NOTE

If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges.

If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter a login user name and

password, and select [Login].

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

2-26

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

IPv4 setting

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > "Network" [Next] > "Wired Network

Settings" [Next] > "TCP/IP Setting" [Next] > "IPv4" [Change]

2Configure the settings.

When using DHCP server

[DHCP]: Set to [On].

When setting the static IP address

[DHCP]: Set to [Off].

[IP Address]: Enter the address.

[Subnet Mask]: Enter the subnet mask in decimal representation (0 to 255).

[Default Gateway]: Enter the address.

When using the Auto-IP, enter "0.0.0.0" in [IP Address].

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network from System Menu, or turn the

machine OFF and then ON.

Restart Network (page 8-42)

NOTE

Ask your network administrator for the IP address in advance, and have it ready when you

configure this setting.

In the following cases, set the IP address of DNS server on the Command Center RX.

• When using the host name with "DHCP" setting set to "Off"

• When using the DNS server with IP address that is not assigned by DHCP automatically.

Setting the IP Address of the DNS Server, refer to the following:

Command Center RX User Guide

2-27

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

Configuring the Wireless Network

When the Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-35 and IB-51) is installed on the machine and the connection settings are

configured, it is possible to print or send in a wireless network (wireless LAN) environment. The configuration methods

are as follows:

Setting the Connection by Using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool

To send the Wi-Fi settings configured in the Wi-Fi Setup Tool to the machine, connect the computer or handheld device

with the machine locally. The connection methods are wired connection via LAN cable and wireless LAN connection (Wi-

Fi Direct).

Configuration Method Description Reference Page

Configuring the Connection

from the Operation Panel

on This Machine

Use Quick Setup Wizard when configuring the

network in a wizard-style screen, without setting

indivisually in System menu.

Quick Setup Wizard (page 2-

37)

Use Wi-Fi Settings or Wireless Network to configure

the network in details from System menu.

Wi-Fi Settings (page 8-31)

Wireless Network (page 8-43)

Setting the Connection by

Using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool

This is the tool included in the Product Library. You

can configure the connection according to the

instructions provided by the wizard.

Setting the Connection by

Using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool

(page 2-27)

Setting the Connection by

Using the Setup Utility of

IB-51

This is the setup tool included in the CD of IB-51. You

can use it on both Windows and Mac OS.

IB-51 Operation Guide

Configuring Connections

on the Web Page

For the IB-35, the connection can be set from the

Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User

Guide

For the IB-51, the connection can be set on the

dedicated Web page.

IB-51 Operation Guide

NOTE

• The Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-35) is an option for some models and the Wireless Network Interface Kit

(IB-51) is a standard option. Contact your dealer or our sales or service representatives for detail.

IB-35 "Wireless Network Interface Kit" (page 11-5)

IB-51 "Wireless Network Interface Kit" (page 11-5)

• When you want to switch to the network interface other than Wired (default) after installing an optional Network

Interface Kit (IB-50) and a optional Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-35 or IB-51), select the desired setting on

"Primary Network (Client)".

Primary Network (Client) (page 8-45)

NOTE

• Before using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool, connect your computer to this machine locally with wired LAN cable or Wi-Fi

Direct.

• To use Wi-Fi Direct, confirm that the Wi-Fi Direct is enabled (Wi-Fi Direct is set to [ON]) and Restart Network from

the operation panel, before your computer will be connected to this machine with Wi-Fi Direct.

• To use a wired LAN cable directly connected to the machine, the Auto-IP (Link-local) address will be assigned to the

machine and the computer. This machine applies Auto-IP as the default settings.

• Configure the settings on the operation panel if your computer supports WPS.

Wi-Fi Settings (page 8-31)

Wireless Network (page 8-43)

2-28

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

Wired Connection by Using LAN Cable

1Connect the machine with a computer

1Connect the machine with a computer via LAN cable when the machine is powered on.

2Turn on the computer.

IP address (link local address) of the machine and computer is generated automatically.

2Insert the DVD.

3Display the screen.

4Select [Maintenance].

5[Wi-Fi Setup Tool] > [OK]

NOTE

• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

• If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, select

[Cancel].

• If the autorun screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].

• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] ([Allow]).

1Click [View License Agreement]

and read the License Agreement.

2Click [Accept].

2-29

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

6Configure the settings.

1[Do not use automatic configuration] > [Next] > [Next]

2[Use LAN cable] > [Next] > [Next]

3[Easy setup] > [Next]

The machine is detected.

4Select the machine > [Next]

5Select [Use the device settings.] on [Authentication mode], and enter the login user

name and password. Login user name and Password are both Admin.

6Configure the communication settings > [Next]

7Change the settings of access point as necessary > [Next]

The network is configured.

Wireless LAN Connection by Using Wi-Fi Direct

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > "Network" [Next] > "Wi-Fi Direct

Settings" [Next] > "Wi-Fi Direct" [Change]

2Configure the settings.

[On] > [OK]

3Restart the network.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > "Network" [Next] > "Restart Network"

[Start] > [Yes]

4Connect a computer or a handheld device with the machine.

5Insert the DVD.

NOTE

• Only one machine can be searched using Wi-Fi Setup Tool. It may take times to search

the machine.

• If the machine is not detected, select [Advanced setup] > [Next]. Select [Express] or

[Custom] as device discovery method and specify the IP address or host name to

search the machine.

Setting Wi-Fi Direct (page 2-31)

2-30

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

6Display the screen.

7Select [Maintenance].

8[Wi-Fi Setup Tool] > [OK]

9Configure the settings.

1[Do not use automatic configuration] > [Next] > [Next]

2[Wi-Fi Direct] > [Next] > [Next]

3[Advanced setup] > [Next]

Select [Express] or [Custom] as device discovery method and specify the IP address or

host name to search the machine.

4Select the machine > [Next]

5Select [Use the device settings.] on [Authentication mode], and enter the login user

name and password. Login user name and Password are both Admin.

6Configure the communication settings > [Next]

7Change the settings of access point as necessary > [Next]

The network is configured.

NOTE

• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

• If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, select

[Cancel].

• If the autorun screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].

• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] ([Allow]).

1Click [View License Agreement]

and read the License Agreement.

2Click [Accept].

2-31

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

Setting Wi-Fi Direct

When the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-35) is installed on the machine, setting Wi-Fi Direct enables you to

print from the Wi-Fi Direct environment. The configuration methods are as follows:

Configuring the Connection from the Operation Panel on This Machine

Connecting to Computers or Handheld Devices that Support Wi-Fi Direct

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > "Network" [Next] > "Wi-Fi Direct

Settings" [Next] > "Wi-Fi Direct" [Change]

2Configure the settings.

[On] > [OK]

3Restart the network.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > "Network" [Next] > "Restart Network"

[Start] > [Yes]

4Specify the machine name from the computer or handheld

device.

If a confirmation message appears on the operation panel of the machine, select [Yes].

The network between this machine and the handheld device is configured.

Connecting to Computers or Handheld Devices Unsupported Wi-Fi Direct

Here, we'll explain the procedures for connecting to iOS handheld devices.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > "Network" [Next] > "Wi-Fi Direct

Settings" [Next] > "Wi-Fi Direct" [Change]

2Configure the settings.

[On] > [OK]

3Restart the network.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > "Network" [Next] > "Restart Network"

[Start] > [Yes]

4[Home] key > [Wi-Fi Direct]

5Note the network name (SSID), IP address, and password.

6Configure the handheld device.

1[Settings] > [Wi-Fi]

2Select the network name (SSID) appeared in step 5 from the list.

2-32

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

3Enter the password that was provided in step 5 > [Connect]

The network between this machine and the handheld device is configured.

Configuring the Connection by Using Push Button

When your computer or handheld device does not support Wi-Fi Direct but supports WPS, you can configure the

network using push button.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > "Network" [Next] > "Wi-Fi Direct

Settings" [Next] > "Wi-Fi Direct" [Change]

2Configure the settings.

[On] > [OK]

3Restart the network.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > "Network" [Next] > "Restart Network"

[Start] > [Yes]

4[Home] key > [Wi-Fi Direct]

5Press the push button on the computer or handheld device and

select [Push Button] on the screen of operation panel

simultaneously.

The network between this machine and the computer or handheld device is configured.

IMPORTANT

You can connect up to three handheld devices at the same time using Wi-Fi Direct setting. When the devices

that support Wi-Fi Direct are connected, if you want to connect other device, disconnect the already-

connected devices from the network. The disconnection methods are as follows:

• Disconnect the network from the computer or handheld computer

• Disconnecting all devices from the network on the operation panel

Select [Home] > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [Connected Device List] > [Disconnect All]

• Configuring auto disconnecting time from the System menu

Wi-Fi Direct Settings (page 8-30)

• Configuring auto disconnecting time from the Command Center RX

Command Center RX User Guide

2-33

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network Setup

Configuring NFC

NFC (Near Field Communication) is the internal standard for near field communication in which the data communication

distance is limited to approximately 10 cm. Establishing data communication simply requires you to show the handheld

device supporting NFC to this machine.

The configuration methods are as follows:

Configuring Connections on the Web Page

You can set NFC from the Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

Configuring the Connection from the Operation Panel on This Machine

Configure the NFC from the System Menu.

NFC (page 8-49)

This section presents an example for configuring the NFC from the System Menu.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > "NFC" [Change]

2Configure the settings.

[On] > [OK]

2-34

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Energy Saver Function

Energy Saver Function

If a certain period of time elapses after the machine is last used, the machine automatically enters Low Power Mode to

reduce power consumption. If a further period of time elapses without the machine being used, the machine

automatically enters Sleep Mode, which minimizes power consumption.

Low Power Mode

If the machine is not operated for a certain period of time, the energy saver indicator will light up and the screen will

become dark to reduce power consumption. This status is referred to as Low Power Mode.

"Low power." will be displayed on the screen.

The amount of time before entering Low Power Mode: 3 minutes (default setting).

If print data is received during Low Power Mode, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing.

To resume, perform one of the following actions.

• Select any key on the operation panel.

• Touch the touch panel.

Recovery time from Low Power Mode is as follows.

• Within 15 seconds

Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more slowly.

Sleep

To enter Sleep, select the [Energy Saver] key. Touch panel and all indicators on the operation panel will go out to save

a maximum amount of power except the Energy Saver indicator. This status is referred to as Sleep.

If print data is received during Sleep, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing.

To resume, perform the following actions.

• Select any key on the operation panel.

• Touch the touch panel.

Recovery time from Sleep Mode is as follows.

• Within 17 seconds

Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more slowly.

NOTE

If the Low Power Timer is equal to the Sleep Timer, a Sleep mode is preceded.

Energy Saver indicator

2-35

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Energy Saver Function

Auto Sleep

Auto Sleep automatically switches the machine into Sleep if left idle for a preset time.

The amount of time before entering Sleep is as follows.

• 10 minutes (default setting).

To change the preset sleep time, refer to the following:

Quick Setup Wizard (page 2-37)

Sleep Rules (models for Europe)

You can set whether Sleep Mode operates for each function. When the machine enters Sleep Mode, the ID card cannot

be recognized.

For more information on Sleep Rules settings, refer to the following:

Sleep Rules (models for Europe) (page 8-51)

Sleep Level (Energy Saver) (models except for

Europe)

This mode reduces power consumption even more than normal Sleep Mode, and allows Sleep Mode to be set

separately for each function. Printing from a computer connected with a USB cable is not available while the machine is

asleep. The time required for the machine to wake up from power save mode and resume normal operation will be

longer than for normal Sleep Mode.

For more information on Sleep Level (Energy Saver) Mode settings, refer to the following:

Quick Setup Wizard (page 2-37)

Energy Saver Recovery Level

This machine can reduce power consumption when recovering from Energy Saver Mode.

For EnergySaver RecoveryLevel, "Full Recovery", "Normal Recovery" or "Power Saving Recovery" can be selected.

The factory default is "Normal Recovery".

For more information on Energy Saver Mode settings, refer to the following:

Quick Setup Wizard (page 2-37)

EnergySaver RecoveryLevel (page 8-52)

Weekly Timer Settings

Set the machine to automatically turn OFF and wake up at times specified for each day.

For more information on Weekly Timer Settings, refer to the following:

Quick Setup Wizard (page 2-37)

NOTE

If the Low Power Timer is equal to the Sleep Timer, a Sleep Mode is preceded.

NOTE

If the optional Network Interface Kit is installed, Energy Saver cannot be specified.

2-36

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Energy Saver Function

Power Off Timer (models for Europe)

If the machine is not used while in sleep mode, the power automatically turns off. The Power Off Timer is used to set the

time until the power turns off.

The factory setting for the time until the power turns off: 3 days

Power Off Timer (models for Europe) (page 8-53)

2-37

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Quick Setup Wizard

Quick Setup Wizard

For Energy Saver functions and network settings, the following settings can be configured in a wizard-style screen.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Quick Setup Wizard]

2Select a function.

Energy Saver Setup Configures sleep mode and low power mode.

1. Sleep Mode For Europe

Sleep Timer

Sleep Rules

Except for Europe

Sleep Timer

Sleep Level

2. Low Power Mode Low Power Timer

3.Recovery Mode Energy Saver Recovery Level

4.Weekly Timer Settings Weekly Timer

Schedule*1

Retry Times*1

Retry Interval*1

*1 This function is displayed when [Weekly Timer] is set to [On].

Network Setup Configures network settings.

1. Network Network Selection*2

Wi-Fi*3

DHCP*4

IP Address*5

Subnet Mask*5

Default Gateway*5

*2 This function is displayed when the Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-35) is installed.

The Wireless Network Interface Kit is an option for some models. Contact your dealer or our sales or service

representatives for detail.

IB-35 "Wireless Network Interface Kit" (page 11-5)

*3 This function is displayed when [Network Selection] is set to [Wi-Fi].

*4 This function is displayed when [Network Selection] is set to [Wired Network].

*5 This function is displayed when [DHCP] is set to [Off].

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

2-38

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Quick Setup Wizard

3Configure the settings.

Start the wizard. Follow the instructions on the screen to configure settings.

NOTE

If you experience difficulty configuring the settings, refer to the following:

Help Screen (page 2-21)

Control Description

End Exits the wizard. Settings configured so far are applied.

Previous Returns to the previous item.

Skip Advances to the next item without setting the current item.

Next Advances to the next screen.

Back Returns to the previous screen.

Complete Register the settings and exit the wizard.

2-39

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

Installing Software

Install appropriate software on your PC from the included DVD (Product Library) if you want to use the printer function of

this machine from your PC.

Software on DVD (Windows)

You can use either [

Express Install

] or [

Custom Install

] can be selected for the installation method. [

Express Install

] is

the standard installation method. To install components that cannot be installed by [

Express Install

], use [

Custom Install

For details on Custom Installation, refer to the following:

Custom Install (page 2-42)

Software Description Express

Install

KX DRIVER This driver enables files on a computer to be printed by the machine.

Multiple page description languages (PCL XL, KPDL, etc.) are

supported by a single driver. This printer driver allows you to take full

advantage of the features of the machine.

Use this driver to create PDF files.

KPDL mini-driver/PCL mini-

driver

This is a Microsoft MiniDriver that supports PCL and KPDL. There

are some restrictions on the machine features and option features

that can be used with this driver.

―

KYOCERA Net Viewer This is a utility that enables monitoring of the machine on the

network.

―

Status Monitor This is a utility that monitors the printer status and provides an

ongoing reporting function.

KYOCERA Net Direct Print This makes it possible to print a PDF file without starting Adobe

Acrobat/Reader.

―

FONTS These are display fonts that enable the machine's built-in fonts to be

used in a software application.

NOTE

Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

2-40

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

Installing Software in Windows

Express Install

The following procedure is an example for installing the software in Windows 8.1 using [Express Install].

For details on Custom Installation, refer to the following:

Custom Install (page 2-42)

1Insert the DVD.

2Display the screen.

3Select [Express Install].

4Install the software.

NOTE

• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

• If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, select

[Cancel].

• If the autorun screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].

• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] ([Allow]).

1Click [View License Agreement]

and read the License Agreement.

2Click [Accept].

2-41

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

You can also select [Use host name for port name] and set to use the host name of the

standard TCP/IP port. (A USB connection cannot be used.)

When you click [Install], a screen asking for your cooperation with data collection will be

displayed. Select one of the answer choices and click [OK].

5Finish the installation.

When "Your software is ready to use" appears, you can use the software. To print a test

page, click the "Print a test page" checkbox and select the machine.

Click [Finish] to exit the wizard.

If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen prompts.

This completes the printer driver installation procedure.

IMPORTANT

If Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct is enabled, be sure to specify the IP address for the port name.

Installation may fail if the host name is specified.

NOTE

• The machine cannot be detected unless it is on. If the computer fails to detect the

machine, verify that it is connected to the computer via a network or USB cable and that it

is turned on and click (Reload).

• If the Windows security window appears, click [Install this driver software anyway].

• To install Status Monitor on Windows versions preceding Windows 8, it is necessary to

install Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0 beforehand.

2-42

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

Custom Install

The following procedure is an example for installing the software in Windows 8.1 using [Custom Install].

1Insert the DVD.

2Display the screen.

3Select [Custom Install].

4Install the software.

1Select the device to be installed.

NOTE

• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

• If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, select

[Cancel].

• If the autorun screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].

• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] ([Allow]).

1 Click [View License Agreement]

and read the License Agreement.

2 Click [Accept].

2-43

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

2Select the driver to be installed.

3Click [Utility] tab and select the utility to be installed.

IMPORTANT

If Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct is enabled, be sure to specify the IP address for the port

name. Installation may fail if the host name is specified.

NOTE

• The machine cannot be detected unless it is on. If the computer fails to detect the

machine, verify that it is connected to the computer via a network or USB cable and

that it is turned on and click (Reload).

• If the desired device does not appear, double-click [Add custom device] to display the

list, and select the desired device and port.

2-44

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

4Install the software.

When you click [Install], a screen asking for your cooperation with data collection will be

displayed. Select one of the answer choices and click [OK].

5Finish the installation.

When "Your software is ready to use" appears, you can use the software. To print a test

page, click the "Print a test page" checkbox and select the machine.

Click [Finish] to exit the wizard.

If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen prompts.

This completes the printer driver installation procedure.

NOTE

To install Status Monitor and KYOCERA Net Viewer on Windows versions preceding

Windows 8, it is necessary to install Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0 beforehand.

2-45

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

Uninstalling the Software

Perform the following procedure to delete the Software from your computer.

1Display the screen.

Click [Search] in charms, and enter "Uninstall Kyocera Product Library" in the search box.

Select [Uninstall Kyocera Product Library] in the search list.

2Uninstall the software.

Place a check in the check box of the software to be deleted.

3Finish uninstalling.

If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen prompts.

This completes the software uninstallation procedure.

NOTE

Uninstallation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

NOTE

In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows and then select [All Programs],

[Kyocera], and [Uninstall Kyocera Product Library] to display the Uninstall Wizard.

NOTE

• The software can also be uninstalled using the Product Library.

• In the Product Library screen, click [Uninstall], and follow the on-screen instructions to

uninstall the software.

2-46

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

Installing Software in Mac Computer

The machine's printer functionality can be used by a Mac computer.

1Insert the DVD.

Double-click the [Kyocera] icon.

2Display the screen.

Double-click [Kyocera OS X x.x] depending on your Mac OS version.

3Install the Printer Driver.

Install the printer driver as directed by the instructions in the installation software.

This completes the printer driver installation.

If a USB connection is used, the machine is automatically recognized and connected.

If an IP connection is used, the settings below are required.

NOTE

• Installation on Mac OS must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

• When printing from a Macintosh computer, set the machine's emulation to [KPDL] or [KPDL(Auto)].

Printer (page 8-23)

• If connecting by Bonjour, enable Bonjour in the machine's network settings.

Bonjour (page 8-37)

• In the Authenticate screen, enter the name and password used to log in to the operating system.

• When printing via AirPrint, you do not have to install the software.

2-47

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

4Configure the printer.

1Open System Preferences and add the printer.

2Select [Default] and then select the driver after clicking on the item that appears in "Name".

3Select the options available for the machine.

4The selected machine is added.

NOTE

When using

an IP

connection,

click the IP icon for an IP connection and then enter the

host name or IP address.

The number entered in "Address" will automatically appear in

"Name". Change if needed.

2-48

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Checking the Counter

Checking the Counter

Check the number of sheets printed.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Counter]

2Check the counter.

2-49

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Additional Preparations for the Administrator

Additional Preparations for the

Administrator

In addition to the information provided in this chapter, the administrator of this machine should check the following, and

configure the settings as needed.

Strengthening the Security

This machine is shipped with two default users registered one with Machine Administrator rights, and another with

Administrator rights. Logging in as this user will allow you to configure all settings; therefore, please change the login

user name and password.

In addition, this machine is equipped with user authentication function, which can be configured to limit the access to this

machine to only those who have a registered login name and password.

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) (page 9-1)

I want to... Function Reference page

Restrict the users of the machine. User Login page 9-2

Auto Panel Reset page 8-50

ID Card Settings*1

*1 The optional Card Authentication Kit is required.

page 9-17

Restrict the basic functions that can be

used.

Group Authorization Set. page 9-9

Guest Authorization Set. page 9-11

Prevent another user from handling the

documents stored in the machine.

Custom Box page 5-15

Prevent the data stored in the machine

from being leaked.

Data Overwrite*2

*2 The optional Data Security Kit is required.

Refer to the Data

Security Kit (E)

Operation Guide.

Encryption*2

Completely delete the data on the machine

before disposing of the machine.

Data Sanitization page 8-48

Record the operation history of users. Login History Settings page 8-27

Device Log History Settings page 8-28

Secure Comm. Error Log page 8-29

2-50

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Additional Preparations for the Administrator

I want to... Function Reference page

Protect the transmission from interception

and wiretapping.

IPP over SSL page 8-40

HTTPS page 8-40

LDAP Security Refer to the Command

Center RX User

Guide.

SMTP Security page 8-37

POP3 Security page 8-37

Enhanced WSD (SSL) page 8-39

IPSec page 8-37

SNMPv3 page 8-39

Verify the software in the machine. Software Verification page 8-48

2-51

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

Command Center RX

If the machine is connected to the network, you can configure various settings using Command Center RX.

This section explains how to access Command Center RX, and how to change security settings and the host name.

Command Center RX User Guide

Settings that the administrator and general users can configure in Command Center RX are as follows.

NOTE

To fully access the features of the Command Center RX pages, enter the User Name and Password and click [Login].

Entering the predefined administrator password allows the user to access all pages, including Document Box. The

factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below. (Upper case and lower case

letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)

Setting Description Administ-

rator

General

User

Device

Information

The machine's structure can be checked.

Job Status Displays all device information, including print jobs, storing jobs, and job

log history.

Document Box Add or delete document boxes, or delete documents within a document

box.

*1 The logged in user may not be able to configure some settings, depending on the permissions of the user.

Device Settings Configure the advanced settings of the machine. ―

Function

Settings

Configure the advanced function settings. ―

Network

Settings

Configure the network advanced settings. ―

Security

Settings

Configure the security advanced settings. ―

Management

Settings

Configure the advanced management settings. ―

2-52

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

Accessing Command Center RX

1Display the screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.

[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]

Examples: https://10.180.81.3/ (for IP address)

https://MFP001 (if the host name is "MFP001")

The web page displays basic information about the machine and Command Center RX as well

as their current status.

2Configure the function.

Select a category from the navigation bar on the left of the screen.

NOTE

If the screen "There is a problem with this website's security certificate." is displayed,

configure the certificate.

Command Center RX User Guide

You can also continue the operation without configuring the certificate.

NOTE

To fully access the features of the Command Center RX pages, enter the User Name and

Password and click [Login]. Entering the predefined administrator password allows the user

to access all pages, including Document Box. The factory default setting for the default user

with administrator privileges is shown below. (Upper case and lower case letters are

distinguished (case sensitive).)

2-53

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

Changing Security Settings

1Display the screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.

[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]

3Log in with administrator privileges.

The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below.

(Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)

4Click [Security Settings].

2Configure the Security Settings.

From the [Security Settings] menu, select the setting you want to configure.

NOTE

For details on settings related to certificates, refer to the following:

Command Center RX User Guide

2-54

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

Changing Device Information

1Display the screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.

[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]

3Log in with administrator privileges.

The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below.

(Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)

4From the [Device Settings] menu, click [System].

2Specify the host name.

Enter the device information, and then click [Submit].

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

To restart the network interface card, click [Reset] in the [Management Settings]

menu, and then click [Restart Network] in "Restart".

2-55

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

E-mail Settings

By configuring the SMTP settings, it is possible to send E-mail notices when jobs have been completed.

To use this function, this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol.

In addition, configure the following.

•SMTP settings

Item: "SMTP Protocol" and "SMTP Server Name" in "SMTP"

• The sender address when the machine sends E-mails

Item: "Sender Address" in "E-mail Send Settings"

• The setting to limit the size of E-mails

Item: "E-mail Size Limit" in "E-mail Send Settings"

The procedure for specifying the SMTP settings is explained below.

1Display the screen.

Display the SMTP Protocol screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.

[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]

3Log in with administrator privileges.

The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below.

(Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)

2-56

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

4From the [Network Settings] menu, click [Protocol].

2Configure the settings.

Set "SMTP (E-mail TX)" to [On] in the "Send Protocols".

2-57

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

3Display the screen.

Display the E-mail Settings screen.

From the [Function Settings] menu, click [E-mail].

4Configure the settings.

Enter "SMTP" and "E-mail Send Settings" items.

Setting Description

SMTP Set to send e-mail from the machine.

SMTP Protocol Displays the SMTP protocol settings. Check that "SMTP

Protocol" is set to [On]. If [Off] is set, click [Protocol] and

set the SMTP protocol to [On].

SMTP Server Name*1 Enter the host name or IP address of the SMTP server.

SMTP Port Number Specify the port number to be used for SMTP. The default

port number is 25.

SMTP Server Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds.

Authentication

Protocol

To use SMTP authentication, enter the user information for

authentication.

SMTP Security Set SMTP security.

Turn on "SMTP Security" in "SMTP (E-mail TX)" on the

[Protocol Settings] page.

Connection Test Tests to confirm that the E-mail function is operating under

the settings without sending a mail.

Domain Restriction To restrict the domains, click the [Domain List] and enter

the domain names of addresses to be allowed or rejected.

Restriction can also be specified by e-mail address.

2-58

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

5Click [Submit].

POP3 POP3 Protocol You don't need to set the following items when you only

enable the function of sending e-mail from the machine. Set

the following items if you want to enable the function of

receiving e-mail on the machine.

Command Center RX User Guide

Check Interval

Run once now

Domain Restriction

POP3 User Settings

E-mail

Send

Settings

E-mail Size Limit Enter the maximum size of E-mail that can be sent in

kilobytes. When E-mail size is greater than this value, an

error message appears and E-mail sending is cancelled.

Use this setting if you have set E-mail Size Limit for SMTP

server. If not, enter a value of 0 (zero) to enable E-mail

sending regardless of the size limit.

Sender Address*1 Specify the sender address for when the machine sends E-

mails, such as the machine administrator, so that a reply or

non-delivery report will go to a person rather than to the

machine. The sender address must be entered correctly for

SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the sender

address is 128 characters.

Signature Enter the signature. The signature is free form text that will

appear at the end of the E-mail body. It is often used for

further identification of the machine. The maximum length

of the signature is 512 characters.

Function Defaults Change the function default settings in [Common/Job

Default Settings] page.

*1 Be sure to enter the items.

Setting Description

2-59

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

Creating a New Custom Box

1Display the screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.

[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]

3From the [Document Box] menu, click [Custom Box].

4Click [Add].

2Configure the Custom Box.

1Enter the box details.

Enter the information for the custom box you want to register. For details on the fields to

populate, refer to the following:

2Click [Submit].

Command Center RX User Guide

2-60

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

Printing a Document Stored in a Custom Box

1Display the screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.

[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]

3From the [Document Box] menu, click [Custom Box].

4Click the number or name of the Custom Box in which the document is stored.

2Print the document.

2-61

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

1Select the document you wish to print.

Select the checkbox of the document to be printed.

2Click [Print].

3Configure settings for printing, click [Print].

3-1

3 Preparation before

Use

This chapter explains the following operations.

Loading Paper .................................................................................................................................................... 3-2

Precaution for Loading Paper .................................................................................................................. 3-2

Selecting the Paper Feeder Units ............................................................................................................ 3-3

Loading in Cassette 1 .............................................................................................................................. 3-4

Loading in Cassette 2 .............................................................................................................................. 3-7

Loading Envelopes or Cardstock in the Cassettes ................................................................................ 3-10

Loading in the Large Capacity Feeder ................................................................................................... 3-14

Loading in the Side Feeder .................................................................................................................... 3-16

Precautions for Outputting Paper ..................................................................................................................... 3-18

Paper Stopper ........................................................................................................................................ 3-18

Envelope Stack Guide ........................................................................................................................... 3-18

Stack Level Adjuster .............................................................................................................................. 3-19

3-2

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

Loading Paper

Precaution for Loading Paper

When you open a new package of paper, fan the sheets to separate them slightly prior to loading in the following steps.

Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface.

In addition, note the following points.

• If the paper is curled or folded, straighten it before loading. Paper that is curled or folded

may cause a jam.

• Avoid exposing opened paper to high humidity as dampness can be a cause of problems.

Seal any remaining paper after loading in the multipurpose tray or cassettes back in the

paper storage bag.

• Leaving paper in the cassette for a long time may cause a discoloration of paper by heat

from the cassette heater.

• If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, protect all paper from humidity by

removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag.

IMPORTANT

If you print onto used paper (paper already used for printing), do not use paper that is

stapled or clipped together. This may damage the machine or cause poor image

quality.

NOTE

If you use special paper such as letterhead, paper with holes or paper with pre-prints like

logo or company name, refer to the following:

Paper (page 11-12)

3-3

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

Selecting the Paper Feeder Units

Select the paper feeder units according to the size and type of paper.

No. Name Paper Size Paper Type Capacity Page

1Cassette 1 A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6-R, B5-R, B5, B6-R,

Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R,

Executive, Oficio II, Folio, 16K-R, 16K, ISO

B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9,

Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch,

Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki

(Cardstock), Oufuku hagaki (Return

postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom 1 to

Plain, Rough,

Vellum, Recycled,

Preprinted, Bond,

Cardstock, Color,

Prepunched,

Letterhead,

Envelope, Thick,

High Quality,

Custom 1 to 8

500 sheets

(80 g/m2)

page 3-4

2Cassette 2 A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6-R, B4, B5-R,

B5, B6-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger,

Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R,

Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K,

16K-R, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10,

Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope

Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,

Envelope C4, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku

hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4,

Youkei 2, Custom 1 to 4

3Cassette 3

4Cassette 4

5Cassette 3 A4, Letter, B5 (Fixed to one of sizes.) Plain, Rough,

Vellum, Recycled,

Preprinted, Bond,

Color, Prepunched,

Letterhead, Thick,

High Quality,

Custom 1 to 8

1,500 sheets

(80 g/m2)

page 3-14

6Cassette 4

7Cassette 5 3,000 sheets

(80 g/m2)

page 3-16

NOTE

• The number of sheets that can be held varies depending on your environment and paper type.

• You should not use inkjet printer paper or any paper with a special surface coating. (Such paper may cause paper

jams or other faults.)

3-4

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

Loading in Cassette 1

1Pull the cassette completely out of the machine.

2Adjust the paper length guide to the paper size required.

NOTE

Do not pull out more than one cassette at a time.

NOTE

When using Legal size paper, move the paper length guide to the extreme left and lay it

down.

3-5

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

Adjust the position of the paper width guides located on the left

and right sides of the cassette.

4Load paper.

5Be sure that the paper length and width guides rest securely

against the paper.

If there is a gap, readjust the guides to fit the paper.

IMPORTANT

• Load the paper with the print side facing up.

• After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the

cassette.

Precaution for Loading Paper (page 3-2)

• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled

or folded may cause paper jams.

• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration

above).

• If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guide,

the paper may skew or become jammed.

3-6

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

6Gently push the cassette back in.

7Insert the indication on the sheet so as to match the size and

type of paper to be placed.

8Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] > [Cassette/MP Tray Settings] > "Cassette 1" [Next]

9Configure the function.

Select the paper size and paper type.

Cassette 1 (to 5) (page 8-6)

NOTE

Paper size can be automatically detected and selected, refer to the following.

Paper Selection (page 6-5)

Cassette 1 (to 5) (page 8-6)

3-7

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

Loading in Cassette 2

1Pull the cassette completely out of the machine.

2Adjust the paper length guide to the paper size required.

NOTE

Do not pull out more than one cassette at a time.

NOTE

When using 12×18" size paper, move the paper length guide to the extreme left and lay it

down.

3-8

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

Adjust the position of the paper width guides located on the left

and right sides of the cassette.

4Load paper.

NOTE

When using SRA3/12×18", A3, or Ledger paper, adjust the auxiliary guide accordingly.

IMPORTANT

• Load the paper with the print side facing up.

• After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the

cassette.

Precaution for Loading Paper (page 3-2)

• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled

or folded may cause paper jams.

• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration

above).

• If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guide,

the paper may skew or become jammed.

3-9

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

5Be sure that the paper length and width guides rest securely

against the paper.

If there is a gap, readjust the guides to fit the paper.

6Gently push the cassette back in.

7Insert the indication on the sheet so as to match the size and

type of paper to be placed.

8Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] > [Cassette/MP Tray Settings] > "Cassette 2" [Next]

9Configure the function.

Select the paper size and paper type.

Cassette 1 (to 5) (page 8-6)

NOTE

Paper size can be automatically detected and selected, refer to the following.

Paper Selection (page 6-5)

Cassette 1 (to 5) (page 8-6)

3-10

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

Loading Envelopes or Cardstock in the Cassettes

Load envelope or cardstock in the cassettes. Here, we'll explain the procedures for cassette 1, as an example.

1Pull Cassette 1 completely out of the machine.

2Remove the envelope feed guide.

When loading cardstock, go to step 5.

3Expand the lever of the envelope feed guide when loading

envelopes larger than Envelope C5 which has a width of

162 mm (6.4").

NOTE

Do not pull out more than one cassette at a time.

3-11

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

4Attach the envelope feed guide as shown in the illustration.

The illustration below shows that the lever of the envelope feed guide is expanded.

5Adjust the paper length guide to the paper size required.

6Adjust the position of the paper width guides located on the

left and right sides of the cassette.

3-12

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

7Load the envelope with the print side facing up.

Example: When printing the address.

8Be sure that the paper length and width guides rest securely

against the paper.

If there is a gap, readjust the guides to fit the paper.

IMPORTANT

• How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of

envelope. Be sure to load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the

wrong direction or on the wrong face.

• Ensure that loaded envelopes do not exceed the level indicator.

NOTE

Approximately 100 post cards or 30 envelopes can be set.

3-13

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

9Gently push Cassette 1 back in.

10 Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] > [Cassette/MP Tray Settings] > ”Cassette 1” [Next]

11 Configure the function.

Select the paper size and type of envelope.

12 Set by using the printer driver on the PC.

Select the paper size and type of envelope using the printer driver on the PC.

Cassette 1 (to 5) (page 8-6)

Printing on Standard Sized Paper (page 4-4)

Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper (page 4-6)

3-14

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

Loading in the Large Capacity Feeder

The procedures here represent the cassette 3.

1Pull the cassette completely out of the machine.

2Load paper.

3Gently push the cassette back in.

IMPORTANT

• Load the paper with the print side facing up.

• After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the

cassette.

Precaution for Loading Paper (page 3-2)

• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled

or folded may cause paper jams.

• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator.

3-15

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

4Insert the indication on the sheet so as to match the size and

type of paper to be placed.

5Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] > [Cassette/MP Tray Settings] > "Cassette 3" [Next] > "Media

Type" [Change]

6Configure the function.

Select the paper type.

Cassette 1 (to 5) (page 8-6)

3-16

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

Loading in the Side Feeder

1Pull the cassette completely out of the machine.

2Load paper.

IMPORTANT

• Load the paper with the print side facing down.

• After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the

cassette.

Precaution for Loading Paper (page 3-2)

• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled

or folded may cause paper jams.

• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator.

3-17

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

3Gently push the cassette back in.

4Insert the indication on the sheet so as to match the size and

type of paper to be placed.

5Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] > [Cassette/MP Tray Settings] > "Cassette 5" [Next] > "Media

Type" [Change]

6Configure the function.

Select the paper type.

Cassette 1 (to 5) (page 8-6)

3-18

Preparation before Use > Precautions for Outputting Paper

Precautions for Outputting Paper

Paper Stopper

When using paper A3/Ledger or larger, open the paper stopper shown in the figure.

Envelope Stack Guide

To use an envelope, open the Envelope Stack Guide as shown below.

NOTE

When using the Job Separator for output, you can if needed open the paper stopper on the Job Separator.

3-19

Preparation before Use > Precautions for Outputting Paper

Stack Level Adjuster

If the paper output to the Job Separator is significantly curled, you can extend the Stack Level Adjuster as described in

the figure.

Extending the Stack Level Adjuster

Restoring the Stack Level Adjuster

4-1

4 Printing from PC

This chapter explains the following topics:

Printer Driver Properties Screen ........................................................................................................................ 4-2

Displaying the Printer Driver Help ............................................................................................................ 4-3

Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings (Windows 8.1) ................................................................... 4-3

Printing from PC ................................................................................................................................................. 4-4

Printing on Standard Sized Paper ........................................................................................................... 4-4

Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper .................................................................................................... 4-6

Banner Printing ........................................................................................................................................ 4-9

Canceling Printing from a Computer ...................................................................................................... 4-15

Printing from the Handheld Device .................................................................................................................. 4-16

Printing by AirPrint ................................................................................................................................. 4-16

Printing by Google Cloud Print .............................................................................................................. 4-16

Printing by Mopria .................................................................................................................................. 4-16

Printing with Wi-Fi Direct ....................................................................................................................... 4-16

Printing with NFC ................................................................................................................................... 4-17

Printing Data Saved in the Printer .................................................................................................................... 4-18

Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing the Job .............................................................. 4-18

Printing Documents from Private Print Box ........................................................................................... 4-19

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Private Print Box ....................................................................... 4-19

Printing Document from Stored Job Box ............................................................................................... 4-20

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Stored Job Box ......................................................................... 4-20

Printing Document from Quick Copy Box .............................................................................................. 4-21

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Quick Copy Box ........................................................................ 4-21

Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box ......................................................................................... 4-22

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Proof and Hold Box ................................................................... 4-22

Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor) ................................................................................................. 4-23

Accessing the Status Monitor ................................................................................................................ 4-23

Exiting the Status Monitor ...................................................................................................................... 4-23

Quick View State .................................................................................................................................... 4-23

Printing Progress Tab ............................................................................................................................. 4-24

Paper Tray Status Tab ........................................................................................................................... 4-24

Toner Status Tab .................................................................................................................................... 4-24

Alert Tab ................................................................................................................................................. 4-25

Status Monitor Context Menu ................................................................................................................ 4-25

Status Monitor Notification Settings ....................................................................................................... 4-26

4-2

Printing from PC >

Printer Driver Properties Screen

The printer driver properties screen allows you to configure a variety of print-related settings.

Printer Driver User Guide

No. Description

1 [Quick Print] tab

Provides icons that can be used to easily configure frequently used functions. Each time you click

an icon, it changes to an image resembling the print results and applies the settings.

[Basic] tab

This tab groups basic functions that are frequently used. You can use it to configure the paper size,

destination, and duplex printing.

[Layout] tab

This tab lets you configure settings for printing various layouts, including booklet printing, combine

mode, poster printing, and scaling.

[Finishing] tab

This tab lets you configure settings related to finishing of printed media, including binding and

stapling.

[Imaging] tab

This tab lets you configure settings related to the quality of the print results.

[Publishing] tab

This tab lets you create covers and inserts for print jobs and put inserts between sheets of OHP

film.

[Job] tab

This tab lets you configure settings for saving print data from the computer to the machine.

Regularly used documents and other data can be saved to the machine for easy printing later.

Since saved documents can be printed directly from the machine, this function is also convenient

when you wish to print a document that you don't want others to see.

[Advanced] tab

This tab lets you configure settings for adding text pages or watermarks to print data.

4-3

Printing from PC >

Displaying the Printer Driver Help

The printer driver includes Help. To learn about print settings, open the printer driver print settings screen and display

Help as explained below.

Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings

(Windows 8.1)

The default printer driver settings can be changed. By selecting frequently used settings, you can omit steps when

printing. For the settings, refer to the following:

Printer Driver User Guide

1In charms on Desktop, click [Settings], [Control Panel], and

then [View devices and printers].

2Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the

[Printer properties] menu of the printer driver.

3Click the [Preferences] button on the [General] tab.

4Select the default settings and click the [OK] button.

2 [Profiles]

Printer driver settings can be saved as a profile. Saved profiles can be recalled at any time, so it's

a convenient practice to save frequently used settings.

3 [Reset]

Click to revert settings to their initial values.

1 Click the [?] button in the upper right corner of

the screen.

2 Click the item you want to know about.

NOTE

The Help appears, even when you click the item you want to know about and press the [F1] key on your keyboard.

No. Description

4-4

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

Printing from PC

This section provides the printing method using the KX DRIVER.

Printing on Standard Sized Paper

If you loaded a paper size that is included in the print sizes of the machine, select the paper size in the [Basic] tab of the

print settings screen of the printer driver.

1Display the screen.

Click [File] and select [Print] in the application.

NOTE

• To print the document from applications, install the printer driver on your computer from the supplied DVD

(Product Library).

• Depending on the resolution of the display in use, the current settings are displayed at the bottom of the printer

driver.

• When printing the cardstock or envelopes, load the cardstock or envelopes in the multipurpose tray before

performing the following procedure.

Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray (page 5-2)

NOTE

Specify the paper size and media type to print from the operation panel.

Cassette/MP Tray Settings (page 8-6)

4-5

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

2Configure the settings.

1Select the machine from the "Printer" menu and click the [Properties] button.

2Select the [Basic] tab.

3Click "Print size" menu and select the paper size to use for printing.

To load the paper of size that is not included in print sizes of the machine such as cardstock

or envelopes, the paper size needs to be registered.

To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency, click "Media type" menu

and select the media type.

4Click [OK] button to return to the Print dialog box.

3Start printing.

Click the [OK] button.

Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper (page 4-6)

4-6

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper

If you loaded a paper size that is not included in the print sizes of the machine, register the paper size in the [Basic] tab

of the print settings screen of the printer driver.

The registered size can be selected from the "Print size" menu.

1Display the screen.

1In charms on Desktop, click [Settings], [Control Panel], and then [View devices and

printers].

2Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of

the printer driver.

3Click the [Preferences] button on the [General] tab.

2Register the paper size.

1Click the [Basic] tab.

2Click the [Page Sizes...] button.

3Click the [New] button.

NOTE

To execute printing at the machine, set the paper size and type in the following:

Paper Settings (page 8-10)

NOTE

In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows, and then click [View devices and

printers].

4-7

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

4Enter the paper size.

5Enter the name of the paper.

6Click the [Save] button.

7Click the [OK] button.

8Click the [OK] button.

3Display the print settings screen.

Click [File] and select [Print] in the application.

4Select the paper size and type of non-standard size paper.

1Select the machine from the "Printer" menu and click the [Properties] button.

2Select the [Basic] tab.

4-8

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

3Click "Print size" menu and select the paper size registered in step 2.

To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency, click "Media type" menu

and select the media type.

4Select the paper source in the "Source" menu.

5Click [OK] button to return to the Print dialog box.

5Start printing.

Click the [OK] button.

NOTE

If you loaded a postcard or envelope, select [Cardstock] or [Envelope] in the "Media

type" menu.

4-9

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

Banner Printing

When a document length from 470.1 mm (18.5") to a maximum of 1,220.0 mm (48") is specified for printing, the print job

is treated as banner printing.

Using the Multipurpose Tray

1Display the screen.

Click [File] and select [Print] in the application.

2Configure the settings.

1Select the machine from the "Printer" menu and click the [Properties] button.

2Select the [Basic] tab.

3Click the [Page Sizes...] button.

Max. number of sheets 1 sheet (manual feed), 10 sheets (when optional banner tray is attached*1)

*1 When the banner tray (option) is used, up to 10 sheets of banner paper can be fed continuously For details,

refer to the follows:

Using the Banner Tray (Option) (page 4-12)

Paper width 210 mm to 304.8 mm (8.26" to 12")

Paper length 470.1 mm to 1,220 mm (18.5" to 48")

Paper weight 136 to 163 g/m2

Media type Heavy 2

4-10

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

3Register the paper size.

1Click the [New] button.

2Enter the length (470.1 mm (18.51") or longer), and width of the custom paper size being

registered.

3Enter the name of the paper.

4Click the [Save] button.

5Click the [OK] button.

4Configure the print paper size.

1Click "Print size" menu and select the paper size registered in step 3.

2Click the [OK] button.

NOTE

When banner printing, a resolution of 600 dpi is set.

4-11

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

5Start printing.

Click the [OK] button.

When you execute printing in this case, a message appears on the machine's operation panel.

Place the paper in the Multipurpose tray, continue to support it so that it does not fall, and

select [Continue]. To cancel printing, select [Cancel].

Set whether the confirmation screen appears before each sheet is printed when printing

multiple banner sheets.

IMPORTANT

• If an output tray that cannot be used for banner printing such as Mailbox (option) is

selected in the printer driver, the output tray automatically changes to a tray that

can be used.

• After pressing [Continue], support the paper with both hands so that it feeds in

correctly.

• After printing starts, catch the paper when it is output so that it does not fall. When

using the main tray as the output location, do not stand up the stopper.

Message Banner Print (page 8-20)

Use MP tray to print on the following paper.

ContinueCancel

Custom 1297x1200mm

Set paper and press [Continue].

Job No.: Job Name: User Name:

E0404_01

4-12

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

Using the Banner Tray (Option)

When the banner tray (option) is used, up to 10 sheets of banner paper can be fed continuously.

The operation procedure for setting the banner paper by using the printer driver is the same as that of using the

multipurpose tray.

Using the Multipurpose Tray (page 4-9)

1Open the multipurpose tray.

Open the multipurpose tray until it stops.

Do not extend the support tray section of the multipurpose tray.

2Attach the banner tray.

1Release the paper width guide lock on the banner tray and open to the maximum width.

2Attach the banner tray to the multipurpose tray.

NOTE

The paper length supported in banner tray is 470.1 mm to 1,220 mm (18.5" to 48").

4-13

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

3Load paper.

1Open the paper width guides on the multipurpose tray to the maximum width.

Make sure that the banner tray is attached so that the paper width guides on the banner

tray are outside the paper width guides on the multipurpose tray.

2Load banner paper so that it passes under the paper clamp bar.

3Loop the banner paper back and place the end on the paper support.

4-14

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

4Adjust the paper width guides to the width of the paper.

5Adjust the paper width guides on the banner tray to the same width as the paper width

guides on the multipurpose tray and lock.

IMPORTANT

If there is a gap between the paper and the paper width guides, readjust the guides

to fit the paper in order to prevent skewed feeding and paper jams.

IMPORTANT

Remove the paper when banner printing finishes, or when you are not using the banner tray.

NOTE

The print confirmation screen can be set in System Menu to not appear when the banner tray is attached. This will

allow continuous printing on multiple sheets. Refer to the follows:

Message Banner Print (page 8-20)

4-15

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

Canceling Printing from a Computer

To cancel a print job executed using the printer driver before the printer begins printing, do the following:

1Double-click the printer icon ( ) displayed on the taskbar at

the bottom right of the Windows desktop to display a dialog

box for the printer.

2Click the file for which you wish to cancel printing and select

[Cancel] from the "Document" menu.

NOTE

When canceling printing from this machine, refer to the following:

Canceling Jobs (page 5-14)

4-16

Printing from PC > Printing from the Handheld Device

Printing from the Handheld Device

This machine supports the AirPrint, Google Cloud Print and Mopria. According to the supported OS and application, you

can print the job from any handheld device or computer without installing a printer driver.

Printing by AirPrint

AirPrint is a printing function that is included standard in iOS 4.2 and later products, and Mac OS X 10.7 and later

products.

To use the AirPrint, make sure that the AirPrint setting is enabled in the Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

Printing by Google Cloud Print

Google Cloud Print is a printing service provided by Google. This service enables a user with a Google account to print

from a machine connected to the Internet.

The machine can be configured in the Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

Printing by Mopria

Mopria is a standard on printing function included in Android 4.4 or later products.

Mopria Print Service needs to be installed and enabled in advance.

For details on how to use, refer to a Web site of Mopria Alliance.

Printing with Wi-Fi Direct

Wi-Fi Direct is a wireless LAN standard that Wi-Fi Alliance has been established. This is one of the functions of the

wireless LAN, without a wireless LAN access point or wireless LAN router, between devices can communicate directly

on a peer to peer basis.

The printing procedure by the Wi-Fi Direct is the same as that from the normal handheld devices.

When you use a printer name or Bonjour name on the port settings of the printer property, you can print the job by

specifying the name at Wi-Fi Direct connection.

When you use an IP address for the port, specify the IP address of this machine.

NOTE

A Google account is necessary to use Google Cloud Print. Obtain a Google account if you do not have one.

It is also necessary to register the machine with the Google Cloud Print service in advance. The machine can be

registered from a PC connected to the same network.

4-17

Printing from PC > Printing from the Handheld Device

Printing with NFC

When the Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Direct has been configured in advance, the network between this machine and handheld

device will be configured by simply tapping an NFC tag.

Configuring the Wireless Network (page 2-27)

Setting Wi-Fi Direct (page 2-31)

4-18

Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer

Printing Data Saved in the Printer

You can save the print job into the Job Box of this device and print it as necessary.

If you configure settings in the [Job] tab of the printer driver and then print, the print job will be saved in the Job Box

(memory) and printing can be executed at the machine.

Follow the work flow below when using Job Box.

Specifying the Job Box from a computer and sending the print job. (page 4-18)

Using the operation panel to specify a file within a Box and printing it.

You can print the documents from the following boxes.

Printing Documents from Private Print Box (page 4-19)

Printing Document from Stored Job Box (page 4-20)

Printing Document from Quick Copy Box (page 4-21)

Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box (page 4-22)

Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing

the Job

1Click [File] and select [Print] in the application.

The Print dialog box displays.

2Select the machine from the "Name" menu.

3Click the [Properties] button.

The Properties dialog box displays.

4Click the [Job] tab and select the [Job storage (e-MPS)] check

box to set the function.

NOTE

For information on how to use the printer driver software, refer to the following:

Printer Driver User Guide

4-19

Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer

Printing Documents from Private Print Box

In Private Printing, you can specify that a job is not to be printed until you operate the machine. When sending the job

from the application software, specify a 4-digit access code in the printer driver. The job is released for printing by

entering the access code on the operation panel, ensuring confidentiality of the print job. The data will be deleted upon

completion of the print job or after the power switch is turned off.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Job Box]

2[Private Print/Stored Job] > [Open]

3Select the creator of the document > [Open]

2Print the document.

1Select the document to print > [Print]

2Enter the access code.

3Specify the number of copies to print as desired.

4Select [Start Print].

Printing starts.

Upon completion of printing, the Private Print job is automatically deleted.

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Private Print

Box

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Job Box]

2[Private Print/Stored Job] > [Open]

3Select the creator of the document > [Open]

2Delete the document.

Select the document to delete > [Delete] > Enter the access code

The document is deleted.

2/3

Detail

User:s

File

Print Delete

2017/10/10 09:40

2017/10/10 09:45

2017/10/10 09:50

2017/10/10 09:55

2017/10/10 10:00

File Name Date and Time Size

30.5

21.0

MB21.0

66.0

15.7

User 1

b0202_01

4-20

Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer

Printing Document from Stored Job Box

In Stored Job, the print data sent from the application is saved to the machine. You can set up an access code as

necessary. If you set up an access code, enter the access code when printing. Print data will be stored in the Stored Job

Box after printing. This will allow printing of the same print data repeatedly.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Job Box]

2[Private Print/Stored Job] > [Open]

3Select the creator of the document > [Open]

2Print the document.

1Select the document to print > [Print]

2Specify the number of copies to print as desired.

3Select [Start Print].

Printing starts.

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Stored Job Box

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Job Box]

2[Private Print/Stored Job] > [Open]

3Select the creator of the document > [Open]

2Delete the document.

1Select the document to delete > [Delete]

2If the document is protected by an access code, enter the code.

The document is deleted.

NOTE

If the document is protected by an access code, the password entry screen will be

displayed. Enter the password using the numeric keys.

4-21

Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer

Printing Document from Quick Copy Box

Quick Copy feature facilitates additional prints of a document already printed. Activating Quick Copy and printing a

document using the printer driver allow the print data to be stored in the Quick Copy Job Box. When additional copies

are required, you can reprint the required number of copies from the touch panel. By default, up to 32 documents can be

stored. When power is turned off, all stored jobs will be deleted.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Job Box]

2[Quick Copy/Proof and Hold] > [Open]

3Select the creator of the document > [Open]

2Print the document.

1Select the document to print > [Print]

2Specify the number of copies to print as desired.

3Select [Start Print].

Printing starts.

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Quick Copy Box

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Job Box]

2[Quick Copy/Proof and Hold] > [Open]

3Select the creator of the document > [Open]

2Delete the document.

Select the document to delete > [Delete] > [Yes]

The document is deleted.

NOTE

• When the number of jobs reaches the limit, the oldest job will be overwritten by the new one.

• To maintain free space on the box, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs.

Quick Copy Job Retention (page 8-22)

4-22

Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer

Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box

The Proof and Hold feature produces only a single proof print of multiple-print job and holds printing of the remaining

copies. Printing a multiple-print job in Proof and Hold using the printer driver allows only a single copy to be printed while

maintaining the document data in the Job Box. To continue to print the remaining copies, use the touch panel. You can

change the number of copies to print.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Job Box]

2[Quick Copy/Proof and Hold] > [Open]

3Select the creator of the document > [Open]

2Print the document.

1Select the document to print > [Print]

2Specify the number of copies to print as desired.

3Select [Start Print].

Printing starts.

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Proof and Hold

Box

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Job Box]

2[Quick Copy/Proof and Hold] > [Open]

3Select the creator of the document > [Open]

2Delete the document.

Select the document to delete > [Delete] > [Yes]

The document is deleted.

4-23

Printing from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)

Monitoring the Printer Status (Status

Monitor)

The Status Monitor monitors the printer status and provides an ongoing reporting function.

Accessing the Status Monitor

The Status Monitor also starts up when printing is started.

Exiting the Status Monitor

Use either of the methods listed below to exit the Status Monitor.

• Exit manually:

Click the settings icon and select Exit in the menu to exit the Status Monitor.

• Exit automatically:

The Status Monitor automatically shuts down after 7 minutes if it is not being used.

Quick View State

The status of the printer is displayed using icons. Detailed information is displayed when the Expand button is clicked.

Detailed information is displayed by clicking on each icon tab.

NOTE

When you activate Status Monitor, check the status below.

• KX DRIVER is installed.

•Either [Enhanced WSD] or [Enhanced WSD(SSL)] is enabled.

Network (page 8-30)

1 Printing progress tab

2 Paper tray status tab

3 Toner status tab

4Alert tab

5 Expand button

6 Settings icon

12 345 6

4-24

Printing from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)

Printing Progress Tab

The status of the print jobs is displayed.

Select a job on the job list and it can be canceled using the menu displayed with a right-click.

Paper Tray Status Tab

Information is displayed about the paper in the printer and about the amount of paper remaining.

Toner Status Tab

The amount of toner remaining is displayed.

1 Status icon

2 Job list

4-25

Printing from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)

Alert Tab

If an error occurs, a notice is displayed using a 3D image and a message.

Status Monitor Context Menu

The following menu is displayed when the settings icon is clicked.

•Command Center RX

If the printer is connected to a TCP/IP network and has its own IP address, use a web browser to access the

Command Center RX to modify or confirm the network settings. This menu is not displayed when using USB

connection.

Command Center RX User Guide

•Notification…

This sets the display of the Status Monitor.

Status Monitor Notification Settings (page 4-26)

•www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com

Open our website.

•Exit

Exits the Status Monitor.

4-26

Printing from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)

Status Monitor Notification Settings

The Status Monitor settings and event list details are displayed.

Select whether notification is performed when an error in the event list occurs.

1Select Enable event notification.

If this setting is set to Off, then the Status Monitor will not start up even when printing is

executed.

2Select an event to use with the text to speech function in

Available events.

3Click Sound file / Text to Speech column.

Click the browse (...) button to notify the event by sound file.

When customizing the message texts to read on the screen aloud, enter the texts in the text box.

NOTE

The available file format is WAV.

5-1

5 Operation on the

Machine

This chapter explains the following topics:

Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray ............................................................................................................ 5-2

Program ............................................................................................................................................................. 5-6

Registering Programs .............................................................................................................................. 5-6

Recalling Programs ................................................................................................................................. 5-7

Editing Programs ..................................................................................................................................... 5-7

Deleting Programs ................................................................................................................................... 5-8

Application ......................................................................................................................................................... 5-9

Installing Applications .............................................................................................................................. 5-9

Activating Applications ........................................................................................................................... 5-10

Deactivating Applications ........................................................................................................................ 5-11

Uninstalling Applications ......................................................................................................................... 5-11

Registering Shortcuts ....................................................................................................................................... 5-12

Adding Shortcuts ................................................................................................................................... 5-12

Editing Shortcuts .................................................................................................................................... 5-13

Deleting Shortcuts ................................................................................................................................. 5-13

Canceling Jobs ................................................................................................................................................ 5-14

Using Document Boxes ................................................................................................................................... 5-15

What is Custom Box? ............................................................................................................................ 5-15

What is Job Box? ................................................................................................................................... 5-15

What is Removable Memory Box? ........................................................................................................ 5-15

Basic Operation for Document Box ....................................................................................................... 5-16

Creating a New Custom Box ................................................................................................................. 5-21

Editing Custom Box ............................................................................................................................... 5-22

Deleting Custom Box ............................................................................................................................. 5-23

Storing Documents to a Custom Box ..................................................................................................... 5-23

Printing Documents in Custom Box ....................................................................................................... 5-24

Moving Documents in Custom Box ........................................................................................................ 5-25

Deleting Documents in Custom Box ...................................................................................................... 5-25

Operating using Removable USB Memory ...................................................................................................... 5-26

Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory ...................................................................... 5-26

Check the USB Memory Information ..................................................................................................... 5-27

Removing USB Memory ........................................................................................................................ 5-27

Using the Internet Browser .............................................................................................................................. 5-28

Launching and Exiting the Browser ....................................................................................................... 5-28

Using the Browser Screen ..................................................................................................................... 5-29

Manual Staple .................................................................................................................................................. 5-30

5-2

Operation on the Machine > Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray

Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray

For details of the supported paper sizes, refer to the following:

Choosing the Appropriate Paper (page 11-13)

For the paper type setting, refer to the following:

Media Type Setting (page 8-12)

Be sure to use the multipurpose tray when you print on any special paper.

The capacity of the multipurpose tray is as follows.

• A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m2), recycled paper or color paper: 150 sheets

• B4 or larger plain paper (80 g/m2), recycled paper or color paper: 50 sheets

• Thick paper (209 g/m2): 10 sheets

• Thick paper (157 g/m2): 50 sheets

• Thick paper (104.7 g/m2): 50 sheets

• Hagaki (Cardstock): 30 sheets

• Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6 3/4, Envelope Monarch, Youkei 4, Youkei 2:

10 sheets

• OHP film: 10 sheet

• Coated: 10 sheets

• Banner paper: 470.1 mm (18.51") to a maximum of 1220.0 mm (48"): 1 sheet (manual feed), 10 sheets (when

optional banner tray is attached)

• Index tab dividers: 15 sheets

1Open the multipurpose tray.

IMPORTANT

• If you are using a paper weight of 106 g/m2 or more, set the media type to Thick and set the weight of the

paper you are using.

• Remove each transparency from the main tray as it is printed. Leaving transparencies in the main tray may

cause a paper jam.

NOTE

• When you load custom size paper, enter the paper size by referring to the following:

Paper Settings (page 8-10)

• When you use special paper such as transparencies or thick paper, select the media type by referring to the

following:

MP Tray Setting (page 8-7)

• Paper size can be automatically detected and selected, refer to the following:

Paper Selection (page 6-5)

MP Tray Setting (page 8-7)

5-3

Operation on the Machine > Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray

2Adjust the multipurpose tray size.

Paper sizes are marked on the multipurpose tray.

3Load paper.

Insert the paper along the paper width guides into the tray until it stops.

After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the

multipurpose tray.

4Specify the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose tray using

the operation panel.

Precaution for Loading Paper (page 3-2)

IMPORTANT

• When loading the paper, keep the print side facing down.

• Curled paper must be uncurled before use.

• When loading paper into the multipurpose tray, check that there is no paper left

over in the tray from a previous job before loading the paper. If there is just a small

amount of paper left over in the multipurpose tray and you want to add more, first

remove the left-over paper from the tray and include it with the new paper before

loading the paper back into the tray.

• If there is a gap between the paper and the paper width guides, readjust the guides

to fit the paper in order to prevent skewed feeding and paper jams.

• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the load limits.

MP Tray Setting (page 8-7)

5-4

Operation on the Machine > Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray

Loading Envelopes or Cardstock in the Multipurpose Tray

Load the paper with the print side facing down. For the procedure for printing, refer to the following:

Printer Driver User Guide

Example: When printing the address.

1 Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard)

2 Hagaki (Cardstocks)

3 Portrait form envelopes (Open the flap)

4 Landscape form envelopes (Close the

flap)

IMPORTANT

• Use unfolded Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard).

• How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of envelope. Be sure to

load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face.

NOTE

• When you load envelopes in the multipurpose tray, select the envelope type by referring to the following:

Cassette/MP Tray Settings (page 8-6)

• When you load cardstocks or A6 paper in the multipurpose tray, open the stopper as shown below.

1234

5-5

Operation on the Machine > Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray

Loading Index Paper in the Multipurpose Tray

1Prepare paper.

Sort the pages so that the 1st page is at the back.

2Orient the paper in the same orientation.

Place the paper print side down, oriented so that the tabs are on the trailing side of the paper

when it feeds in.

3Load paper.

Load paper in the tray.

For the procedure for printing, refer to the following:

Printer Driver User Guide

Index paper must meet the following conditions.

Item Description Item Description

Paper size A4/Letter Number of tabs 1 to 15

Paper weight 136 to 256 g/m2Length of tabs 30 mm or less

123

112233

5-6

Operation on the Machine > Program

Program

By registering sets of frequently used functions as a single program, you can simply press the program number as

needed to recall those functions. You can also name the programs for easy identification when recalling.

Registering Programs

The following procedure is an example of registering the printing a document stored in a Custom Box.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Custom Box]

2Select the box containing the document you want to print.

3Select [Open].

4Select the document in the list that you want to print by selecting the checkbox.

The document is marked with a checkmark.

5Select [Print].

6Select the [Program] tab while paper selection, duplex printing, etc. are set.

2Register the program.

1[Add] > Select a number (01 to 50) for the program number > [Next]

2Enter the new program name > [Save]

The program is registered.

To display a registered program on the Home screen, select [Yes] on the confirmation

screen that appears, proceed to step 2-3.

3Specify the position in which you want to display the icon of registered program.

4Select [Save].

NOTE

• Up to 50 functions combining printing can be registered in the program.

• If user login administration is enabled, you can only register functions by logging in with administrator privileges.

NOTE

If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.

NOTE

To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.

NOTE

If you select a program number already registered, the currently registered functions can

be replaced with a new set of functions.

5-7

Operation on the Machine > Program

Recalling Programs

1Recall the program.

1Select [Program] in the Home screen, or the key of the registered program.

Selecting the key of the registered program will recall the program. If you selected

[Program], proceed to step 1-2.

2Select the key for the program number you want to recall.

Select [No.] or the Quick No. Search key on the numeric keypad to enter the program

number (01 to 50) directly for recalling.

2Execute the program.

Press the [Start] key

Editing Programs

You can change program number and program name.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Program]

2Select [Edit].

2Edit the program.

1Select the key(s) corresponding to the program number (01 to 50) to change.

2Select [Edit] to change the program number and program name.

3[Save] > [Yes]

NOTE

• If the program cannot be recalled, the Document Box or the form overlay specified in

the program might have been deleted. Check the Document Box.

• If the function for printing documents in the Custom Box is registered, the screen for

selecting a document appears. Select a document and then select [OK].

NOTE

[Program] can be pressed in each function to call up the program registered for the

function.

Registering Programs (page 5-6)

5-8

Operation on the Machine > Program

Deleting Programs

1 Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Program]

2Select [Edit].

2Delete the program.

1Select the key(s) corresponding to the program number (01 to 50) to delete.

2[Delete] > [Yes]

5-9

Operation on the Machine > Application

Application

The functionality of the machine can be expanded by installing applications.

Applications that help you perform your daily more efficiently such as an authentication feature are available.

For details, consult your sales representative or dealer.

Installing Applications

To use applications, first install the application in the machine and then activate the application.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Application]

2Install the application.

1[Add] > [OK]

2Insert the removable memory containing the application to be installed into the USB

Memory Slot.

3Select the application to be installed > [Install]

You can view detailed information on the selected application by selecting [Detail].

4Select [Yes].

Installation of the application begins. Depending on the application being installed, the

installation may take some time.

Once the installation ends, the original screen reappears.

NOTE

You can install applications and certificates on the machine. The number of applications you can run may vary

according to the type of application.

NOTE

• If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password

and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. The factory

default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

•Select [Print Report] to print an application report.

NOTE

When the message "Removable Memory was recognized. Displaying files. Are you

sure?" is displayed, select [No].

NOTE

• To install another application, repeat steps 2-3 and 2-4.

• To remove the removable memory, select [Remove Memory] and wait until the

message "Removable Memory can be safely removed." appears. Then remove the

removable memory.

5-10

Operation on the Machine > Application

Activating Applications

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Application]

2Activate the application.

1Select the desired application > [Activate]

You can view detailed information on the selected application by selecting [Detail].

2Enter the license key > [Official]

Some applications do not require you to enter a license key. If the license key entry screen

does not appear, go to step 3-3. To use the application as a trial, select [Trial] without

entering the license key.

3Select [Yes].

3Select the application icon in the Home screen.

Select the application icon.

The application will start up.

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password

and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. The factory

default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

IMPORTANT

• If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you

will no longer be able to use the application.

• Icons of activated application are displayed in the Home screen.

5-11

Operation on the Machine > Application

Deactivating Applications

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Application]

2Deactivate the application.

Select the desired application to exit > [Deactivate]

Uninstalling Applications

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Application]

2Deactivate the application.

1Select the application you want to delete > [Delete]

You can view detailed information on the selected application by selecting [Detail].

2Select [Yes].

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password

and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. The factory

default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

Select [x] on the screen if you want to exit the already activated application.

The procedure for exiting some applications may differ.

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password

and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. The factory

default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

5-12

Operation on the Machine > Registering Shortcuts

Registering Shortcuts

You can register shortcuts in the Quick Setup screen for easy access to the frequently used functions. The settings for

the selected function can also be registered. A function name linked to a registered shortcut can be changed as

necessary.

Adding Shortcuts

Shortcut registration is performed in the setup screen of each function. Shortcuts can be registered for all functions in

which [Add Shortcut] appears on the screen.

1In each function, display the configuration screen you want to

2Register the shortcuts.

1Select the setting you want to add.

2Select [Add Shortcut].

3Select the keys corresponding to the shortcut number (1 to 6) to register.

4Enter the shortcut name > [Save].

The shortcut is registered.

NOTE

If you select a shortcut number already registered, the currently registered shortcut can

be replaced with a new one.

5-13

Operation on the Machine > Registering Shortcuts

Editing Shortcuts

1In the setup screen of each function, select [Add Shortcut] in

the bottom of the screen.

2Edit the shortcut.

1Select [Edit].

2Select the shortcut key you want to edit.

3Select "Shortcut No" [Change] or "Shortcut Name" [Change] > Change the settings >

[OK].

4[Save] > [Yes]

Deleting Shortcuts

1In the setup screen of each function, select [Add Shortcut] in

the bottom of the screen.

2Delete the shortcut.

1Select [Edit].

2Select the shortcut key you want to delete > [Delete this Shortcut] > [Yes]

5-14

Operation on the Machine > Canceling Jobs

Canceling Jobs

1Select the [Stop] key with the print screen displayed.

2Cancel a job.

Canceling job screen appears. The current print job is temporarily interrupted.

Select the job you wish to cancel > [Cancel] > [Yes]

5-15

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Using Document Boxes

Document Box is a function for saving print data from a computer and sharing it with multiple users.

The available Document Boxes are as follows: Custom Box, Job Box, and Removable Memory Box.

What is Custom Box?

Custom Box is a component box which you can create within the Document Box and store data for later retrieval. You

can create or delete a Custom Box.

The following operations are possible:

• Creating a new Custom Box

• Printing Document in a Custom Box

• Editing Documents in a Custom Box

• Deleting Documents in a Custom Box

What is Job Box?

Job Box is a generic name for the "Private Print/Stored Job Box" and "Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Box". These Job

Boxes cannot be created or deleted by a user.

What is Removable Memory Box?

A USB memory stick can be connected to the USB memory slot on the machine to print a saved file. You can print data

directly from the USB memory without a PC.

NOTE

The operation on Custom Box you perform from operation panel can also be made using Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

NOTE

• You can set up the machine so that temporary documents in job boxes are automatically deleted.

Deletion of Job Retention (page 8-22)

• For details on operating the "Private Print/Stored Job Box" and "Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Box", refer to the

following:

Printing Data Saved in the Printer (page 4-18)

5-16

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Basic Operation for Document Box

This section explains basic operations for document boxes, using examples where tasks are carried out with custom

boxes.

Box List

NOTE

In the following explanation, it is assumed that user login administration is enabled. For details on User Logon

privileges, refer to the following:

Editing Custom Box (page 5-22)

1 Listing the boxes by owner in alphabetical order.

2 Listing the boxes by name in alphabetical order.

3 Listing the boxes by number in ascending/

descending order.

4 Displays the details for the selected box.

5 Opens the selected box.

6 Registers new boxes and checks, modifies or

deletes box information.

7 A box can be searched for by Box No.

8 A box can be searched for by Box Name.

No. Name Owner Used

Add/Edit Box

1/2

0001 BOX 1

Detail Open

Custom Box

Search(No.)

Search(Name)

Program

63.0 MB

b0101_01

0002 BOX 2 492.0 KB

0003 BOX 3 12.6 㻹㻮

0004 BOX 4 0.0

0005 BOX 5 0.0

0006 BOX 6 24.5 MB

5-17

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Document List

The document list is a list of the documents stored in the custom box. Documents can be listed either by name or as

thumbnails. The list can be used as shown below.

List

Thumbnail

1 Switches between list display and thumbnail

display.

2 Listing the documents by time of update in

ascending/descending order.

3 Listing the documents by name in alphabetical

order.

4 Selecting more than one document at a time.

5 Selecting documents by checking checkboxes.

6 Previews the selected document.

7 Select a document in the Document List and

select [Detail] to display the details for the

selected document.

8 Select a document in the Document List and

select [Page Selection] to display the selected

document.

9 Listing the documents by size in ascending/

descending order.

1 Selecting more than one document at a time.

2 Highlighting a document to display its details

with [Detail].

3 Selecting documents by checking checkboxes.

4 Prints, moves or deletes the selected

documents.

NOTE

You can select multiple documents by pressing the respective document checkboxes.

1/1

0001 2017101009404501 2017/10/10 09:40 6.3

Box:

File Name Date and Time Size

2017101009504511

2017101010004521

2017/10/10 09:50

2017/10/10 10:00

96.0

21.5

Print Move Delete

Detail

Preview

0002

0003

Search(Name)

Page Selection

b020101_01

BOX1

5-18

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Viewing Box Details

1Select [Add/Edit Box] in the box list screen.

2Highlight the box whose box details you wish to check and

select [Detail/Edit].

3Check the box details.

4[Cancel] > [Close]

The display returns to the default Document Box screen.

Editing Box Details

1Select [Add/Edit Box] in the box list screen.

2Highlight the box whose box details you wish to check and

select [Detail/Edit].

3Check the box details.

To edit details, select [Change] of the detail you wish to edit. Edit the detail as desired and

select [OK].

4If you have changed the details, select [Save] and then select

[Yes] in the confirmation screen.

If you do not change the details, select [No].

5Select [Close].

The display returns to the default Document Box screen.

NOTE

If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.

NOTE

If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.

5-19

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Previewing Documents/Checking Document Details

1Select (highlight) a document to preview and then select

[Preview] or [Detail].

2Preview the document or check the document details.

The operations available in the preview screen are shown below.

When the Preview screen is displayed, you can do the following by moving the finger that is

touching the touch panel.

3Confirm the document(s) and select [Close].

1Zoom in.

2Zoom out.

3 When you have zoomed in, you can use these

keys to move the displayed area.

4 Press to select any page of the open document

and print.

Selecting a page (page 5-20)

5 In multiple-page documents, you can use these

buttons to change pages.

6 In multiple-page documents, you can change

pages by entering the desired page number.

Function Description

Drag With the finger touching the touch panel, slide the finger to move

the position of the displayed preview.

Pinch in

Pinch out

With two fingers touching the touch panel, widen or tighten the

space between the two fingers to zoom in and out on the view.

5-20

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Selecting a page

When printing a document within a Custom Box, you can specify any pages at will.

Select [Page Selection] in the document list screen of the Custom Box, or [Select Pages to Process] in the Preview

screen, to display the page selection screen.

Select the pages you want to work with, and select [Print].

Printing Documents in Custom Box (page 5-24)

Moving Documents in Custom Box (page 5-25)

1 Displaying the number of pages selected.

2 Selecting more than one document at a time.

3 Highlighting the selected document.

4 Selecting documents by checking checkboxes.

5 Selected pages can be printed.

6 You can specify the pages you want to select by

selecting [Enter Pages].

7 You can specify a range of selection by

selecting [Select Range].

5-21

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Creating a New Custom Box

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Custom Box] > [Add/Edit Box]

2Register the Custom Box.

1[Add] > Enter the information for each item > [OK]

The table below lists the items to be set.

NOTE

• If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

• If user login administration is enabled, log in with administrator privileges to perform the following operations. They

cannot be performed with user privileges.

- Creating a box

- Deleting a box of which owner is another user.

Item Description

Box No. Enter the box number by selecting [+], [-] or number keys. The box

number can be from 0001 to 1000. A Custom Box should have a unique

number. If you enter 0000, the smallest number available will be

automatically assigned.

Owner*1 Set the owner of the box. Select the owner from the user list that

appears.

Box Name Enter a box name consisting of up to 32 characters.

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

Usage

Restriction

The usage for a box can be restricted. To enable a capacity restriction

enter a value for the storage capacity of the Custom Box in megabytes

by selecting [-], [+] or number keys. You can enter a limit between 1 and

30,000 (MB).

Box

Password

User access to the box can be restricted by specifying a password to

protect the box. Entering a password is not mandatory. Enter the same

password of up to 16 characters in both [Password] and [Confirm

Password].

This can be set if [Shared] is selected in Permission.

Permission*2 Select whether to share the box.

Auto File

Deletion

Automatically deletes stored documents after a set period of time.

Select [On] to enable automatic deletion and then use [+] and [-] or the

numeric keys to enter the number of days for which documents are

stored. You can enter any number between 1 and 31 (day(s)). To

disable automatic file deletion, select [Off].

Overwrite

Setting

Specifies whether or not old stored documents are overwritten when

new documents are stored. To overwrite old documents, select

[Permit]. To retain old documents, select [Prohibit].

5-22

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

2Select [Add].

The Custom Box is created.

Editing Custom Box

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [Custom Box] > [Add/Edit Box]

2Edit the custom box.

Select the box > [Detail/Edit] > Enter the information for each item > [OK]

When user login administration is enabled, the settings that can be changed varies depending

on the privileges of the logged in user.

3[Save] > [Close]

The display returns to the default Document Box screen.

Free Space Displays the free space on the box.

Delete after

Printed

Automatically delete a document from the box once printing is

complete. To delete the document, select [On]. To retain the document,

select [Off].

*1 Displayed when the user login administration is enabled.

*2 Not displayed when "Owner" is set to [No Owner].

NOTE

• When you have logged in as a user, you can only edit a box whose owner is set to that

user.

• When you have logged in as administrator, you can edit all boxes.

Privileges Settings that can be changed

Administrator Box No.

Owner

Box Name

Usage Restriction

Box Password

Permission

Auto File Deletion

Overwrite Setting

Delete after Printed

User Box Name

Box Password

Permission

Auto File Deletion

Overwrite Setting

Delete after Printed

Creating a New Custom Box (page 5-21)

Item Description

5-23

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Deleting Custom Box

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [Custom Box] > [Detail/Edit]

2Delete the custom box.

Select the box > [Delete] > [Yes]

Storing Documents to a Custom Box

Custom box stores the print data which is sent from a PC. For the operation of the printing from the PC, refer to the

following:

Printer Driver User Guide

NOTE

• When you have logged in as a user, you can only delete a box whose owner is set to that

user.

• When you have logged in as administrator, you can edit all boxes.

5-24

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Printing Documents in Custom Box

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Custom Box]

2Select the box containing the document you want to print.

3Select [Open].

2Print the document.

1Select the document in the list that you want to print by selecting the checkbox.

The document is marked with a checkmark.

2Select [Print].

3Set the paper selection, duplex printing, etc., as desired.

For the features that can be selected, refer to the following:

The print settings selection screen appears.

• To use the settings used at the time of printing (when the document was saved)

[Print As Is] > [Start Print]

Start printing.

• To change the print settings

[Print after Change Settings] > [Use File Settings] or [Do Not Use File Settings] >

[Next] > Change the print settings

4Press the [Start] key.

Printing of the selected document begins.

NOTE

If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.

NOTE

To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.

Custom Box (page 6-2)

NOTE

Select the [Program] tab when registering or recalling programs.

Registering Programs (page 5-6)

Recalling Programs (page 5-7)

5-25

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Moving Documents in Custom Box

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [Custom Box] > Select the box > [Open]

2Move the documents.

1Select the document in the list that you want to move by selecting the checkbox.

The document is marked with a checkmark.

2[Move] > select the destination of move > [Move] > [Yes]

The selected document is moved.

Deleting Documents in Custom Box

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Custom Box]

2Select the box containing the document > [Open]

2Delete the document.

1Select the document in the list that you want to delete by selecting the checkbox.

The document is marked with a checkmark.

2[Delete] > [Yes]

The document is deleted.

NOTE

If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.

NOTE

To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.

NOTE

If the box to which the document is to be moved is protected by a password, enter the

correct password.

NOTE

If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.

NOTE

•[Delete] is disabled until a document is selected.

• To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.

5-26

Operation on the Machine > Operating using Removable USB Memory

Operating using Removable USB Memory

Plugging USB memory directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the USB

memory without having to use a computer.

The following file types can be printed:

• PDF file (Version 1.7 or older)

• TIFF file (TIFF V6/TTN2 format)

• JPEG file

• XPS file

• OpenXPS file

• Encrypted PDF file

Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB

Memory

1Plug the USB memory.

1Plug the USB memory into the USB Memory Slot.

2When the machine reads the USB memory, "Removable Memory is recognized. Displaying

files. Are you sure?" may appear. Select [Yes].

Displays the removable memory screen.

NOTE

• PDF files you wish to print should have an extension (.pdf).

• Files to be printed should be saved no further down than the top 3 folder levels, including the root folder.

• Use USB memory properly formatted by this machine.

• Plug the USB memory directly into the USB Memory Slot.

NOTE

If the message does not appear, select [Removable Memory] on the Home screen.

5-27

Operation on the Machine > Operating using Removable USB Memory

2Print the document.

1Select the folder containing the file to be printed > [Open].

The machine will display documents in the top 3 folder levels, including the root folder.

2Select the file to be printed > [Print]

3Change the number of copies, duplex printing, etc. as desired.

For the features that can be selected, refer to the following:

4Press the [Start] key.

Printing of the selected file begins.

Check the USB Memory Information

1In the removable memory screen, select [Memory Information].

2Once you confirm the information, select [Close].

Removing USB Memory

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [Remove Memory]

2Select [Remove Memory].

Select [OK], and remove the USB memory after "Removable Memory can be safely removed."

is displayed.

NOTE

• 1,000 documents can be displayed.

• To return to a higher level folder, select [Up].

Removable Memory (page 6-4)

IMPORTANT

Be sure to follow the proper procedure to avoid damaging the data or USB memory.

NOTE

USB memory can also be removed after checking the status of the device.

Device/Communication (page 7-11)

5-28

Operation on the Machine > Using the Internet Browser

Using the Internet Browser

If the machine is connected to the network, you can browse the Internet on the touch panel.

Launching and Exiting the Browser

Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Internet Browser]

The Internet browser starts up.

2Use the browser screen to browse web pages.

For information on how to use the browser screen, refer to the following:

3To exit the browser, select [X] (Close) and then select [Yes] in the exit confirmation screen.

NOTE

To use the internet browser, "Internet Browser Setting" must be set to [On] in Internet.

Internet (page 8-55)

Using the Browser Screen (page 5-29)

NOTE

You can specify preferences such as the way the Internet browser screen is displayed.

Browser Environment (page 8-55)

5-29

Operation on the Machine > Using the Internet Browser

Using the Browser Screen

The operations available in the Internet browser screen are shown below.

1Title bar: Displays the page title.

2Text box: Pressing the text box displays a

keyboard that allows you to type text.

3Close: Closes the Internet browser and returns

you to the application list screen.

4Scroll bars: These allow you to scroll the

displayed page up, down, left and right by

selecting [ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ] or by moving one

of the slide bars with your finger.

5Back/Forward: Displays the previous page or

the next page.

6Reload: Updates the page.

7Home page: Displays your specified home page.

You can set your home page.

Browser Environment (page 8-55).

8Enter URL: Use this to display a desired web

page by entering the URL for that page.

9Search (Search Internet/Retrieval in page):

Displays a search menu in which you can select

"Retrieval in page" or an Internet search site.

Search Internet: Use the selected search site to

search with the entered keyword.

Retrieval in page: Search from the entered

keyword in the currently displayed page. You can

continue your search by selecting [SearchUp] or

[SearchDown].

10 Menu: Displays the browser setup menu. You

can use this menu to specify the browser's

display magnification, set the text encoding

scheme and check the server certificate.

11 Loader/Progress bar: Shows the status of page

loading. When the browser is loading a web

page, the loader changes to an animated

display.

12 Security lock icon: Displayed when you are

viewing a protected page.

NOTE

Selecting the [Reset] key while the Internet browser is displayed will exit the browser and return you to the application

list screen without displaying the browser exit.

Enter URL Search Menu

KYOCERA Document Solutions | Solutions

webapl0101

1 2 3

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

5-30

Operation on the Machine > Manual Staple

Manual Staple

You can staple copied paper manually without any print operation. It is useful when you have forgotten to set the staple

sort mode before starting printing.

Maximum number of sheets available for manual stapling

Use the keys on the control section of the Finisher (optional) for manual stapling.

1Press the stapling position key on the stapling control section.

The shutter of the paper exit area is opened and this equipment enters into the manual staple

mode.

2Set the staple position.

Press the stapling position key to select the stapling position

(Back / Front / 2 Points ).

Operation is not possible while the stapling position lamps are blinking. Operate after the

lamps light solidly.

NOTE

• This function requires the optional Document Finisher:

4,000-Sheet Finisher (page 11-24)

• If there are no staples when manual stapling is performed, the stapling position lamps and stapling position key

LEDs all blink. Add staples.

Replacing Staples (4,000-Sheet Finisher) (page 10-8)

• Manual stapling cannot be executed when the machine is in operation.

Paper size

Paper weight

52 - 90 g/m2

(14.0 - 24.0 lb. Bond)

91 - 105 g/m2

(24.3 - 28.0 lb. Bond)

A4, A4-R, B5, Letter, Letter-R, 16K 65 sheets 55 sheets

A3, B4, Folio, Ledger 30 sheets 30 sheets

1 Stapling position lamps

2 Stapling position key

3 Stapling key / lamp

123

5-31

Operation on the Machine > Manual Staple

3Load the paper.

Straighten the edges of the paper well and place

the paper front side down in the shutter opening

of the output unit.

If the near side of the paper ( ) will be stapled,

place the paper against the front guide (A).

If the far side of the paper ( ) will be stapled,

place the paper against the back guide (B).

If the edge of the paper ( ) will be stapled at

two points, place the paper with the center

aligned to the center point between the two side

guides (A and B).

4Staple the paper.

Let go of the paper, and then press the stapling key.

Stapling starts. Stapling finishes and the output is delivered to tray.

Finishing the manual staple mode

Press the stapling position key several times until the stapling position lamps turn off. The shutter of the paper exit area

closes. It means that manual stapling is finished.

If no operation is performed for approx. 10 seconds, the manual staple mode will be automatically finished.

CAUTION

Do not insert your hand inside the open shutter.

NOTE

• Press the stapling position key before you place the paper. Once the paper is placed, the

stapling position key cannot be used.

• The stapling lamp lights when the paper is properly placed. If it does not light, replace the

paper.

CAUTION

Be sure that your hands are away from the paper while stapling is in progress.

NOTE

The time after which manual staple mode is automatically exited can be changed.

Manual Staple (page 8-18)

6-1

Using Various Functions

This chapter explains the following topics:

Functions Available on the Machine ................................................................................................................... 6-2

About Functions Available on the Machine .............................................................................................. 6-2

Custom Box ............................................................................................................................................. 6-2

Removable Memory ................................................................................................................................. 6-4

Functions ........................................................................................................................................................... 6-5

Paper Selection ....................................................................................................................................... 6-5

Fold .......................................................................................................................................................... 6-7

Collate/Offset ........................................................................................................................................... 6-8

Staple/Punch ........................................................................................................................................... 6-9

Paper Output ......................................................................................................................................... 6-12

EcoPrint ................................................................................................................................................. 6-13

Zoom ...................................................................................................................................................... 6-13

Combine ................................................................................................................................................ 6-14

Margin/Centering, Margin ...................................................................................................................... 6-15

Booklet ................................................................................................................................................... 6-16

Duplex .................................................................................................................................................... 6-18

Cover ..................................................................................................................................................... 6-19

Form Overlay ......................................................................................................................................... 6-20

Page # ................................................................................................................................................... 6-21

Text Stamp ............................................................................................................................................. 6-23

Bates Stamp .......................................................................................................................................... 6-24

Job Finish Notice ................................................................................................................................... 6-25

File Name Entry ..................................................................................................................................... 6-25

Priority Override ..................................................................................................................................... 6-25

Delete after Printed ................................................................................................................................ 6-26

Encrypted PDF Password ...................................................................................................................... 6-26

JPEG/TIFF Print .................................................................................................................................... 6-26

XPS Fit to Page ..................................................................................................................................... 6-26

6-2

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Functions Available on the Machine

About Functions Available on the Machine

This machine provides the various functions available.

Custom Box

To configure the settings for functions, select the tab and press the function key.

For details on each function, see the table below.

Tab Function key Description Reference

page

Configure the

settings for paper

selection and

duplex printing

when printing from

the Custom Box.

Paper Selection Select the cassette or multipurpose tray that

contains the required paper size.

page 6-5

Collate/Offset Offsets the output by page or set. page 6-8

Staple/Punch Staples or punches printed documents. page 6-9

Paper Output Specify the output tray. page 6-12

Combine Combines 2 or 4 original sheets into 1 printed

page.

page 6-14

Margin/Centering Margin: Add margins (white space). In

addition, you can set the margin width

and the back page margin.

Centering: Centers the original image on the

paper when printing onto paper

different from the original size.

page 6-15

Booklet Print document so that it can be folded into a

single booklet, with a cover.

page 6-16

Duplex Print documents using both sides of the page. page 6-18

Cover Adds a cover to the finished documents. page 6-19

Form Overlay Overlay a previously stored form on all printed

pages.

page 6-20

Function key

Tab

Functions

6-3

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Configure the

settings for paper

selection and

duplex printing

when printing from

the Custom Box.

Page # Adds page numbers to the finished documents. page 6-21

Job Finish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. page 6-25

File Name Entry Adds a file name. page 6-25

Delete after

Printed

Automatically deletes a document from the box

once printing is complete.

page 6-26

Priority Override

Suspends the current job and gives a new job top

priority.

page 6-25

EcoPrint EcoPrint saves toner when printing. page 6-13

Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. page 6-13

Fold Fold the finished documents. page 6-7

Text Stamp Add the specified text to the produced

documents.

page 6-23

Bates Stamp Add the additional information such as sequential

number, date or text to the produced documents.

page 6-24

Tab Function key Description Reference

page

Functions

6-4

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Removable Memory

To configure the settings for functions, select the tab and press the function key.

For details on each function, see the table below.

Tab Function key Description Reference

page

Configure the

settings for paper

selection and

duplex printing

when printing from

the removable

memory.

Paper Selection Select the cassette or multipurpose tray that

contains the required paper size.

page 6-5

Collate/Offset Offsets the output by page or set. page 6-8

Staple/Punch Staples or punches printed documents. page 6-9

Paper Output Specify the output tray. page 6-12

Margin Add margins (white space). In addition, you can

set the margin width and the back page margin.

page 6-15

Duplex Print documents using both sides of the page. page 6-18

Job Finish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. page 6-25

Priority Override

Suspends the current job and gives a new job top

priority.

page 6-25

EcoPrint EcoPrint saves toner when printing. page 6-13

Fold Fold the finished documents. page 6-7

Text Stamp Add the specified text to the produced

documents.

page 6-23

Bates Stamp Add the additional information such as sequential

number, date or text to the produced documents.

page 6-24

Encrypted PDF

Password

Enter the preassigned password to print the PDF

data.

page 6-26

JPEG/TIFF Print Select the image size when printing JPEG or

TIFF files.

page 6-26

XPS Fit to Page Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the

selected paper size when printing XPS file.

page 6-26

Function key

Tab

Functions

6-5

Using Various Functions > Functions

Functions

On pages that explain a convenient function, the modes in which that function can be used are indicated by icons.

Paper Selection

Select the cassette or multipurpose tray that contains the required paper size.

If [Auto] is selected, the paper matching the size of the original is selected automatically.

To s e l ec t [MP tray], select [Paper Size] and [Media Type], and specify the paper size and the media type. The available

paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below.

Icon Description

Access to the function is indicated by icons.

Example: Select the [Functions] tab in the Custom Box

screen to use the function.

Access to the function is indicated by icons.

Example: Select the [Functions] tab in the Removable

Memory screen to use the function.

NOTE

• Specify in advance the size and type of the paper loaded in the cassette.

Cassette/MP Tray Settings (page 8-6)

• Cassettes after Cassette 3 are displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed.

Item Value Description

Paper

Size

Standard

Sizes 1

Metric models: A3*1*3, A4-R*2*3, A4*2*3, A5-R*2*3, A5*2,

A6-R*2*3, B4*1*3, B5-R*2*3, B5*2*3,

B6-R*2*3, Folio*2*3, 216×340 mm*4,

SRA3*1*3

Select from the standard size.

Inch models: Ledger*1*3, Letter-R*2*3, Letter*2*3,

Legal*2*3, Statement*2*3, Executive,

12×18"*1*3, Oficio II

Standard

Sizes 2

Metric models: Ledger*1*3, Letter-R*2*3, Letter*2*3,

Legal*2*3, Statement*2*3, Executive,

12×18"*1*3, Oficio II, 8K*4, 16K-R, 16K

Select from standard sizes

except Standard Sizes 1.

Inch models: A3*1*3, A4-R*2*3, A4*2*3, A5-R*2*3, A5*2,

A6-R*2*3, B4*1*3, B5-R*2*3, B5*2*3,

B6-R*2*3, Folio*2*3, 8K*4, 16K-R, 16K,

216×340 mm*4, SRA3*1*3

Others ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6,

Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,

Envelope C4*4, Hagaki (Cardstock)*3, Oufuku Hagaki (Return

postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom*5

Select from special standard

sizes and custom sizes.

Custom

Box

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

Custom

Box

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

6-6

Using Various Functions > Functions

Paper

Size

Entry

Metric X: 148 to 457 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Y: 98 to 320 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Enter the size not included in

the standard size.*6

When you have selected

[Size Entry], use [+]/[-] or the

numeric keys to set the sizes

of "X" (horizontal) and "Y"

(vertical). Select [# Keys] to

use the numeric keys for

entry.

Inch X: 5.83 to 18.00" (in 0.01" increments)

Y: 3.86 to 12.60" (in 0.01" increments)

Media type Plain (60 to 105 g/m2), Transparency, Rough, Vellum (52 to 105 g/m2), Labels, Recycled,

Preprinted*7, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched*7, Letterhead*7, Thick (106 g/m2 and more),

Envelope, Coated, High Quality, Index Tab Dividers, Custom 1-8*7

*1 Paper size is automatically detected in the cassette (excluding cassette 1).

*2 Paper size is automatically detected in the cassette.

*3 Paper size is automatically detected in the Multipurpose Tray.

*4 This paper cannot be used in Cassette 1.

*5 For instructions on how to specify the custom paper size, refer to the following:

Custom Paper Size (page 8-10)

*6 The input units can be changed in System Menu. For details, refer to the following:

Measurement (page 8-12)

*7 For instructions on how to specify the custom paper types 1 to 8, refer to the following:

Media Type Setting (page 8-12)

To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to the following:

Special Paper Action (page 8-11)

IMPORTANT

When paper size and the media type for MP tray is specified, [Paper Settings] is selected. Note that if [MP

Tray] is pressed at this point, the settings will be canceled.

NOTE

• You can conveniently select in advance the size and type of paper that will be used often and set them as default.

MP Tray Setting (page 8-7)

• If the specified size of paper is not loaded in the paper source cassette or multipurpose tray, a confirmation screen

appears. When [Auto] is selected and the same size of paper as the original size is not loaded, a paper confirmation

screen appears. Load the required paper in the multipurpose tray and press [Continue] to start printing.

Item Value Description

6-7

Using Various Functions > Functions

Fold

Folds the finished documents. Select the fold method.

The following folding options and orientations are available.

Original orientation Orientation: Landscape Orientation: Portrait

Item

Bi-Fold

Saddle Stitch

Tri-Fold Inside R to L/B to T

L to R/T to B

Outside R to L/B to T

L to R/T to B

NOTE

• Folding requires the optional 4,000-Sheet Finisher and the folding unit.

• For details on paper sizes and numbers of sheets that can be folded, refer to the following:

Folding Unit (page 11-25)

Custom

Box

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

6-8

Using Various Functions > Functions

Collate/Offset

Offsets the output by page or set.

Item Image Description

Collate Delivers complete sets of documents as required according

to page number.

Offset Without Document Finisher (Option) Printed documents are produced after rotating each set (or

page*1) by 90 degrees.

NOTE

To use offsetting, the same size of paper as the selected

paper tray must be loaded in a different orientation in a

different paper tray.

The paper sizes supported in Offset: A4, B5, Letter and

16K.

*1 If [Off] is selected for "Collate" setting, [Each Page] appears. When [On] is selected, [Each Set] appears.

With Document Finisher (Option) Printed documents are segregated after each set of

documents (or after each page*1).

NOTE

• The optional Document Finisher is required.

1,000-Sheet Finisher (page 11-23)

4,000-Sheet Finisher (page 11-24)

• The paper sizes supported in Offset: A3, A4, B4, B5,

216×340 mm, Ledger, Letter, Legal, Oficio II, 8K and

16K.

Custom

Box

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

6-9

Using Various Functions > Functions

Staple/Punch

Staple

Staples the finished documents. The staple position can be selected.

NOTE

This function requires the optional Document Finisher. Note also that saddle stitching (center stapling) requires the

Folding Unit.

For details on paper sizes and numbers of sheets that can be stapled, refer to the following:

1,000-Sheet Finisher (page 11-23)

4,000-Sheet Finisher (page 11-24)

Folding Unit (page 11-25)

Item Value Description

Staple Off

Top Left Select the staple position. For details on original orientation and staple

position, refer to the following:

Original Orientation and Staple Position (page 6-10)

Top Right

2 staples Left

2 staples Top

2 staples Right

Saddle Stitch Select whether to fold the finished documents in two with staples in the

center.

For details on saddle stitching, refer to the following:

Booklet (page 6-16)

Custom

Box

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

6-10

Using Various Functions > Functions

Original Orientation and Staple Position

Original orientation Portrait Landscape

Paper orientation

Cassette paper load

direction

Cassette paper load

direction

NOTE

One position staple is not slanted for the following paper sizes.

B5-R, 16K-R

6-11

Using Various Functions > Functions

Punch

Punches holes in sets of finished documents.

Original Orientation and Punch Hole Position

NOTE

• This function requires the optional Document Finisher and Punch Unit.

• For details on paper sizes that can be punched, refer to the following:

Punch Unit (For 1,000-Sheet/4,000-Sheet Finisher) (page 11-24)

• The inch model provides two-hole and three-hole punching. The metric model provides two-hole and four-hole

punching.

Item Value Description

Punch Off

2 holes Left Select the position of punch holes. For details on original

orientation and position of punch holes, refer to the

following:

Original Orientation and Punch Hole Position (page

6-11)

2 holes Top

2 holes Right

3 holes Left

3 holes Top

3 holes Right

4 holes Left

4 holes Top

4 holes Right

Original orientation Portrait Landscape

Paper orientation

Cassette paper load

direction

Cassette paper load

direction

NOTE

The inch model provides two-hole and three-hole punching. The metric model provides two-hole and four-hole

punching.

6-12

Using Various Functions > Functions

Paper Output

Specify the output tray.

with optional Job Separator

with optional 1,000-Sheet Finisher

with optional 4,000-Sheet Finisher

with optional Mailbox

Item Description

Main Tray Outputs to the Main Tray of the machine.

Job Separator Tray Delivery to the Job Separator.

Item Description

Finisher Tray Delivery to the Finisher Tray of the optional Document Finisher.

Job Separator Tray*1

*1 The paper sizes cannot be output to the Job Separator Tray: SRA3, 12×18".

Delivery to the Job Separator.

Item Description

Tray A Delivery to the Tray A of the optional Document Finisher.

Tray B Delivery to the Tray B of the optional Document Finisher.

When [Heavy 5] (257 g/m2 - 300 g/m2) is set in Paper Weight and tray B is set for the output

destination, the output destination is automatically changed to the tray A.

Job Separator Tray*1

*1 The paper sizes cannot be output to the Job Separator Tray: SRA3, 12×18".

Delivery to the Job Separator.

Item Description

Tray A Delivery to the Tray A of the optional Document Finisher.

Tray B Delivery to the Tray B of the optional Document Finisher.

When [Heavy 5] (257 g/m2 - 300 g/m2) is set in Paper Weight and tray B is set for the output

destination, the output destination is automatically changed to the tray A.

Job Separator Tray*1

*1 The paper sizes cannot be output to the Job Separator Tray: SRA3, 12×18".

Delivery to the Job Separator.

Tray 1 to 7 Delivery to tray 1 to 7 (tray 1 is the uppermost tray) of the optional Mailbox.

When [Heavy 3] to [Heavy 4] (164 g/m2 - 256 g/m2) is set in Paper Weight and Mailbox is

set for the output destination, the output destination is automatically changed to the tray B.

When [Heavy 5] (257 g/m2 - 300 g/m2) is set in Paper Weight and Mailbox is set for the

output destination, the output destination is automatically changed to the tray A.

Custom

Box

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

6-13

Using Various Functions > Functions

EcoPrint

EcoPrint saves toner when printing. Use this function for test prints or any other occasion when high quality print is not

required.

Zoom

Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image.

NOTE

• This can be set when the optional Job Separator or Document Finisher (1,000-Sheet Finisher or 4,000-Sheet

Finisher) is installed.

• The default setting for Paper Output can be changed.

Paper Output (page 8-14)

Item Value Description

Off

On [1] (Low) to [5] (High) Adjust the Toner Save Level.

Item Description

100% Reproduces the original size.

Auto Reduces or enlarges original to printing size.

NOTE

• To reduce or enlarge the image, select the paper size.

Paper Selection (page 6-5)

• Some combinations of original size and paper size may cause the image to be positioned at the edge of the paper.

To center the original vertically and horizontally on the page, use the Centering function.

Margin/Centering, Margin (page 6-15)

Custom

Box

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

Custom

Box

Functions

6-14

Using Various Functions > Functions

Combine

Combines 2 or 4 original sheets into 1 printed page.

You can select the page layout and the type of boundary lines around the pages.

The following types of the boundary lines are available.

Layout image

Item Value Description

Off

2 in 1 Layout L to R/T to B, R to L/B to T Select the direction the pages should

flow.

Border Line None, Solid Line, Dotted Line,

Positioning Mark

Select the boundary line type.

Select [Border Line] to select the page

boundary line, and select [OK].

4 in 1 Layout Right then Down, Left then Down,

Down then Right, Down then Left

Select the direction the pages should

flow.

Border Line None, Solid Line, Dotted Line,

Positioning Mark

Select the boundary line type.

Select [Border Line] to select the page

boundary line, and select [OK].

Item Image

2 in 1 L to R/T to B

R to L/B to T

Custom

Box

Functions

None Dotted LineSolid Line Positioning Mark

6-15

Using Various Functions > Functions

Margin/Centering, Margin

Add margins (white space). In addition, you can set the margin width and the back page margin.

Centering: Centers the original image on the paper when printing onto paper different from the original size.

4 in 1 Right then Down

Left then Down

Down then Right

Down then Left

NOTE

The paper sizes supported in Combine mode: A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, B4, B5-R, B5, Folio, 216×340 mm, SRA3,

Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Oficio II, 8K, 16K-R and 16K.

NOTE

The default setting for margin width can be changed.

Margin Default (page 8-15)

Item Image

Custom

Box

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

6-16

Using Various Functions > Functions

Booklet

The Booklet option allows you to produce booklets such as small brochures or pamphlets. A booklet, such as a

magazine, is made by folding at the center.

You can print the cover page onto colored paper or thick paper. Paper for the cover is supplied from the multipurpose

tray. To feed the cover paper from the cassette, refer to the following:

Paper Source for Cover (page 8-11)

Binding on the left side

Item Value Description

Off

Margin Left/Right Metric: -18 mm to +18 mm

(in 1 mm increments)

Inch: -0.75" to +0.75"

(in 0.01" increments)

Set the margin width.*1

Select [+] or [-] to enter the margins for "Left/

Right" and "Top/Bottom". Select [#Keys] to

use the numeric keys for entry.

*1 The input units can be changed in System Menu.

Measurement (page 8-12)

Top/Bottom

Back Page Auto, Manual For duplex printing, select [Back Page] and

select [Auto] or [Manual].

When [Auto] is selected, an appropriate

margin is applied automatically on the rear

page depending on a margin specified for the

front page and a binding orientation.

When [Manual] is set, you can set a different

margin than the front on the back. Set the

margin in the screen that is displayed. The

setting selections are the same as for the

front.

Centering*2

*2 Not displayed when printing from removable memory.

Centers the original image on the paper.

NOTE

• The paper sizes supported in Booklet: A3, A4-R, A4, A5, B4, B5-R, B5, Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Oficio II and

• Using the optional 4,000-Sheet Finisher and the folding unit enables you to saddle stitch your documents (fold them

in two with staples in the center). Supported paper sizes are A3, A4-R, B4, Ledger, Letter-R, Legal, Oficio II and 8K.

The folded documents can be read from left to right.

Custom

Box

Functions

Original Finished

6-17

Using Various Functions > Functions

Binding on the right side

Top binding

The folded documents can be read from right to left.

The folded documents can be read from top to bottom.

Item Value Description

Off

Booklet Binding Left, Right, Top Select the binding orientation of

documents.

Cover Off

Cover:

Front Cover

Print Setting

Not Print,

Front Only,

Back Only, Duplex

Select whether to add the cover. Select the

printing method for the cover to be

inserted.

Select [Cover], and then [Cover], and

specify the print setting for the cover to be

inserted. Select from [Not Print], [Back

Only], [Front Only], and [Duplex], and

press [OK].

Cover:

Back Cover

Print Setting

Not Print,

Front Only,

Back Only, Duplex

Staple/Fold Off, Fold Only,

Saddle Stitch

To fold finished documents in half, select

[Staple/Fold] and then select [Fold Only].

To use saddle stitching, select [Staple/

Fold] and then select [Saddle Stitch].

NOTE

The number of sheets that can be folded or Saddle Stitch stapled varies depending on paper weight. For details, refer

to the following:

Folding Unit (page 11-25)

Original Finished

6-18

Using Various Functions > Functions

Duplex

Print documents using both sides of the page. In case of an odd number of originals, the back side of the last page will

be blank.

The following binding options are available.

A Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides are not rotated.

B Binding Top: Images on the second sides are rotated 180 degrees.

Finished pages can be bound on the top edge, facing the same

orientation when turning the pages.

NOTE

The paper sizes supported in Duplex mode: A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3,

Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-R, 16K, ISO B5, Hagaki

(Cardstock), Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard) and Custom 1 to 4.

Item Value Description

1-sided ―Disables the function.

2-sided Left/Right Prints a 2-sided document so that the sheets are aligned properly for binding on the

left or right.

Top Prints a 2-sided document so that the sheets are aligned properly for binding on the

top.

Custom

Box

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

ghi

def

abc

ghi

abc

def

ghi

abc

def

Original Finished

6-19

Using Various Functions > Functions

Cover

Adds a cover to the finished documents.

You can print the first page and/or the last page onto colored paper or thick paper fed from the different paper source

than the regular one. The following two options are available. Paper for the cover is supplied from the multipurpose tray.

To feed the cover paper from the cassette, refer to the following:

Paper Source for Cover (page 8-11)

The printing method can be set for the covers. Specify a print setting for each cover.

Item Value Description

Off

Front Cover Not Print, Front Only, Back

Only, Duplex

Different paper has to be inserted for the

first page of the document.

Select [Stop Printing], [Front Only],

[Back Only], or [Duplex] for the print

setting of the inserted paper.

Front and Back

Covers

Front Cover Print

Setting

Not Print, Front Only, Back

Only, Duplex

Different paper has to be inserted for the

first page and last page of the document.

Select [Stop Printing], [Front Only],

[Back Only], or [Duplex] for the print

setting of the inserted paper.

Back Cover Print

Setting

Not Print, Front Only, Back

Only, Duplex

Custom

Box

Functions

6-20

Using Various Functions > Functions

Form Overlay

Overlay a previously stored form on all printed pages. The document stored in the Custom Box in advance is used as

the form.

1Store form.

Data from your PC used for forms is saved in your Custom Box. For the operation of the

printing from the PC, refer to the following:

Printer Driver User Guide

2Select the documents.

Select the document that you want to print in Custom Box. For details on selecting the

documents, refer to the following:

Printing Documents in Custom Box (page 5-24)

3Set the form overlay.

[Functions] > [Form Overlay] > Enter the information for each item > [OK]

The table below lists the items to be set.

4Press the [Start] key.

Item Value Description

Off

Select

Stored Form

Density 10% to 100% Specify the density of the form to be overlaid.

Select [+] or [-] in "Density".

Finishing

Image

Transparent The form is overlaid on the document.

Form on Original Image The form is placed on top of the document.

Original Image on Form The form is placed under the document.

Select Form ― Select the form stored in step 1.

Select [Select Form] to display the custom

boxes. Select the desired form from the box

and then select [OK].

Custom

Box

Functions

Original FinishedForm

Density:

30%

Density:

100%

6-21

Using Various Functions > Functions

Page #

Adds page numbers to the finished documents.

The available formats for numbering are [-1-], [P. 1 ] and [1/n]. The format [1/n] prints the total number of pages in the

place of "n".

Select the numbering format from [-1-], [P. 1 ] or [1/n].

Item Value Description

Off

-1-, P.1,

1/n

Position Top Left, Top Middle,

Top Right, Bottom Left,

Bottom Middle,

Bottom Right, Detail

Select the print position of page number.

Select [Detail] to specify the detailed page number

position using numeric values, and to set the page

number position ([Same as Front Page], [Mirror Front

Page]) when a page number is placed on the back side

of the paper in duplex printing.

1st Page 1 to 10 To start page numbering from a page other than the first

page, select [+] or [-] in "1st Page" to specify the starting

page. Select [# Keys] to use the numeric keys for entry.

Start # 1 to 999 To start the numbering with a number other than 1,

select [+] or [-] in "Start Number" to specify the starting

number. Select [# Keys] to use the numeric keys for

entry.

Last Page Auto, Manual (-10 to 0) If you do not want page numbering through to the last

page, select [Last Page]. Select [Manual] and select [+]

or [-] to specify the final page to be numbered (a

negative number of pages counting backwards from the

last page), and then select [OK]. Specify the desired

number up to -10. Select [# Keys] to use the numeric

keys for entry.

Custom

Box

Functions

Original [-1-][P. 1 ][1/n]

6-22

Using Various Functions > Functions

-1-, P.1,

1/n

Font Size Font sizes registered in

"Text (Text Stamp)" are

displayed.

Text (Text Stamp)

(page 8-16)

Set the font size of page number.

Style None, Bold, Italic,

Bold/Italic

Set the font style of page number. Select a font style by

checking the checkbox.

Font Courier, Letter Gothic Set the font of page number.

Color Black, White Set the color of page number.

Density 10 to 100%

(in 10% increments)

Set the density of the color of page number.

Set the value by selecting [+] or [-].

Display

Pattern

Transparent, Clipping,

Overwrite

Set the display method of page number.

Denominator#*1 Auto, Manual (1 to 999) The total number of pages "n" in the format [1/n] can be

changed manually. Select [Denominator #] and select

[Manual]. Select [+] or [-] to enter the total number of

pages and select [OK]. Select [# Keys] to use the

numeric keys for entry.

*1 This item appears when [1/n] is selected.

Item Value Description

6-23

Using Various Functions > Functions

Text Stamp

Add the specified text to the produced documents.

NOTE

This cannot be set when Text Stamp is set in the system settings.

Printing Jobs (page 8-17)

Item Value Description

Off

On Stamp Keyboard, Template 1 to 8 Select [Keyboard] and enter the text string to

be printed, or select a text stamp from the

displayed templates.

NOTE

Templates that have been set will appear.

For details on registering templates, refer to

the following:

Text (Text Stamp) (page 8-16)

Stamp Method Each Print Page,

Each Original Page

Select the stamp method.

Select [Stamp Method] and set the stamp

method for text stamp.

Position Top Left, Top Middle, Top Right,

Middle Left, Center, Middle Right,

Bottom Left, Bottom Middle, Bottom

Right, Detail

Set the stamp position to be printed.

Select [Position] and select the text stamp

position.

Select [Detail] to specify the detailed stamp

position using numeric values, and to set the

stamp position and angle when a stamp is

placed on the back side of the paper in duplex

printing.

Font Size Registered font sizes are displayed.

For details on registering font sizes,

refer to the following:

Font (Text Stamp) (page 8-16)

Set the font size of text stamp.

Character

Border

Off, Circle, Rectangle, Underline Set the character border and underline.

Style None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic Set the font style of text stamp. Select a font

style by checking the checkbox.

Font Courier, Letter Gothic Set the font of text stamp.

Color Black, White Set the color of text stamp.

Density 10 to 100%

(in 10% increments)

Set the density of text stamp color.

Set the value by selecting [+] or [-].

Display

Pattern

Transparent, Clipping, Overwrite Set the display method of text stamp.

Custom

Box

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

6-24

Using Various Functions > Functions

Bates Stamp

Add the additional information such as sequential number, date or text to the produced documents.

NOTE

This cannot be set when Bates Stamp is set in the system settings.

Printing Jobs (page 8-17)

Item Value Description

Off

On Stamp Date, User Name, Serial Number,

Numbering, Text 1, Text 2

Set the stamp to be printed.

When [Text 1] or [Text 2] is selected, select

[Change] below and enter the text string.

If you selected [Date], select [Date Format]

and select [MM/DD/YYYY], [DD/MM/YYYY],

or [YYYY/MM/DD] to set the date format.

To set [Numbering], select [Numbering

Default] and set the starting sequence

number (1 to 9999999). If you select [Fixed

Digit Number] > [On], you can set the

number of digits of the serial number (1 to 7

digits).

Position Top Left, Top Middle, Top Right,

Middle Left, Center, Middle Right,

Bottom Left, Bottom Middle, Bottom

Right, Detail

Set the stamp position to be printed.

Select [Position] and select the bates stamp

position.

Select [Detail] to specify the detailed stamp

position using numeric values, and to set the

stamp position when a stamp is placed on the

back side of the paper in duplex printing.

Font Size Registered font sizes are displayed.

For details on registering font sizes,

refer to the following:

Font (Bates Stamp) (page 8-16)

Set the font size of bates stamp.

Style None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic Set the font style of bates stamp. Select a font

style by checking the checkbox.

Font Courier, Letter Gothic Set the font of bates stamp.

Color Black, White Set the color of the bates stamp.

Density 10 to 100%

(in 10% increments)

Set the density of bates stamp color.

Set the value by selecting [+] or [-].

Display

Pattern

Transparent, Clipping, Overwrite Set the display method of the bates stamp.

Custom

Box

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

6-25

Using Various Functions > Functions

Job Finish Notice

Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. It is also available that send a notice when a job is interrupted.

Users can be notified of the completion of a job while working at a remote desk, saving the time spent waiting beside the

machine to finish.

File Name Entry

Adds a file name.

Additional information such as job number and date and time can also be set. You can check a job history or job status

using the file name, date and time, or job number specified here.

Select [File Name], enter the file name (up to 32 characters), and select [OK].

To add date and time, select [Date and Time]. To add job number, select [Job No.]. The added information will be

displayed in "Additional Info".

Priority Override

Suspends the current job and gives a new job top priority.

The suspended job resumes after the other job is finished.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

NOTE

• PC should be configured in advance so that E-mail can be used.

Command Center RX (page 2-51)

• E-mail can be sent to a single destination.

Item Description

Off

Address Entry Enter E-mail address directly. Select [E-mail Address], enter the address (up to 128

characters) and select [OK].

Notify when

interrupted

Add a check mark if you require an e-mail notification when a job is interrupted.

NOTE

• This function is not available if current job was an override.

• Priority override may not be available depending on the status of the current print job and memory usage.

Custom

Box

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

Custom

Box

Functions

Custom

Box

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

6-26

Using Various Functions > Functions

Delete after Printed

Automatically deletes a document from the box once printing is complete.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Encrypted PDF Password

Enter the preassigned password to print the PDF data.

Enter the Password, and select [OK].

JPEG/TIFF Print

Select the image size when printing JPEG or TIFF files.

XPS Fit to Page

Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing XPS file.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

NOTE

For details on entering the password, refer to the following:

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

Item Description

Paper Size Fits the image size to the selected paper size.

Image Resolution Prints at resolution of the actual image.

Print Resolution Fits the image size to the print resolution.

Custom

Box

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

USB

Memory

Functions

7-1

7 Status/Job Cancel

This chapter explains the following topics:

Checking Job Status .......................................................................................................................................... 7-2

Details of the Status Screens .................................................................................................................. 7-3

Checking Detailed Information of Jobs .................................................................................................... 7-6

Checking Job History ......................................................................................................................................... 7-7

Checking the Detailed Information of Histories ........................................................................................ 7-8

Sending the Log History .......................................................................................................................... 7-8

Job Operation .................................................................................................................................................... 7-9

Pause and Resumption of Jobs ............................................................................................................... 7-9

Canceling of Jobs .................................................................................................................................... 7-9

Priority Override for Waiting Jobs ............................................................................................................ 7-9

Reordering Print Jobs ............................................................................................................................ 7-10

Device/Communication ..................................................................................................................................... 7-11

Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies) ......................................................... 7-12

7-2

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

Checking Job Status

Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed.

Available Status Screens

The processing and waiting statuses of jobs are displayed as a list on the touch panel in two different screens - Printing

Jobs and Storing Jobs.

The following job statuses are available.

Displaying Status Screens

1Display the screen.

Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.

2Select the job you want to check.

Select either of [Print Job] or [Store Job] to check the status.

Status Display Job status to be displayed

Print Job Status • Printer

• E-mail reception

• Printing from Document Box

• Printing data from removable memory

• Application

• Job Report/List

Store Job Status • Printer

Print Job Status Screen (page 7-3)

Store Job Status screen (page 7-5)

7-3

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

Details of the Status Screens

Print Job Status Screen

NOTE

• You can show the job statuses of all users, or only the statuses of your own jobs.

Display Status/Log (page 8-20)

• This setting can also be changed from Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

No. Item Description

1Job No. Acceptance No. of job

2Accepted Time Accepted Time of job

3Type Icons that indicate the job type

Printer job

Job from Document Box

E-mail reception

Data from removable memory

Application

Report/List

4Job Name Job Name or file name

5User Name User Name for the executed job

6Status Status of job

InProcess: The status before starting to print.

Printing: Printing

Waiting: Print Waiting

Pause: Pausing print job or error

Canceling: Canceling the job

7[ ] of "Job Type" Only selected type of jobs is displayed.

8[Pause All Print

Jobs]

Pauses all the printing jobs. By pressing this key again, the

printing jobs will be resumed.

doc20171010091015 InProcess

000001

doc20171010091510 Waiting

000002

AAAAA

Pause All

Print Jobs

Cancel Priority

Override

Move Up

Status

Status Log

Job Type All

Job No. Accept Time Type Job Name User Name Status

1/1

Detail

Paper/

Supplies

Storing JobsPrinting Jobs

10/10 09:10

10/10 09:15

000003 10/10 09:20 doc20171010092015 WaitingBBBBB

Device/

Communicate

t0101_01

123 4 65

8910 1211

7-4

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

9[Cancel] Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this

key.

10 [Priority

Override]

Select the job to be overridden, and press this key.

Priority Override for Waiting Jobs (page 7-9)

11 [Move Up] In the list, select the job that you want to move up the job

queue and press this key.

Reordering Print Jobs (page 7-10)

12 [Detail] Select the job whose detailed information you want to

display from the list, and press this key.

Checking Detailed Information of Jobs (page 7-6)

You can select [Change] in “Copies” in the detailed

information screen to change the number of copies that are

printed.

NOTE

The job name and user name can be changed to other information if needed.

Customize Status Display (page 8-20)

No. Item Description

7-5

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

Store Job Status screen

No. Item Description

1Job No. Acceptance No. of job

2Accepted Time Accepted Time of job

3Type Icons that indicate the job type

Storing Job Printer

4Job Name Job name or file name is displayed.

5User Name User Name for the executed job

6Status Status of job

InProcess: The status before starting to save

Storing: Storing Data

Canceling: Canceling the job

Pause: Pausing the job

7[Cancel] Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this

key.

8[Detail] Select the job whose detailed information you want to

display from the list, and press this key.

Checking Detailed Information of Jobs (page 7-6)

NOTE

The job name and user name can be changed to other information if needed.

Customize Status Display (page 8-20)

Status Log

Job No. Accept Time Type

doc20150225144758

User Name Status

InProcess000438 14:47

Job Name

1/1

Cancel Detail

Status

Paper/

Supplies

Storing JobsPrinting Jobs Device/

Communicate

t0301_01

123 4 5 6

7-6

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

Checking Detailed Information of Jobs

1Display the screen.

2Check the information.

1Select [Detail] for the job for which you wish to display detailed information.

Detailed information of the selected job is displayed.

Use [ ] or [ ] to see the next or previous page of information.

2To exit from the detailed information, select [Close].

Details of the Status Screens (page 7-3)

doc20171010091015 InProcess

000001

doc20171010091510 Waiting

000002

AAAAA

Pause All

Print Jobs

Cancel Priority

Override

Move Up

Status

Status Log

Job Type All

Job No. Accept Time Type Job Name User Name Status

1/1

Detail

Paper/

Supplies

Storing JobsPrinting Jobs

10/10 09:10

10/10 09:15

000003 10/10 09:20 doc20171010092015 WaitingBBBBB

Device/

Communicate

t0101_01

7-7

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History

Checking Job History

Available Job History Screens

The job histories are displayed separately in two screens - Printing Jobs and Storing Jobs. The following job histories

are available.

Displaying Job History Screen

1Display the screen.

Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.

2Select the job to check details.

Select the [Log] tab, and select the job to check details from the list.

NOTE

• Job history is also available by Command Center RX or KYOCERA Net Viewer from the computer.

Command Center RX User Guide

KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide

• You can show the job log of all users, or only your own job log.

Display Status/Log (page 8-20)

• This setting can also be changed from Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

Screen Job histories to be displayed

Print Job Log • Printer

• E-mail reception

• Printing from Document Box

• Job Report/List

• Printing data from removable memory

• Application

Store Job Log • Printer

7-8

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History

Checking the Detailed Information of Histories

1Display the screen.

2Check the information.

1Select the job to check details from the list, and select [Detail].

Detailed information of the selected job is displayed.

2To exit from the detailed information, select [Close].

Sending the Log History

You can send the log history by E-mail. You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically

whenever a set number of jobs is reached.

Send Log History (page 8-27)

Displaying Job History Screen (page 7-7)

NOTE

To check the information of the next/previous page, select [ ] or [ ].

Status Log

All

Job No. End Date Type

doc20170125141427

User Name Result

Completed000080 01/25 14:14

Status

Job Name

1/1

doc20170125142253 Completed000081 01/25 14:22

doc20170125142310 Completed000082 01/25 14:23

doc20170125142458 Error000083 01/25 14:24

doc20170125143034 Completed000084 01/25 14:30

Job Type

Detail

Paper/

Supplies

Storing JobsPrinting Jobs Device/

Communicate

t0102_01

7-9

Status/Job Cancel > Job Operation

Job Operation

Pause and Resumption of Jobs

Pause/resume all printing jobs in printing/waiting.

1Display the screen.

Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.

2Select [Pause All Print Jobs] on the printing jobs status screen.

Printing is paused.

When resuming the printing of jobs that have been paused, select [Resume All Print Jobs].

Canceling of Jobs

A job in printing/waiting status can be canceled.

1Display the screen.

Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.

2Select the job to be canceled from the list, and select [Cancel].

3Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.

Priority Override for Waiting Jobs

Priority Override function suspends the current job and prints the job in waiting first.

1Display the screen.

Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.

2Select [Printing Jobs].

3Select the job to be given priority, and select

[Priority Override].

4Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.

The current job in printing is suspended, and the job for override.

7-10

Status/Job Cancel > Job Operation

Reordering Print Jobs

This function allows you to select a queued print job and raise its output priority.

1Display the screen.

Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.

2Select [Printing Jobs].

3Select the job to be assigned a higher priority and select

[Move Up].

The priority of the selected job is increased by 1.

To further raise the job's priority, select [Move Up] again. Each time you select [Move Up], the

priority increases by 1.

7-11

Status/Job Cancel > Device/Communication

Device/Communication

Configure the devices/lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status.

1Display the screen.

1Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.

2Select [Device/Communicate].

The screen to check the status or configure the devices is displayed.

2Check the status.

The items you can check are described below.

"Printer"

Error information such as paper jam, out of toner, or out of paper, and status such as waiting or

printing are displayed.

"Removable Memory (USB Memory)"

• The usage, capacity and free space of the external media connected to this machine are

displayed.

•Select [Format] to format external media.

•Select [Remove] to safely remove the external media.

"Hard Disk"

The information such as formatting, overwriting for erasure, and error occurrence is displayed.

"Connectivity"

The network connection status and the status of the optional keyboard are displayed.

IMPORTANT

When [Format] is selected, all data in the external media is erased.

7-12

Status/Job Cancel > Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies)

Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner

and Paper (Paper/Supplies)

Check the remaining amount of toner, and paper on the touch panel.

1Display the screen.

1Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.

2Select [Paper/Supplies].

2Check the status.

The items you can check are described below.

"Toner Information"

The amount of toner remaining is shown in levels. And you can check the status of waste

toner box.

"Paper Status"

You can check the size, orientation, type, and remaining amount of paper in each paper

source. The amount of paper remaining is shown in levels.

"Others"

You can check the status of staples and punch waste box.

8-1

Setup and Registration

(System Menu)

This chapter explains the following topics:

System Menu ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-2

Operation Method .................................................................................................................................... 8-2

System Menu Settings ............................................................................................................................. 8-3

Counter .................................................................................................................................................... 8-6

Cassette/MP Tray Settings ...................................................................................................................... 8-6

Common Settings .................................................................................................................................... 8-9

Home ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-22

Document Box/Removable Memory ...................................................................................................... 8-22

Printer .................................................................................................................................................... 8-23

Report .................................................................................................................................................... 8-26

System/Network ..................................................................................................................................... 8-30

User Login/Job Accounting .................................................................................................................... 8-49

User Property ......................................................................................................................................... 8-50

Date/Timer/Energy Saver ...................................................................................................................... 8-50

Adjustment/Maintenance ....................................................................................................................... 8-53

Internet ................................................................................................................................................... 8-55

Application ............................................................................................................................................. 8-55

8-2

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

System Menu

Configure settings related to overall machine operation.

Operation Method

1Display the screen.

Select the [System Menu/Counter] key.

2Select a function.

3Configure the function.

Refer to System Menu Settings on the following page and configure as needed.

1 Displays the System Menu items.

2 Scrolls up and down when the list of

values cannot be displayed in its entirety

on a single screen.

3 Displays setting items

Select the key of a function to display the

setting screen.

4 Returns to the previous screen.

1 Enter a setting by selecting it.

2 Accepts the settings and exits.

3 Returns to the previous screen without

making any changes.

NOTE

• In order to change settings that require administer privileges, you must log in with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

• If function default settings have been changed, the [Reset] key can be selected in each function screen to

immediately change the settings.

Date/Timer/Energy Saver

Change

Date/Time:

Date Format:

Time Zone: Auto Panel Reset:

Low Power Timer:

Sleep Timer:

Auto Error Clear:

Panel Reset Timer:

Change

1/2

m02015701_01

System Menu

1/2

m01010101_01

Quick Setup Wizard

Cassette/MP Tray Settings

Home

System/Network

Report

Common Settings

Document Box/Removable Memory

Printer

Counter

User Login/Job Accounting

Date/Timer/Energy Saver - Time Zone

Set time zone.

Select the location nearest you.

Time Zone

-12:00 International Date Line West

1/16

+13:00 Samoa

-10:00 Hawaii

-09:00 Alaska

-11:00 Universal Coordinated Time-11

-08:00 Baja California

Cancel OK

m031701_01

8-3

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

System Menu Settings

This section explains the functions that can be configured in System Menu. To configure the settings, select the item in

System Menu and select the setting item. For details on each function, see the table below.

Item Description Reference

Page

Quick Setup Wizard The Quick Setup Wizard configures Network and Energy Saver

settings.

page 2-37

Counter Check the number of sheets printed. page 2-48

Cassette/MP Tray Settings Select paper size and media type for Cassettes and multipurpose

tray.

page 8-6

Cassette 1 (to 5) Select type of paper in Cassette 1 (to 5). page 8-6

MP Tray Setting Select type of paper in multipurpose tray. page 8-7

Common Settings Configure overall machine operation. page 8-9

Language Set the language to use for the touch panel display. page 8-9

Default Screen Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen). page 8-9

Buzzer Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations. page 8-9

Paper Settings Configure settings for paper. page 8-10

Measurement Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions. page 8-12

Error Handling Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has

occurred.

page 8-13

Paper Output Select the output tray respectively for print jobs from Document

Box and computers.

page 8-14

Function Key Assignment Assign a function to each function key. page 8-15

Function Defaults Defaults are the values automatically set after the warm-up is

completed or the [Reset] key is selected.

Set the defaults for available settings. Setting the frequently-used

values as defaults makes subsequent jobs easier.

page 8-15

Keyboard Layout Change the layout of the touch panel keyboard used to enter

characters.

page 8-16

Optional Keyboard Type Select the type of optional keyboard that you want to use. page 8-16

System Stamp Configure settings for header, footer, and stamp. page 8-16

Manual Staple Select whether to use Manual Staple. page 8-18

Offset Documents by Job Select whether to offset documents by Job. page 8-18

Low Toner Alert Level Set the amount of remaining toner to notify the administrator when

to order a toner when the toner is running low.

page 8-19

Toner Waste Full Alert Set the capacity of the waste toner box for which you require

notification to be sent that the waste toner box is going to be full.

page 8-19

8-4

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Offset One Page

Documents

Set whether one-page documents are sorted. page 8-19

Display Status/Log Set the display method of the Status/Log. page 8-20

Message Banner Print Set whether the confirmation screen appears before each sheet is

printed when printing multiple banner sheets.

page 8-20

Customize Status Display Select the item that appears for the printing jobs status. page 8-20

Message Board Settings Configure settings for message board. page 8-21

Numeric Keypad Settings Select whether or not to display the numeric keypad. page 8-21

Show Power Off Message Select whether the confirmation message is displayed, when

Power Switch is pressed.

page 8-22

Home Configure settings for Home screen. page 8-22

Document Box/Removable

Memory

Configures settings related to the Custom Box and Job Box. page 8-22

Printer Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the

application software screen. However, the following settings are

available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine.

page 8-23

Report Print reports to check the machine settings, status, and history.

Settings for printing reports can also be configured.

page 8-26

Print Report Configure settings for printing reports and histories. page 8-26

Sending Log History page 8-27

Device Log History

Settings

page 8-28

Secure Comm. Error Log page 8-29

Item Description Reference

Page

8-5

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

System/Network Configure machine system settings. page 8-30

Network Configures network settings. page 8-30

Optional Network Configure settings for the optional Network Interface Kit. page 8-42

Primary Network (Client) Select the network interface to be used for the connection when

this machine functions as a client.

page 8-45

Security Level The Security Level setting is primarily a menu option used by

service personnel for maintenance work. There is no need for

customers to use this menu.

—

Interface Block Setting This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface

with external devices such as USB hosts or optional interfaces.

page 8-46

Data Security Configure settings for data stored in the SSD, hard disk, and

machine's memory.

page 8-47

Optional Function You can use the optional applications installed on this machine.page 8-48

Bluetooth Settings Set the Bluetooth keyboard. page 8-48

Restart Entire Device Restart the CPU without turning the power switch off. Use this to

deal with any unstable operation by the machine. (Same as the

computer restart.)

page 8-49

NFC Set NFC (Near Field Communication). page 8-49

User Login/Job Accounting Configures settings related to machine management.

User Login:

Overview of User Login Administration (page 9-2)

Job Accounting:

Overview of Job Accounting (page 9-20)

—

User Property Allows you to view information about logged in users and edit

some of that information.

page 8-50

Date/Timer/Energy Saver Configures settings related to the date and time. page 8-50

Adjustment/Maintenance Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance. page 8-53

Internet Configure settings related to the internet. page 8-55

Application Configure settings for Application. page 8-55

Item Description Reference

Page

8-6

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Counter

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Counter]

Check the number of sheets printed.

Cassette/MP Tray Settings

Select paper size and media type for Cassettes and multipurpose tray.

Cassette 1 (to 5)

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Cassette/MP Tray Settings] > [Cassette 1 (to 5)]

Select paper size and media type for Cassettes 1 to 5.

Selection Item Selectable Size/Type

Paper Size*1 Auto Paper size is automatically detected and selected.

Values: Metric, Inch

Standard Sizes 1 Available options are as follows:

Values

Metric models:

A3*2*3, A4-R*3, A4*3, A5-R*3, A5*3, A6-R*3, B4*2*3, B5-R*3, B5*3, B6-R*3,

Folio*3, 216×340 mm*3, SRA3*2*3

Inch models:

Ledger*2*3, Letter-R*3, Letter*3, Legal*3, Statement-R*3, Executive,

12×18"*2*3, Oficio II

Standard Sizes 2 Select from standard sizes except Standard Sizes 1.

Values

Metric models:

Ledger*2*3, Letter-R*3, Letter*3, Legal*3, Statement-R*3, Executive,

12×18"*2*3, Oficio II, 8K*2, 16K-R, 16K

Inch models:

A3*2*3, A4-R*3, A4*3, A5-R*3, A5*3, A6-R*3, B4*2*3, B5-R*3, B5*3, B6-R*3,

Folio*3, 8K*2, 16K-R, 16K, 216×340 mm*3, SRA3*2*3

Others Select from special standard sizes and custom sizes.

Values: ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6,

Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4*2, Hagaki

(Cardstock), Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2

8-7

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

MP Tray Setting

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Cassette/MP Tray Settings] > [MP Tray Setting]

Select paper size and media type for the multipurpose tray.

Paper Size Size Entry Enter the size not included in the standard size.

Values

Cassette 1

Metric

X: 148 to 356 mm (in 1mm increments)

Y: 98 to 297 mm (in 1mm increments)

Inch

X: 5.83 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)

Y: 3.86 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)

Cassette 2 to 4

Metric

X: 148 to 457 mm (in 1mm increments)

Y: 98 to 320 mm (in 1mm increments)

Inch

X: 5.83 to 18.00" (in 0.01" increments)

Y: 3.86 to 12.60" (in 0.01" increments)

Media Type*4 Select the media type.

Values: Plain (60 - 105 g/m2), Rough, Vellum (60 - 105 g/m2), Recycled,

Preprinted*5, Bond, Cardstock*6, Color, Prepunched*5, Letterhead*5,

Envelope*6, Thick (106 - 163 g/m2), High Quality, Custom 1 - 8

*1 When the optional Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2) or Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) is used, paper size does

not appear.

*2 Not displayed in Cassette 1.

*3 Paper size is automatically detected in the cassette.

*4 To change to a media type other than "Plain".

Media Type Setting (page 8-12)

When a paper weight that cannot be loaded in the cassette is set for a media type, that media type does not appear.

*5 To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead.

Special Paper Action (page 8-11)

*6 Not displayed in the optional Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2) or Side Feeder (3,000-sheet).

Item Description

Paper Size Auto Paper size is automatically detected and selected.

Values: Metric, Inch

Standard Sizes 1 Available options are as follows:

Values

Metric models:

A3*1, A4-R*1, A4*1, A5-R*1, A5, A6-R*1, B4*1, B5-R*1, B5*1, B6-R*1, Folio,

216×340 mm, SRA3*1

Inch models:

Ledger*1, Letter-R*1, Letter*1, Legal*1, Statement-R*1, Executive,

12×18"*1, Oficio II

Selection Item Selectable Size/Type

8-8

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Paper Size Standard Sizes 2 Select from standard sizes except Standard Sizes 1.

Values

Metric models:

Ledger*1, Letter-R*1, Letter*1, Legal*1, Statement-R*1, Executive,

12×18"*1, Oficio II, 8K, 16K-R, 16K

Inch models:

A3*1, A4-R*1, A4*1, A5-R*1, A5, A6-R*1, B4*1, B5-R*1, B5*1, B6-R*1,

Folio*1, 8K, 16K-R, 16K, 216×340 mm, SRA3*1

Others Select from special standard sizes and custom sizes.

Values: ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6,

Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4,

Hagaki

(Cardstock)

*1,

Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2

Size Entry Enter the size not included in the standard size.

Values

Metric

X: 148 to 457 mm (in 1mm increments)

Y: 98 to 320 mm (in 1mm increments)

Inch

X: 5.83 to 18.00" (in 0.01" increments)

Y: 3.86 to 12.60" (in 0.01" increments)

X=Length, Y=Width

Media Type*2 Select the media type.

Values: Plain (60 to 105 g/m2), Transparency, Rough, Vellum (52 to

105 g/m2), Labels, Recycled, Preprinted*3, Bond, Cardstock, Color,

Prepunched*3, Letterhead*3, Envelope, Thick (106 to 300 g/m2),

Coated, High Quality, Index Tab Dividers, Custom 1-8

*1 Paper size is automatically detected in the Multipurpose Tray.

*2 To change to a media type other than "Plain".

Media Type Setting (page 8-12)

*3 To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead.

Special Paper Action (page 8-11)

Item Description

Horizontal Vertical

8-9

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Common Settings

Configures overall machine operation.

Language

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Language]

Default Screen

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Default Screen]

Buzzer

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Buzzer]

Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations.

Item Description

Language Set the language to use for the touch panel display.

Item Description

Default Screen Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen).

Value: Home, Status, Custom Box, Job Box, Removable Memory, Program,

Internet Browser*1, Application Name*2

*1 Configure necessary settings for Internet Browser.

Internet (page 8-55)

*2 The running application will be displayed.

Application (page 5-9)

Item Description

Volume Set the buzzer volume level.

Value: 0 (Mute), 1 (Minimum), 2, 3 (Medium), 4, 5 (Maximum)

Key Confirmation Emit a sound when the operation panel and touch panel keys are selected.

Value: Off, On

Job Finish Emit a sound when a print job is normally completed.

Value: Off, On

Ready Emit a sound when the warm-up is completed.

Value: Off, On

Warning Emit a sound when errors occur.

Value: Off, On

Optional Keyboard Emit a sound to confirm keypresses with a sound.

Value: Off, On

8-10

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Paper Settings

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Paper Settings]

Configure settings for paper.

Item Description

Media Type Setting Select weight for each media type.

For Custom 1-8, settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed.

Media Type Setting (page 8-12)

Custom Paper Size Set up frequently-used custom paper size.

The custom size option is displayed on the screen to select paper size in the

multipurpose tray.

To register a custom paper size, press [On] and enter the desired size. Up to four

custom paper sizes can be added.

Value

Metric

X: 148 to 457 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Y: 98 to 320 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Inch

X: 5.83 to 18.00" (in 0.01" increments)

Y: 3.86 to 12.60" (in 0.01" increments)

X=Length, Y=Width

Media Type: Plain, Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted,

Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, Envelope, Coated,

High Quality, Index Tab Dividers, Custom 1-8

Default Paper Source Select the default paper source from Cassette 1-5 and multipurpose tray.

Value: Cassette 1 (to 5), Multipurpose Tray

NOTE

[Cassette 3] to [Cassette 5] are displayed when the following optional paper feeder

is installed.

[Cassette 3]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet×2) or large capacity paper feeder

(1,500-sheet×2) is installed.

[Cassette 4]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet×2) or large capacity paper feeder

(1,500-sheet×2) is installed.

[Cassette 5]: When a side feeder (3,000-sheet) is installed.

Auto Switch When the optional large capacity feeder is selected, the cassette can be switched to

another large capacity feeder depending on your usage.

Value: Off, On

Vertical Horizontal

8-11

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Show Paper Setup

Message

Set whether to display the confirmation screen for the paper setting when a new

paper is set for each cassette.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

[Cassette 3] to [Cassette 5] are displayed when the following optional paper feeder

is installed.

[Cassette 3]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet×2) or large capacity paper feeder

(1,500-sheet×2) is installed.

[Cassette 4]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet×2) or large capacity paper feeder

(1,500-sheet×2) is installed.

[Cassette 5]: When a side feeder (3,000-sheet) is installed.

Cassette 1 to 5

Multipurpose Tray

Paper Source for Cover Select the paper source in which the cover paper used for the Cover function is

placed.

Value: Cassette 1 (to 5), Multipurpose Tray

NOTE

[Cassette 3] to [Cassette 5] are displayed when the following optional paper feeder

is installed.

[Cassette 3]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet×2) or large capacity paper feeder

(1,500-sheet×2) is installed.

[Cassette 4]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet×2) or large capacity paper feeder

(1,500-sheet×2) is installed.

[Cassette 5]: When a side feeder (3,000-sheet) is installed.

Special Paper Action When printing on Prepunched, Preprint, and Letterhead, the punch-holes might not

be aligned or the print direction might be upside-down depending on the direction of

the document and the combination of print functions. In such a case, select [Adjust

Print Direction] to adjust the print direction. When paper orientation is not important,

select [Speed Priority].

If [Adjust Print Direction] is selected, load paper according to the steps below.

Example: printing on Letterhead

Value: Adjust Print Direction, Speed Priority

Item Description

Multipurpose TrayCassetteFinishedPaperOriginal

8-12

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Media Type Setting

The following media type and paper weight combinations are available.

Each media type's default weight is indicated.

For Custom 1-8, settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed.

Measurement

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Measurement]

Paper Weight Weight (g/m2)Paper Weight Weight (g/m2)

Light*1

*1 The processing speed will be slower than normal.

52 g/m² to 59 g/m² Heavy 2*1 136 g/m² to 163 g/m²

Normal 1 60 g/m² to 74 g/m² Heavy 3*1 164 g/m² to 220 g/m²

Normal 2 75 g/m² to 90 g/m² Heavy 4*1 221 g/m² to 256 g/m²

Normal 3 91 g/m² to 105 g/m² Heavy 5*1 257 g/m² to 300 g/m²

Heavy 1*1 106 g/m² to 135 g/m² Extra Heavy*1 Transparencies

Media Type Default Media Type Default

Plain Normal 2 Prepunched Normal 2

Rough Normal 3 Letterhead Normal 2

Vellum Heavy 1 Envelope Heavy 3

Labels Heavy 2 Thick Heavy 3

Recycled Normal 2 High Quality Normal 2

Preprinted Normal 2 Coated Heavy 1

Bond Normal 3 Index Tab Dividers Heavy 4

Cardstock Heavy 4 Custom 1 - 8 Normal 2

Color Normal 3

Item Description

Duplex Print Prohibit Duplex printing allowed.

Permit Duplex printing not allowed.

Name Change names for Custom 1-8. Names should be not more than 16 characters.

Selecting media type at multipurpose tray, the name after change will be displayed.

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

Item Description

Measurement Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions.

Value: mm, inch

8-13

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Error Handling

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Error Handling]

Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred.

Item Description

Duplexing Error Set what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected paper sizes and

media types.

Value

1-sided: Printed in 1-sided

Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.

Finishing Error Set alternative actions when finishing (Staple/Punch/Offset) is not available for the

selected paper size or media type.

Value

Ignore: The setting is ignored and the job is printed.

Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.

No Staple Error Set what to do when staples run out during printing.

Value

Ignore: Printing continues without stapling.

Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.

NOTE

Requires the optional Document Finisher.

Finished Pages Exceeded Set what to do when finishing (stapling or offsetting) capacity is exceeded during

printing.

Value

Ignore: Printing continues without finishing.

Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.

NOTE

Requires the optional Document Finisher.

Punch Waste Full Error Set what to do when the punch waste box becomes full during printing.

Value

Ignore: Printing continues without punching.

Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.

NOTE

Requires the optional Document Finisher and Punch Unit.

Paper Mismatch Error Set what to do when the selected paper size or type does not match paper size or

type loaded in the specified paper source while printing from the computer by

specifying the cassette or multipurpose tray.

Value

Ignore: The setting is ignored and the job is printed.

Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.

8-14

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Paper Output

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Paper Output]

Inserted Paper Mismatch Set what to do when it is detected that the multipurpose tray paper size setting does

not match the actual paper size that is fed.

Value

Ignore: The setting is ignored and the job is printed.

Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.

Paper Jam before Staple The page from which printing is resumed when a paper jam occurs during a job with

stapling can be selected.

Value

Resume at Top of Page: Resume printing from the first page of the document.

Resume at Jammed Page: Resume printing from the page where the jam occurred.

NOTE

Requires the optional Document Finisher.

Item Description

Paper Output Select the output tray respectively for print jobs from Document Box and computers.

Value:

with optional job separator

• Main Tray: Outputs to the Main Tray of the machine

• Job Separator Tray: Delivery to the Job Separator.

with optional 1,000-Sheet Finisher

• Job Separator Tray*1: Delivery to the Job Separator.

• Finisher Tray: Delivery to the Finisher Tray of the optional Document

Finisher.

with optional 4,000-Sheet Finisher

• Job Separator Tray*1: Delivery to the Job Separator.

• Tray A: Delivery to the Tray A of the optional Document

Finisher

• Tray B: Delivery to the Tray B of the optional Document

Finisher

with optional Mailbox

• Job Separator Tray*1: Delivery to the Job Separator.

• Tray A: Delivery to the Tray A of the optional Document

Finisher

• Tray B: Delivery to the Tray B of the optional Document

Finisher

• Tray 1 to 7: Delivery to tray 1 to 7 (tray 1 is the uppermost tray) of

the optional Mailbox

NOTE

Requires the optional Job Separator or Document Finisher (1,000-Sheet Finisher or

4,000-Sheet Finisher).

*1 The paper sizes cannot be output to the Job Separator Tray: SRA3, 12×18".

Item Description

8-15

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Function Key Assignment

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Function Key Assignment]

Assign a function to each function key.

Function Defaults

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Function Defaults]

Item Description

Function Key 1 Value: None, Custom Box, Job Box, Removable Memory, Internet Browser,

Program*1, Application*2

NOTE

You can select the functions to be displayed for [All], [Application], [Program] and

[Others].

*1 The registered program will be displayed.

*2 The running application will be displayed.

Function Key 2

Function Key 3

Item Description

Zoom Select the enlarged/reduced default when paper size changed.

Value: 100%, Auto

Margin Default Set the default margin.

Value

Metric

Left/Right: -18 to 18 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Top/Bottom: -18 to 18 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Inch

Left/Right: -0.75 to 0.75" (in 0.01" increments)

Top/Bottom: -0.75 to 0.75" (in 0.01" increments)

EcoPrint Select the EcoPrint default.

Value: Off, On

Collate/Offset Set the defaults for Collate/Offset.

Value

Collate: Off, On

Offset: Off, Each Set (If [Off] is selected of Collate, it is set to [Each Page].)

Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) Select the default Toner Save Level (EcoPrint).

Value: 1 (Low) to 5 (High)

NOTE

Raising the level reduces toner consumption, but image quality falls.

File Name Entry Set an automatically entered name (default) for jobs. Additional information such as

Date and Time and Job No. can also be set.

Value

File Name: Up to 32 characters can be entered.

Additional Info: None, Date and Time, Job No., Job No. & Date and Time,

Date and Time & Job No.

8-16

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Keyboard Layout

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Keyboard Layout]

Optional Keyboard Type

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Optional Keyboard Type]

System Stamp

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [System Stamp]

JPEG/TIFF Print Select the image size (resolution) when printing JPEG or TIFF file.

Value: Fit to Paper Size, Image Resolution, Fit to Print Resolution

XPS Fit to Page Set the default value for the XPS fit to page function.

Value: Off, On

Item Description

Keyboard Layout Change the layout of the touch panel keyboard used to enter characters.

Value: QWERTY, QWERTZ, AZERTY

Item Description

Optional Keyboard Type Select the type of optional keyboard that you want to use.

Value: US-English, US-English with Euro, French, German, UK-English

Item Description

Basic Configure settings for stamps.

Text (Text Stamp) Select [Add/Edit] to edit the test string for a template. Up to 8 templates can be

registered. Select [Delete] to delete a template.

Font (Page #) Set the font size for page numbers when printing them.

Value

Size 1 to 3: 6.0 to 64.0 pt

Font (Bates Stamp) When a bates stamp is used, set the font sizes that can be set.

Value

Size 1 to 3: 6.0 to 64.0 pt

Font (Text Stamp) Set the font size for stamps when printing them.

Value

Size 1 to 3: 6.0 to 64.0 pt

Item Description

8-17

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Printing Jobs Configure settings for stamps when a document is printed.

After configuring the setting, return to the Custom Box (Printing a Document) screen

from System Menu, and select the [Reset] key.

Text Stamp Select whether to print a text stamp on all printing jobs.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When [On] is selected, the Text Stamp settings cannot be changed when printing.

Edit Text Stamp Set the default text stamp.

Stamp Select a text string to be stamped from templates, or select [Stamp] and enter a

maximum of 32 characters for the text string.

NOTE

Templates that have been set will appear. For details on registering templates, refer

to the following:

Text (Text Stamp) (page 8-16)

Stamp Method Select the stamp method for the text stamp.

Value: Each Print Page, Each Original Page

Position Set the text stamp position.

Value: Top Left, Top Middle, Top Right, Middle Left, Center, Middle Right,

Bottom Left, Bottom Middle, Bottom Right, Detail

NOTE

Select [Detail] to specify the detailed stamp position using numeric values, and to set

the stamp position and angle when a stamp is placed on the back side of the paper in

duplex printing.

Font Set the font of the text stamp.

Value

Size: Font sizes registered in Font (Text Stamp) are displayed.

Font (Text Stamp) (page 8-16)

Character Border: Off, Circle, Rectangle, Underline

Style: None, Bold, Italic, Bold/Italic

Font: Courier, Letter Gothic

Color: Black, White

Density: 10 to 100% (in 10% increments)

Display Pattern: Transparent, Clipping, Overwrite

Item Description

8-18

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Manual Staple

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Manual Staple]

Offset Documents by Job

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Offset Documents by Job]

Printing Jobs

Bates Stamp Select whether to print a bates stamp on all printing jobs.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When [On] is selected, the Bates Stamp settings cannot be changed when printing.

Edit Bates Stamp Set the default Bates Stamp.

Value: Date, User Name, Serial Number, Numbering, Text 1, Text 2, Date Format,

Numbering Default, Position, Font

NOTE

To set [Text 1] or [Text 2], select [Change] below and enter a maximum of 32

characters for the text string.

To set [Date], select [Date Format] and set the date display format.

To set [Numbering], select [Numbering Default] and set the starting sequence

number (1 to 9999999). If you select [Fixed Digit Number] > [On], you can set the

number of digits of the serial number (1 to 7 digits).

Select [Detail] in "Position" to specify the detailed stamp position using numeric

values, and to set the stamp position to be placed on the back side of the paper in

duplex printing.

NOTE

Only displayed when the optional 4,000-Sheet Finisher is installed.

Item Description

Manual Staple Select whether to use Manual Staple.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

If you selected [On], set the time until manual stapling mode is automatically

cancelled. The setting range is 5 to 60 seconds (in 5-second increments).

Staple Position Set the default Staple Position.

Value: A4, Letter

Item Description

Offset Documents by Job Select whether to offset documents by Job.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when an optional Document Finisher is installed.

Item Description

8-19

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Low Toner Alert Level

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Low Toner Alert Level]

Toner Waste Full Alert

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Toner Waste Full Alert]

Offset One Page Documents

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Offset One Page Documents]

Item Description

Low Toner Alert Set the amount of remaining toner to notify the administrator when to order a toner

when the toner is running low.

This notification is used for event report, Status Monitor, SNMP Trap.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

If [On] is selected, set the amount of remaining toner to alert. The setting range is 5 to

100% (in 1% increments).

Item Description

Toner Waste Full Alert Notifies the user or the administrator when the waste toner box is almost full. Set the

notification timer based on the amount of toner in the waste toner box.

Notify via Operation

Panel

Notifies you via the Operation Panel when the waste toner box is almost full.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

If [On] is selected, set the notification timer based on the amount of toner in the waste

toner box. The setting range is 10 to 90% (in 10% increments).

Notify Externally (for

administration use)

Notifies the administrator when the waste toner box is almost full. This notification is

used for the Event Report, Status Monitor, SNMP Trap (Printer Management System

etc.).

Value: Off, On

NOTE

If [On] is selected, set the notification timer based on the amount of toner in the waste

toner box. The setting range is 10 to 90% (in 10% increments).

Item Description

Offset One Page

Documents

Set whether one-page documents are sorted.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when an optional Document Finisher is installed.

8-20

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Display Status/Log

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Display Status/Log]

Set the display method of the Status/Log.

Message Banner Print

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Message Banner Print]

Customize Status Display

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Customize Status Display]

Set the items that appear in the status screens for printing jobs and storing jobs.

Item Description

Display Jobs Detail Status Value: Show All, My Jobs Only, Hide All

Display Jobs Log Value: Show All, My Jobs Only, Hide All

Item Description

Message Banner Print Set whether the confirmation screen appears before each sheet is printed when

printing multiple banner sheets.

Value: Off, On

Item Description

Printing Jobs Column 1 Value: Job Name, User Name, Print Pages x Copies, Total Printed Pages

Printing Jobs Column 2 Value: Job Name, User Name, Print Pages x Copies, Total Printed Pages

Storing Jobs Column 1 Value: Job Name, User Name, Original Pages, Color/Black & White

Storing Jobs Column 2 Value: Job Name, User Name, Original Pages, Color/Black & White

8-21

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Message Board Settings

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Message Board Settings]

Numeric Keypad Settings

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Numeric Keypad Settings]

Item Description

Message Board Select whether to use the Message Board.

Value: Off, On

Message List Configure settings for the registered message board.

Add Add a new message board.

Device to Show Select where to show the message.

Value

Hide: Displays no message.

Operation Panel: Displays a message on the operation panel.

Embedded Web Server: Displays a message in Command Center RX.

Panel + Web Server: Displays a message in the operation panel and the

Command Center RX.

Message Type Select the message type.

Value: Normal, Alert, Prohibition

Place to Show Select where to show the message in the touch panel.

Value:

Home Screen: Home Screen

administration

Priority Show Displays the message on the message board.

Value: Off, On

Title Enter a maximum of 30 characters for the title to display on the message board.

Body Enter a maximum of 300 characters for the body to display on the message board.

Delete Deletes the message board selected on the list.

Raise Priority Raise the priority of the message board selected on the list.

Lower Priority Lower the priority of the message board selected on the list.

Detail/Edit Display information on the selected message board.

Item Description

Default

Display

Print from Box Select whether or not to display the numeric keypad.

Value: Off, On

HyPAS

Application

Layout (HyPAS Application) Select the HyPAS numeric keypad layout to display upon startup.

Value: Floating, Horizontal, On the Right

8-22

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Show Power Off Message

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Show Power Off Message]

Home

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Home]

Configure settings for Home screen.

Editing the Home Screen (page 2-14)

Document Box/Removable Memory

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Document Box/Removable Memory]

Configures settings related to the Custom Box and Job Box.

Item Description

Show Power Off Message Set the mode whether display a confirmation message in power supply off.

Value: Off, On

Item Description

Custom Box Configure settings for Custom Box.

Add/Edit Box Creating a New Custom Box (page 5-21)

Default Setting Auto File Deletion Time

Set the time to automatically delete stored documents.

Job Box Configure settings for Job Box.

Quick Copy Job

Retention

To maintain free space on the hard disk, you can set the maximum number of stored

jobs.

Value: number between 0 and 300

NOTE

When 0 is set, Quick Copy cannot be used.

Deletion of Job

Retention

This setting specifies that documents, such as Private Printing, Quick Copying, or

Proof and Hold Printing, saved temporarily in the job box are automatically deleted

after they have been saved for a set time.

Value: Off, 1 hour, 4 hours, 1 day, 1 week

NOTE

This function is valid for documents saved after the function is set. Regardless of this

function setting, temporary documents are deleted when the power switch is turned

off.

Quick Setup Registration Select the functions to be registered for Quick Setup. Six keys of the Quick Setup

screen are allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary.

Six items in the following options are available.

Paper Selection, Collate/Offset, Staple/Punch*1, Duplex, Combine, Delete after

Printed

Value: Off, Key 1 to 6

*1 Display only when an optional Document Finisher is installed. When a punching unit is not installed, this item name

is "Staple".

8-23

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Printer

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Printer]

Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the application software screen. However, the following

settings are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine.

Item Description

Emulation Select the emulation for operating this machine by commands oriented to other types

of printers.

Value: PCL6, KPDL, KPDL (Auto)

NOTE

When you have selected [KPDL (Auto)], set "Alt Emulation", too.

When you have selected [KPDL] or [KPDL (Auto)], set "KPDL Error Report", too.

Alt Emulation When you have selected [KPDL (Auto)] as emulation mode, you can switch between

KPDL and another emulation mode (alternative emulation) automatically according to

the data to print.

Value: PCL6

KPDL Error Report When an error has occurred during printing in KPDL emulation mode, set whether or

not the error report is output.

Value: Off, On

EcoPrint EcoPrint conserves toner when printing. This is recommended for test copies where

faded printing is not a problem.

Value: Off, On

Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) Select the default Toner Save Level (EcoPrint).

Value: 1 (Low) to 5 (High)

NOTE

Raising the level reduces toner consumption, but image quality falls.

Override A4/Letter Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter, which are similar in size, as the same size

when printing.

Value

Off: A4 and Letter are not regarded as the same in size.

On: A4 and Letter are regarded as the same in size. The machine will use

whichever size is in the paper source.

Duplex Select binding orientation for duplex mode.

Value: 1-sided, 2-sided Bind LongEdge, 2-sided Bind ShortEdge

Copies Set the default number of copies, from 1 to 999.

Value: 1 to 999 copies

Orientation Set the default orientation, [Portrait] or [Landscape].

Value: Portrait, Landscape

Form Feed TimeOut Receiving print data from the computer, the machine may sometimes wait if there is

no information signaling that the last page does not have any more data to be printed.

When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically prints paper. The options

are between 5 and 495 seconds.

Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)

8-24

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

LF Action Set the line feed action when the machine receives the line feed code (character

code 0AH).

Value: LF Only, LF and CR, Ignore LF

CR Action Set the character return action when the machine receives the character return code

(character code 0DH).

Value: CR Only, LF and CR, Ignore CR

Job Name Set whether the job name set in the printer driver is displayed.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When selecting [On], select the job name to be displayed from [Job Name], [Job No.

& Job Name], or [Job Name & Job No.].

User Name Set whether the user name set in the printer driver is displayed.

Value: Off, On

Paper Feed Mode While printing from the computer, select how to feed paper when the paper source

and type are specified.

Value

Auto: Search the paper source that matches the selected paper size and type.

Fixed: Print on paper loaded in the specified paper source.

MP Tray Priority If paper is set in the MP Tray then it is possible for priority to be given to that MP tray

in the paper feed.

Value

Off: The printer driver settings are followed.

Auto Feed: If Auto is selected in the printer driver and there is paper in the MP

tray then the paper feed will be from the MP tray.

Always: If there is paper in the MP tray then the paper feed will be from the MP

tray regardless of what is set in the printer driver.

Auto Cassette Change Select the following actions when the paper runs out in the paper source while

printing.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

• When selecting [Off], the machine displays "Add the following paper in cassette

#." (# is a cassette number) or "Add the following paper in the multipurpose tray.",

and stops printing.

• Load the paper according to the paper source displayed to resume printing.

• To print from the other paper cassette, select [Paper Selection]. Select the

desired paper source.

• When selecting [On], the machine continues printing automatically when the other

cassette contains the same paper as the currently-used cassette.

Wide A4 Turn this to on to increase the maximum number of characters that can be printed in a

line for an A4 page (78 characters at 10 pitch) and Letter size page (80 characters at

10 pitch). This setting is only effective in PCL6 emulation.

Value: Off, On

Item Description

8-25

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Resolution Set the resolution used for printing.

Value: 600 dpi, 1200 dpi

NOTE

Settings that are received from the printer driver have priority over the operation

panel settings.

KIR Select the default KIR (smoothing) setting.

Value: Off, On

Printing Job Terminator You can select the condition which regarded as a job termination if the print job could

not be processed until the end due to your environment and the other reason.

Value

EOJ (End of Job): The command recognized as a termination of the job data is

regarded as one job until it is detected.

End of Network Session: The data included in a network session at network

connection is regarded as one job.

UEL (Universal Exit Language): The UEL included in the termination of the job

data is regarded as one job until it is detected.

Item Description

8-26

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Report

Print reports to check the machine settings, status, and history. Settings for printing reports can also be configured.

Print Report

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Report] > [Print Report]

Item Description

Status Page Prints the status page, allowing you to check the information including current

settings, available memory space, and optional equipment installed.

Font List Prints the font list, allowing you to check the font samples installed in the machine.

Network Status Prints the network status, allowing you to check the information including network

interface firmware version, network address and protocol.

Service Status Prints the service status. More detailed information is available than on the Status

Page. Service personnel usually print the service status pages for maintenance

purpose.

Status Page

Network Status Page

8-27

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Sending Log History

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Report] > [Sending Log History]

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Report] > [Login History Settings]

Optional Network Status Prints the optional network status, allowing you to check the information including

optional network interface firmware version, network address and protocol.

NOTE

This function is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit or Wireless

Network Interface Kit is installed.

Configuration List Prints the list of settings of the system menu. The settings of this machine can be

checked.

Data Sanitization Report Prints the data sanitization report.

Item Description

Auto Sending

This function automatically sends the log history to the specified destinations

whenever a set number of jobs has been logged.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

If [On] is selected, specify the number of job histories. The setting range is 1 to 1,500.

Send Log History You can also send the log history to the specified destinations manually.

Destination Set the destination to which log histories are sent. Only E-mail address can be set.

Job Log Subject Set the subject automatically entered when sending log histories by E-mail.

Value: Up to 60 characters

Personal Information Select whether to include personal information in the job log.

Value: Include, Exclude

Item Description

Value: Off, On

NOTE

If [On] is selected, set the number of histories to be recorded. The setting range is 1

to 1,000.

Auto Sending Select whether the login history is automatically sent to the set address when the

number of entries reaches the number set in "Login History".

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when "Login History" is set to [On].

Item Description

8-28

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Device Log History Settings

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Report] > [Device Log History Settings]

Destination

Set the destination to which login histories are sent. E-mail address only can be set as

destination.

NOTE

This function is displayed when "Login History" is set to [On].

Subject Set the subject automatically entered when sending login histories by E-mail.

Value: Up to 60 characters

NOTE

This function is displayed when "Login History" is set to [On].

Log Reset Resets the recorded login histories.

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login]. For this,

you need to login with administrator privileges. The factory default login user name and login password are set as

shown below.

Item Description

Device Log History Select whether to record the device log history.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

If [On] is selected, set the number of histories to be stored. The setting range is 1 to

1,000.

Auto Sending Select whether the device log history is automatically sent to the set address when

the number of entries reaches the number set in "Device Log History".

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when "Device Log History" is set to [On].

Destination Set the destination to which device log histories are sent. E-mail address only can be

set as destination.

NOTE

This function is displayed when "Device Log History" is set to [On].

Subject Set the subject automatically entered when sending device log histories by E-mail.

Value: Up to 60 characters

NOTE

This function is displayed when "Device Log History" is set to [On].

Item Description

8-29

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Secure Comm. Error Log

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Report] > [Secure Comm. Error Log]

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login]. For this,

you need to login with administrator privileges. The factory default login user name and login password are set as

shown below.

Item Description

Secure Comm. Error Log Select whether to record the secure communication error log history.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

If [On] is selected, set the number of histories to be stored. The setting range is 1 to

1,000.

Auto Sending Select whether the secure communication error log history is automatically sent to the

set address when the number of entries reaches the number set in "Secure Comm.

Error Log".

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when "Secure Communication Error Log History" is set to

[On].

Destination Set the destination to which secure communication error log histories are sent. E-mail

address only can be set as destination.

NOTE

This function is displayed when "Secure Communication Error Log History" is set to

[

Subject Set the subject automatically entered when sending secure communication error log

histories by E-mail.

Value: Up to 60 characters

NOTE

This function is displayed when "Secure Communication Error Log History" is set to

[On].

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login]. For this,

you need to login with administrator privileges. The factory default login user name and login password are set as

shown below.

8-30

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

System/Network

Configures machine system settings.

Network

Configures network settings.

Host Name

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Host Name]

Wi-Fi Direct Settings

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Wi-Fi Direct Settings]

Set Wi-Fi Direct.

Item Description

Host Name Check the host name of the machine. Host name can be changed from Command

Center RX.

Changing Device Information (page 2-54)

NOTE

This function is displayed when the Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-35) is installed.

The Wireless Network Interface Kit is an option for some models. Contact your dealer or our sales or service

representatives for detail.

IB-35 "Wireless Network Interface Kit" (page 11-5)

Item Description

Wi-Fi Direct Select whether to use Wi-Fi Direct.

Value: Off, On

Device Name Specify the device name.

NOTE

• Up to 32 characters can be entered.

• This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi Direct] is set to [On].

IP Address Check the IP address of the machine.

TCP/IP Setting (page 8-35)

NOTE

This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi Direct] is set to [On].

Auto Disconnect Automatically disconnect devices connected through Wi-Fi Direct.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

• If you select [ON], set the waiting time for automatic disconnection.

• This function is displayed when [Wi-Fi Direct] is set to [On].

8-31

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Wi-Fi Settings

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Wi-Fi Settings]

Set Wi-Fi.

Wi-Fi

Setup

NOTE

This function is displayed when the Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-35) is installed.

The Wireless Network Interface Kit is an option for some models. Contact your dealer or our sales or service

representatives for detail.

IB-35 "Wireless Network Interface Kit" (page 11-5)

Item Description

Wi-Fi Select whether to use Wi-Fi.

Value:

Off, On

Item Description

Connection Status Check the wireless LAN status.

Quick Setup If the machine will connect to an access point that supports the automatic wireless

network setup, connection settings can be configured by Quick Setup.

Available Network Displays access points to which the machine can connect.

WEP Key Index Select the key index of the access point.

Value:

0 to 3

Push Button Method If the access point supports the push button method, wireless settings can be

configured using the push button. This setting executes push button, and the

connection is started by pressing the push button on the access point.

NOTE

The push button method supports only the WPS.

PIN Code Method

(Device)

Starts connection using the machine's PIN code. Enter the PIN code into the access

point. The PIN code of the machine is automatically generated.

8-32

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Custom Setup The detailed settings for wireless LAN can be changed.

Network Name (SSID) Set the SSID (Service Set Identifier) of the wireless LAN to which the machine

connects.

NOTE

Up to 32 characters can be entered.

Network

Authentication

Select network authentication type.

Value: Open, WPA2/WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK, WPA2/WPA-EAP, WPA2-EAP

Encryption Select encryption method. The setting values vary depending on the Network

Authentication setting.

Item Description

Network

Authentication

Encryption

Open Disable ―

WEP WEP Key: Up to 26 characters

WEP Key Index: 0 to 3

WPA2/WPA-PSK Data Encryption: AES, Auto

Preshared Key: Up to 64 characters

WPA2-PSK Data Encryption: AES

Preshared Key: Up to 64 characters

WPA2/WPA-EAP Data Encryption: AES, Auto

WPA2-EAP Data Encryption: AES

8-33

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

TCP/IP Setting

Item Description

TCP/IP Select whether to use TCP/IP Protocol.

Value: Off, On

IPv4 Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the network. This setting is available when [TCP/

IP] is set to [On].

IP Address Set the IP address.

Value: ###.###.###.###

NOTE

When DHCP is set to [On], this function will be grayed out and the value cannot be

entered.

Subnet Mask Set the IP subnet mask.

Value: ###.###.###.###

NOTE

When DHCP is set to [On], this function will be grayed out and the value cannot be

entered.

Default Gateway Set the IP gateway address.

Value: ###.###.###.###

NOTE

When DHCP is set to [On], this function will be grayed out and the value cannot be

entered.

DHCP Select whether to use the DHCP (IPv4) server.

Value: Off, On

Auto-IP Select whether to use Auto-IP.

Value: Off, On

IMPORTANT

• When setting the Auto-IP, enter "0.0.0.0" in [IP Address].

• After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

8-34

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Restart Network

Item Description

IPv6 Set up TCP/IP (IPv6) to connect to the network. This setting is available when [TCP/

IP] is [On].

IPv6 Select whether to use IPv6.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Link Local)] after restarting the

network.

RA (Stateless) Select whether to use RA (Stateless).

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].

Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Stateless)] after restarting the

network.

Manual Setting Manually specify the IP address, prefix length, and gateway address of TCP/IP

(IPv6).

Value

IP Address (Manual): 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting

of four-digit hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated

by colon (:).

Prefix Length: 0 to 128

Default Gateway: 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of

four-digit hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated by

colon (:).

NOTE

This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].

To enter "Default Gateway", set [RA (Stateless)] to [Off].

DHCP Select whether to use the DHCP (IPv6) server.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].

Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Stateful)] after restarting the

network.

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

Item Description

Restart Network Restarts the network.

8-35

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Wired Network Settings

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Wired Network Settings]

Configure wired network settings.

TCP/IP Setting

Item Description

TCP/IP Select whether to use TCP/IP Protocol.

Value: Off, On

IPv4 Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the network. This setting is available when [TCP/

IP] is set to [On].

IP Address Set the IP address.

Value: ###.###.###.###

NOTE

When DHCP is set to [On], this function will be grayed out and the value cannot be

entered.

Subnet Mask Set the IP subnet mask.

Value: ###.###.###.###

NOTE

When DHCP is set to [On], this function will be grayed out and the value cannot be

entered.

Default Gateway Set the IP gateway address.

Value: ###.###.###.###

NOTE

When DHCP is set to [On], this function will be grayed out and the value cannot be

entered.

DHCP Select whether to use the DHCP (IPv4) server.

Value: Off, On

Auto-IP Select whether to use Auto-IP.

Value: Off, On

DNS Server Set DNS server (IPv4).

Value: Auto (DHCP), Manual

When [Manual] is selected, you can enter static DNS server information in the

Primary and Secondary fields provided.

IMPORTANT

• When setting the Auto-IP, enter "0.0.0.0" in [IP Address].

• After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

8-36

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Item Description

IPv6 Set up TCP/IP (IPv6) to connect to the network. This setting is available when [TCP/

IP] is [On].

IPv6 Select whether to use IPv6.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Link Local)] after restarting the

network.

RA (Stateless) Select whether to use RA (Stateless).

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].

Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Stateless)] after restarting the

network.

Manual Setting Manually specify the IP address, prefix length, and gateway address of TCP/IP

(IPv6).

Value

IP Address (Manual): 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting

of four-digit hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated

by colon (:).

Prefix Length: 0 to 128

Default Gateway: 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of

four-digit hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated by

colon (:).

NOTE

This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].

To enter "Default Gateway", set [RA (Stateless)] to [Off].

DHCP Select whether to use the DHCP (IPv6) server.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].

Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Stateful)] after restarting the

network.

DNS Server Set DNS server (IPv6).

Value: Auto (DHCP), Manual

When [Manual] is selected, you can enter static DNS server information in the

Primary and Secondary fields provided.

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

8-37

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

LAN Interface

Bonjour

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Bonjour]

IPSec

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [IPSec]

Protocol Settings

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Protocol Settings]

Configure protocol settings.

Item Description

LAN Interface Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used.

Value:

Auto, 10BASE-T Half, 10BASE-T Full, 100BASE-TX Half, 100BASE-TX Full,

1000BASE-T

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

Item Description

Bonjour Select whether to use Bonjour.

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi

Wired Network

Item Description

IPSec Select whether to use IPSec.

Value: Off, On

Item Description

SMTP (E-mail TX) Select whether to send E-mail using SMTP.

Value: Off, On

POP3 (E-mail RX) Select whether to receive E-mail using POP3.

Value: Off, On

8-38

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

ThinPrint Select whether to use ThinPrint. To use the Thin Print protocol, set the protocol to

[On]. The default port number is 4000.*1, *2

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed only when the ThinPrint Option is activated.

Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi

Wired Network

Thin Print over SSL To use the Thin Print over SSL protocol, set [Thin Print Over SSL] and [SSL] to [On].

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. The default certificate is the

self-certificate of the machine.

Command Center RX User Guide

FTP Server (Reception) Select whether to receive documents using FTP.*2

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi

Wired Network

LPD Selects whether to receive documents using LPD.*2

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi

Wired Network

NetBEUI Selects whether to receive documents using NetBEUI.*2

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi

Wired Network

Raw Select whether to receive documents using Raw Port.*2

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi

Wired Network

Item Description

8-39

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

WSD Print Set whether to use our proprietary web services.*2

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi

Wired Network

SNMPv1/v2 Select whether to communicate using SNMP.*2

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi

Wired Network

SNMPv3 Select whether to communicate using SNMPv3.*2

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi

Wired Network

Enhanced WSD Set whether to use our proprietary web services.*2

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi

Wired Network

Enhanced WSD over SSL Set whether to use our proprietary web services over SSL.*1, *2

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi

Wired Network

IPP Selects whether to receive documents using IPP. To use the IPP protocol, set [IPP] to

[On], and set [SSL] to [Off]. In addition, select [Not Secure (IPP&IPPS)] on IPP

Security under Security Settings from the Command Center RX. The default port

number is 631.*2

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi

Wired Network

Item Description

8-40

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

IPP over SSL To use the IPP protocol, set [IPP] and [SSL] to [On]. The default port number is

443.*1, *2

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. the default certificate is the

self-certificate of the machine.

Command Center RX User Guide

Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi

Wired Network

HTTP Select whether to communicate using HTTP.*2

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi

Wired Network

HTTPS Select whether to communicate using HTTPS.*1, *2

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi

Wired Network

LDAP Select whether to use LDAP.

Value: Off, On

VNC (RFB) This is set when starting up a VNC Viewer (E.g. RealVNC) to use the Remote

Operation.*1

The default port number is 9062.

Value: Off, On

Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi

Wired Network

VNC (RFB) over SSL This is set when starting up a VNC Viewer (E.g. RealVNC) to use Remote Operation

protected by SSL.*1, *2

The default port number is 9063.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. The default certificate is the

self-certificate of the machine.

Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi

Wired Network

Item Description

8-41

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Security Settings

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Security Settings]

Proxy

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Proxy]

Enhanced VNC over SSL This is set when starting up Embedded Web Server RX to use Remote Operation

protected by SSL.*1, *2

The default port number is 9061.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

• The default setting is [On].

• When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. The default certificate is

the self-certificate of the machine.

Wi-Fi Direct Set whether to enable this function for each network.

Value: Disable, Enable

Wi-Fi

Wired Network

*1 Set "SSL" to [On] in Security Settings.

Security Settings (page 8-41)

*2 The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network.

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

Item Description

SSL Select whether to use SSL for communication.

Value: Off, On

Item Description

Proxy Set the proxy for connection to the Internet from an application.

Value: Off, On

Use the Same Proxy

Server for All

Protocols

Set whether the same proxy server is used for all protocols. To use the same proxy

server, select the [Use the Same Proxy Server for All Protocols] checkbox.

Proxy Server (HTTP) Set a proxy server (HTTP).

Value: (Enter the proxy address and port number.)

Proxy Server (HTTPS) Set a proxy server (HTTPS). This setup is available when "Use the Same Proxy

Server for All Protocols" is [Off].

Value: (Enter the proxy address and port number.)

Do Not Use Proxy for

Following Domains

Set domains for which no proxy is used.

Value: (Enter the domain name.)

Item Description

8-42

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Ping

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Ping]

Restart Network

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Restart Network]

Optional Network

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Optional Network]

Basic

Configure settings for the optional Network Interface Kit.

Item Description

Ping Checks if communication with the destination by entering the host name or IP

address of the destination is possible.

NOTE

If [Primary Network (Client)] is set to [Others], this item is not displayed.

Item Description

Restart Network Restarts the network.

NOTE

This menu is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit or Wireless Network Interface Kit is installed.

Item Description

Host Name Check the host name of the machine. Host name can be changed from Command

Center RX.

Changing Device Information (page 2-54)

TCP/IP Setting For details on setting value.

TCP/IP Setting (page 8-35)

Bonjour (page 8-37)

IPSec (page 8-37)

NetWare Use NetWare to receive documents.

See the Operation Guide for the optional network interface card for details.

Value: Off, On

AppleTalk Selects whether to receive documents using AppleTalk.*1

Value: Off, On

LAN Interface Select the LAN Interface type.*1

Value: Auto, 10Base-Half, 10Base-Full, 100Base-Half, 100Base-Full,

1000BASE-T

NOTE

This function is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit is installed.

8-43

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Wireless Network

Configure settings for the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit.

MAC Address Filter Select whether to use MAC Address Filter.

Operation Guide for the optional Network Interface Kit

Value: Off, On

Restart Network Restarts the network card of the device.

*1 The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network.

NOTE

This function is displayed when the Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-51) is installed.

Item Description

Connection Status You can check the wireless LAN status.

Quick Setup

If the machine will connect to an access point that supports the automatic wireless

network setup, connection settings can be configured by Quick Setup.

Available Network Select access points to which the machine can be connected, enter the Preshared

Key and start a connection.

Push Button Method If the access point supports the push button method, wireless settings can be

configured using the push button. This setting executes push button, and the

connection is started by pressing the push button on the access point.

NOTE

The push button method supports only the WPS.

PIN Code Method

(Device)

Starts connection using the machine's PIN code. Enter the PIN code into the access

point. The PIN code of the machine is automatically generated.

PIN Code Method

(Terminal)

Starts connection using the PIN code of the access point. Enter the PIN code of the

access point.

Item Description

8-44

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Custom Setup The detailed settings for wireless LAN can be changed.

Network Name (SSID) Set the SSID (Service Set Identifier) of the wireless LAN to which the machine

connects.

NOTE

Up to 32 characters can be entered.

Connection Mode Set the connection mode.

Value: Ad Hoc, Infrastructure

NOTE

Ad Hoc: Directly communicates with the device without going through an access

point. This method cannot be used to connect to two or more devices.

Infrastructure: Performs communication through an access point.

Channel Set channel. Use [-] / [+] or the numeric keys to enter a number.

Value: 1 to 11

Network

Authentication

Select network authentication type. To select other options, open the device home

page from a computer.

Value: Open, Shared, WPA-PSK*1, WPA2-PSK*1

Encryption Select encryption method. If the option other than [Disable] is selected, enter the

WEP key or the Preshared key. The setting values vary depending on the Network

Authentication setting. Select [Data Encryption].

When Network Authentication is set to [Open] or [Shared]:

Value: Disable, WEP

When Network Authentication is set to [WPA-PSK] or [WPA2-PSK]:

Value: TKIP*2, AES, Auto*2, Preshared Key

NOTE

• If [WEP] is selected, enter the WEP key. Up to 26 characters can be entered.

• If [TKIP], [AES] or [Auto] is selected, enter the Preshared key. Enter the value in 8

to 64 characters.

*1 Not displayed if you selected [Ad Hoc] for "Connection Mode".

*2 Not displayed if you selected [WPA2-PSK] for "Network Authentication".

Item Description

8-45

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Primary Network (Client)

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Primary Network (Client)]

Security Level

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Security Level]

NOTE

This function is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit (IB-50) or Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-51 or

IB-35) is installed.

The Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-35) is an option for some models. Contact your dealer or our sales or service

representatives for detail.

IB-35 "Wireless Network Interface Kit" (page 11-5)

Item Description

Primary Network (Client) Select the network interface to be used for the connection when this machine

functions as a client.

Value: Wi-Fi, Wired Network, Optional Network

NOTE

•[Wi-Fi] is displayed when the Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-35) is installed.

•[Optional Network] is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit (IB-50)

or Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-51) is installed.

Item Description

Security Level Specify the security level.

Value

Low: This mode is used during maintenance. Do not use normally.

High: This is the security setting we recommend. Use this setting

normally.

Very High: In addition to [High] setting, this setting disables the machine

settings to be changed from external command.

NOTE

This function is available when you have logged in as machine administrator.

Changing User Properties (page 9-4)

8-46

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Interface Block Setting

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Interface Block Setting]

This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB hosts or optional

interfaces.

Item Description

USB Host This locks and protects the USB port (USB host).

Value: Unblock, Block

USB Device This locks and protects the USB interface connector (USB Device).

Value: Unblock, Block

USB Storage This locks and protects the USB memory slot.

Value: Unblock, Block

NOTE

This function is available when USB Host is set to [Unblock].

Optional Interface 1 This locks and protects the optional interface slots.

Value: Unblock, Block

NOTE

You can set this feature for each slot.

Optional Interface 2

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

8-47

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Data Security

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Data Security]

Configure settings for data stored in the SSD, hard disk, and machine's memory.

Item Description

Hard Disk/SSD Initialization Change security functions.

NOTE

• This function is displayed when the optional Data Security Kit is activated.

• Enter the security password to change security functions.

Data Overwrite

Method

The method used to overwrite data can be changed.

Refer to the following for details.

Data Security Kit (E) Operation Guide

Value

1-time Overwrite Method: This function overwrites unneeded data areas (in the

case of overwriting) or all areas (in the case of system initialization) with zeroes

to prevent data restoration.

3-time Overwrite (DoD): This overwrite method complies with U.S. Department

of Defense (DoD) standards, and overwrites unneeded data areas of the hard

disk (in the case of overwriting) or all areas (in the case of system initialization)

with specific characters, their complements, and random characters to prevent

data restoration. Data restoration is not possible even when sophisticated

restoration techniques are used, and a higher level of security than Once

Overwrite is obtained.

NOTE

This method may take more time than Once Overwrite method to process a larger

amount of data.

Security Password Customize the security password so that only the administrator can use the security

kit.

Enter a new security password 6 to 16 numeric characters and symbols.

Enter the password again for confirmation.

IMPORTANT

Avoid any easy-to-guess numbers for the security password (e.g. 11111111 or

12345678).

System Initialization Overwrite all the data stored in the hard disk/SSD when disposing of the machine.

IMPORTANT

If you accidentally turn the power switch off during initialization, the hard disk/

SSD might possibly crash or initialization might fail.

NOTE

If you accidentally turn the power switch off during initialization, turn the power switch

on again. Initialization automatically restarts.

8-48

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Information erased

Optional Function

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Optional Function]

Bluetooth Settings

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Bluetooth Settings]

Data Sanitization Return the following information registered in the machine to the factory defaults.

• System settings

• Data saved in Custom Box

• Optional applications

NOTE

• Print the status page and then confirm that security data is deleted.

Status Page (page 8-26)

• Once in progress, the processing cannot canceled.

• Before executing this function, disconnect network, and other cables.

• Do not turn off the main power switch while sanitizing the data. If the main power is

turned off during data erasing, erasing will be executed automatically when the

power is restored, however, complete erasure cannot be guaranteed.

Software Verification Verify the installed software.

Select [Start] to start verification.

If an error occurs during software verification, contact your dealer or service

representative.

Category Data erased

Devices/jobs • Job settings configured by users

• Network settings

• Image data saved in Document Box, etc.

• Job histories

• User information (Document Box registered by the user, etc.)

• Account information of job accounting

• Network certificates

• Initial screen on machine changed by service representative

Application/program • Application/program added by a user or service representative

• Trial functions

Item Description

Optional Function You can use the optional applications installed on this machine.

Optional Applications (page 11-7)

Item Description

Bluetooth Keyboard Use Bluetooth keyboard.

Value: Off, On

Search Device Select a keyboard.

Item Description

8-49

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Restart Entire Device

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Restart Entire Device]

Remote Services Settings

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Remote Services Settings]

When the trouble occurs on this product, it is possible to explain the operational procedure and the troubleshooting

method through the internet from our sales office by accessing the operation panel screen of this product while

operating the screen.

NFC

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [NFC]

Remote Operation

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Remote Operation]

User Login/Job Accounting

[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

Configure settings related to machine management.

Overview of User Login Administration (page 9-2)

Overview of Job Accounting (page 9-20)

Unknown ID Job (page 9-35)

Item Description

Restart Entire Device Restart the CPU without turning the main power switch off. Use this to deal with any

unstable operation by the machine. (Same as the computer restart.)

NOTE

When using the remote service settings, it is necessary to make a contract with our company.

Please contact our sales office or our authorized dealer (purchase source) for the details.

Item Description

NFC Use NFC (Near Field Communication).

Value: Off, On

Item Description

Remote Operation Configure settings for remote operation.

Value: Off, On

If [On] is selected, set the Use Restrictions.

[Off]: Users without administrator privileges can also execute remote operation.

[Use Password]: Enter the password, then re-enter it to confirm.

[Administrator Only]: Only administrator can execute remote operation.

NOTE

When selecting [Administrator Only], the remote operation using VNC software is

unavailable.

8-50

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

User Property

[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Property]

Allows you to view information about logged in users and edit some of that information.

Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)

Date/Timer/Energy Saver

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Date/Timer/Energy Saver]

Configures settings related to the date and time.

Item Description

Date/Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine.

Value: Year (2000 to 2037), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31), Hour (00 to 23), Minute

(00 to 59), Second (00 to 59)

NOTE

If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will no

longer be able to use the application.

Date Format Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in Western

notation.

Value: MM/DD/YYYY, DD/MM/YYYY, YYYY/MM/DD

Time Zone Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest listed location from the list. If

you select a region that utilizes summer time, configure settings for summer time.

Setting Date and Time (page 2-24)

Auto Panel Reset If no jobs are run for a certain period of time, automatically reset settings and return to

the default setting. Select to use Auto Panel Reset or not.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

For setting the time until the panel is automatically reset, refer to the following:

Panel Reset Timer (page 8-50)

Auto Error Clear If an error occurs during processing, processing stops to wait for the next step to be

taken by the user. In the Auto Error Clear mode, automatically clear the error after a

set amount of time elapses.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

For setting the automatic error recovery time, refer to the following:

Error Clear Timer (page 8-51)

Low Power Timer

Set amount of time before entering the Low Power mode.

Value: 1 to 120 minutes (1 minute increments)

Low Power Mode (page 2-34)

Panel Reset Timer

If you select [

] for Auto Panel Reset, set the amount of time to wait before Auto Panel

Reset.

Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)

NOTE

This function is displayed when [Auto Panel Reset] is set to [On].

8-51

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Sleep Timer Set amount of time before entering Sleep.

Value: 1 to 120 minutes (1 minute increments)

Ping Timeout Set the time until timeout occurs when [Ping] is executed in "System/Network".

Value: 1 to 30 seconds (in 1 second increments)

Error Job Skip

Set whether a job for which a "Add paper in cassette #" or "Add paper in Multipurpose

tray" error occurred when the job was started is automatically skipped after a set period

of time elapses.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

• When a job is skipped, it is moved to the end of the job queue.

• If [On] is selected, set the time until the job is skipped. The setting range is 5 to 90

(5 second increments).

Error Clear Timer If you select [On] for Auto Error Clear, set the amount of time to wait before

automatically clearing errors.

Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)

NOTE

This function is displayed when [Auto Error Clear] is set to [On].

Sleep Rules (models for

Europe)

Select whether to use the Sleep mode for the following functions individually:

•Network

• USB Cable

• ID Card Reader*1

• Application

Value: Off, On

NOTE

• If the sleep condition is not turned off, the machine will not wake from sleep mode

even if it receives a print job from a computer connected by USB cable. Also, the

ID card cannot be recognized.

• This function will not be displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit or Fiery

controller is installed.

Item Description

8-52

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Sleep Level (models except

for Europe)

Select the sleep level.

Set the Energy Saver mode to reduce power consumption even more than normal

Sleep mode.

Value: Quick Recovery, Energy Saver

NOTE

This function will not be displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit or Fiery

controller is installed.

Sleep Rules Select whether to use the Energy Saver mode for the following functions individually:

•Network

• USB Cable

• ID Card Reader*1

• Application

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When the machine has entered sleep mode with Energy Saver setting, it does not

wake from sleep mode when it receives print data from a PC connected by USB

cable. Also, the ID card cannot be recognized.

EnergySaver

RecoveryLevel

Select the method of recovery from energy saver.

Value:

Full Recovery: This mode enables the use of all functions immediately.

However, this mode saves less energy.

Normal Recovery: In this mode, you can select the method from the following:

enabling the use of all functions immediately or enabling

the use of desired functions only.

If you want to use all functions immediately, select the

[Energy Saver] key to execute recovery.

Power Saving Recovery: This mode enables the use of desired functions only.

This mode saves energy most effectively.

Weekly Timer Settings Configure settings for switching the machine into Sleep mode and waking it

automatically at a specified time for each day of the week.

Weekly Timer Select whether to use Weekly Timer.

Value: Off, On

Schedule Specify the time for each day of the week at which the machine enters Sleep mode

and recovers.

Retry Times Set the number of retry to switch the machine into Sleep mode.

Value: Limited Retries, Unlimited Retries

NOTE

If [Limited Retries] is selected, set the number of retry. The setting range is 0 to 10.

Retry is not performed when "0" is set.

If [Unlimited Retries] is selected, retry is performed until the machine enters Sleep

mode.

Retry Interval Set the retry interval.

Use [-] / [+] to enter a number.

Value: 10 to 60 seconds (increments of 10 seconds)

Item Description

8-53

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Adjustment/Maintenance

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance]

Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance.

Power Off Rule (models for

Europe)

Select whether or not the machine enters Power Off mode for the following function.

Select [On] to set the Power Off mode.

•Network

• USB Cable

• USB Host

•NIC

• Remote Diagnostics

• Application

Value: Off, On

NOTE

Even when any of the functions is set to [On], if [NIC] is set to [Off], the machine does

not enter Power Off Mode.

Even when [Network] or [USB Cable] is set to [Off], if the machine does not

communicate with the other devices, the machine will enter Power Off Mode.

Power Off Timer (models

for Europe)

Select whether to turn off the power automatically after a period of inactivity.

Value: 1 hour, 2 hours, 3 hours, 4 hours, 5 hours, 6 hours, 9 hours, 12 hours,

1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 4 days, 5 days, 6 days, 1 week

*1 Displayed when the optional Card Authentication Kit is activated.

*2 Displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit or Wireless Network Interface Kit is installed.

Item Description

Drum Refresh Remove image blur and white dots from the printout. It takes about 1 to 2 minutes.

The time required may vary depending on the operating environment.

Drum Refresh (page 10-34)

NOTE

Drum Refresh cannot be performed while printing. Execute Drum Refresh after the

printing is done.

Auto Drum Refresh Select the time length of the drum refresh.

Value

Off: The Auto Drum Refresh will not be performed.

Short: Perform Auto Drum Refresh as Short.

Standard: Perform Auto Drum Refresh as Standard.

Long: Perform Auto Drum Refresh as Long.

Drum Heater Set the drum heater.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This setting does not appear in some regions.

Laser Scanner Cleaning Remove vertical white lines from the printout.

Laser Scanner Cleaning (page 10-34)

Item Description

8-54

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Developer Refresh Adjust the printed image that is too light or incomplete, even though there is enough

toner.

Developer Refresh (page 10-35)

NOTE

Waiting time may be longer when the toner is refilled during developer refresh.

Open toner cover Open the toner cover.

NOTE

This function is displayed when using a genuine toner container.

System Initialization Initialize the hard disk/SSD installed on the machine to return it to the factory defaults.

NOTE

This function will not be displayed when the optional Data Security Kit is activated.

Display Brightness Set the brightness of the touch panel.

Value: 1 (Darker), 2, 3, 4, 5 (Lighter)

Silent Mode Set the Silent Mode. Select this mode when the running noise is uncomfortable.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When [On] is selected, it may take time for the next print job to start.

Memory Diagnostics Perform this function to check the machine memory.

Calibration Calibrate the device to ensure consistency with the original tone.

Calibration (page 10-34)

Calibration Cycle Set the calibration cycle.

Value:

Short: Priority is given to image quality.

Standard: Balances image quality and print speed.

Long: Priority is given to print speed.

Item Description

8-55

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Internet

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Internet]

Configure settings related to the internet.

Application

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Application]

Configure settings for Application.

Application (page 5-9)

Item Description

Internet Browser Select whether to use the Internet browser.

Value: Off, On

Browser Environment This specifies Internet browser preferences such as your home page setting and how

pages are displayed.

Value:

Home page: (Enter the address for Home page.)

Text Size: Large, Medium, Small

Display Mode: Normal, Just-Fit Rendering, Smart-Fit Rendering

Cookie: Accept All, Reject All, Prompt before Accepting

NOTE

This function is displayed when [Internet Browser] is set to [On].

Internet Browser (page 8-55)

NOTE

To use proxy from Internet Browser, refer to the following:

Proxy (page 8-41)

9-1

9 User Authentication

and Accounting

(User Login,

Job Accounting)

This chapter explains the following topics:

Overview of User Login Administration .............................................................................................................. 9-2

Managing the Users from PC .................................................................................................................. 9-2

Enabling User Login Administration ................................................................................................................... 9-3

Setting User Login Administration ...................................................................................................................... 9-4

Changing User Properties ....................................................................................................................... 9-4

User Login Administration for Printing ..................................................................................................... 9-7

Group Authorization Settings ................................................................................................................... 9-9

Guest Authorization Set. ......................................................................................................................... 9-11

Obtain NW User Property ...................................................................................................................... 9-13

Simple Login Settings ............................................................................................................................ 9-15

ID Card Settings .................................................................................................................................... 9-17

PIN Code Authorization ......................................................................................................................... 9-18

Using User Login Administration ...................................................................................................................... 9-19

Login/Logout .......................................................................................................................................... 9-19

Overview of Job Accounting ............................................................................................................................. 9-20

Enabling Job Accounting .................................................................................................................................. 9-21

Job Accounting Access .......................................................................................................................... 9-21

Job Accounting (Local) ..................................................................................................................................... 9-22

Adding an Account ................................................................................................................................. 9-22

Restricting the Use of the Machine ........................................................................................................ 9-23

Editing an Account ................................................................................................................................. 9-23

Deleting an Account ............................................................................................................................... 9-25

Job Accounting for Printing .................................................................................................................... 9-26

Configuring Job Accounting ............................................................................................................................. 9-28

Default Setting ....................................................................................................................................... 9-28

Counting the Number of Pages Printed ................................................................................................. 9-30

Print Accounting Report ......................................................................................................................... 9-32

Using Job Accounting ...................................................................................................................................... 9-33

Login/Logout .......................................................................................................................................... 9-33

Apply Limit ....................................................................................................................................................... 9-34

Unknown ID Job ............................................................................................................................................... 9-35

Unknown ID Job .................................................................................................................................... 9-35

Registering Information for a User whose ID is Unknown ..................................................................... 9-36

9-2

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Overview of User Login Administration

Overview of User Login Administration

User login administration specifies how the user access is administered on this machine. Enter a correct login user

name and password for user authentication to login.

Access are in three levels - "User", "Administrator", and "Machine Administrator". The security levels can be modified

only by the "Machine Administrator".

The authentication for this machine uses a network authentication server. The registration of users is done on the server.

Managing the Users from PC

In addition to the above settings, the following are necessary to manage the users from PC.

To Manage the Users to Print from PCs

Printer driver settings are necessary to manage the users that print on the machine from PCs.

UserA

1Enable User Login

Administration (page 9-3)2Logout

(page 9-19)3Enter the login user name and password

and execute the job (page 9-19)

User A

User B

User C

1Set the User Login

Administration on the printer

driver (page 9-7)

2Print

9-3

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enabling User Login Administration

Enabling User Login Administration

This switches the User Login Administration On/Off and sets the authentication network server.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2"User Login Setting" [Next] > "User Login" [Change]

2Configure the settings.

1Select [Network Authentication].

Select [Off] to disable user login administration.

If you select [Network Authentication], enter the host name (64 characters or less) and

domain name (256 characters or less) for the Authentication Server. Select [NTLM],

[Kerberos] or [Ext.] as the server type.

When selecting [Ext.] as the server type, enter the port number.

2Select [OK].

"Do you want to add a new function to the home screen?" appears when [OK] is selected.

To add a new function, select [Yes]. The selection screen for functions displayed in the

home screen will appear.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

Selecting "Domain" [Add/Edit] displays the domain registration list. In the domain

registration list screen, select [Add/Edit], and enter the domain name. Up to 10 domain

names can be registered.

Available Functions to Display on Desktop (page 2-14)

NOTE

If the login user name and password are rejected, check the following settings.

• Network Authentication setting of the machine

• User property of the Authentication Server

• Date and time setting of the machine and the Authentication Server

If you cannot login because of the setting of the machine, login with any administrator

registered in the local user list and correct the settings.

9-4

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Setting User Login Administration

This alters users and configures the settings for User Login Administration.

Changing User Properties

User information registered in the machine can be viewed and changed.

For a user with administrator rights who logs in

User properties can be changed.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2"User Login Setting" [Next] > "Local User List" [Edit]

3Select the user whose properties you wish to change > [Detail]

NOTE

• By default, one of each default user with machine administrator rights and administrator privileges is already stored.

Each user's properties are:

Machine Administrator

User Name: DeviceAdmin

Access Level: Machine Administrator

Administrator

User Name: Admin

Access Level: Administrator

* Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).

• It is recommended to periodically change the user name, login user name and login password regularly for your

security.

• To change the user information of the machine administrator, you must log in with machine administrator authority.

You can only view user information if you log in as a regular user.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

9-5

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

2Change the user properties.

1Enter the user information > [OK]

2[Save] > [Yes]

The user information is changed.

Changing the user information of logged in user (User Property)

These users can partially change their own user properties including user name, login password, E-mail address,

Simple Login, and My Panel.

Although "Login User Name", "Access Level", or "Account Name" cannot be changed, the users can check the present

status.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Property]

2Change the user properties.

1Enter the user information > [OK]

Item Descriptions

User Name Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).

same login user name cannot be registered.

same password for confirmation and select the [OK] key.

Access Level Select "Administrator" or "User" for user access privileges.

Account Name Add an account where the user belongs. The user, who

registered his/her account name, can login without entering the

account ID.

Overview of Job Accounting (page 9-20)

NOTE

• Select [Name] or [ID] from the "Sort" to sort the account list.

• Select [Search(Name)] or [Search(ID)] to search by

account name or account ID.

E-mail Address The user can register his/her E-mail address. The registered

address will be automatically selected for subsequent

operations that need any E-mail function.

My Panel You can register the language selection, initial screen, and

shortcut settings for each user. Settings registered here can be

applied simply by logging in.

Item Description

User Name Changes the name shown on the user list. Up to 32 characters

can be entered.

characters can be entered.

9-6

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

2Select [Save].

The user information is changed.

Access Level Displays the user's access level.

My Panel Register the language and default screen for each user. Once

registered, the setting will be applied simply by login. Network

users are not displayed.

E-mail Address Changes the user's e-mail address. Up to 128 characters can

be entered.

NOTE

This function appears when Group Authorization is set to [On],

and Guest Authorization Setting is set to [On].

Authorization Rules Displays the usage restriction that is set for the logged in user.

NOTE

This function appears when Group Authorization is set to [On],

or Guest Authorization Setting is set to [On].

[Job Accounting Rules] shows the account name set for the

logged in user and the usage restrictions that are set for that

account.

This function appears when job accounting is set to [On]. For

information on job accounting, refer to the following:

Job Accounting Access (page 9-21)

Simple Login When simple login is enabled, changes associated settings.

NOTE

This function does not appear when Simple Login is set to [Off]

or the user is not registered in Simple Login.

ID Card Information Displays the ID card information of the logged in user.

NOTE

This function is displayed when the optional ID Card

Authentication Kit is activated.

Optional Applications (page 11-7)

This function does not appear when the server type is set to

[Ext.] in Network Authentication, and logged in with the user

account certificated in the server specified as the [Ext.] server

type.

Item Description

9-7

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

User Login Administration for Printing

It is possible to manage the users that print on this machine from a PC.

Setting Printer Driver

To manage the users that print on this machine from a PC, the following settings are necessary in the printer driver.

Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.

1Display the screen.

1Select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel], and then [View

devices and printers].

2Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of

the printer driver.

3Click [Administrator] on the [Device Settings] tab.

2Configure the settings.

1Select [User Login] on the [User Login] tab.

NOTE

In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows, and then click [View devices and

printers].

9-8

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

2Set the User Login Administration.

[Use specific name]: This option can be used to specify a user name and password to use

the same User login for every print job. If this option is selected, the user does not have to

type the name and password for each print job.

[Prompt for name]: A screen for entering the user name and password will be displayed

when attempting a printing. The user name and password must be entered each time a

printing is attempted.

[Prompt for name and validate]: A screen for entering the user name and password will

be displayed when attempting a printing. The user name and password stored in the Login

user name list needs to be entered. The user name and password must be entered each

time a printing is attempted.

[Validate user name (computer) or prompt for login user name]: When printing, the

Windows user name is searched in the "Login user names" and printing is possible if the

name is registered. If the name is not registered, the printing will be canceled for users with

only user authority. If the user has administrator privileges, the screen to enter the user

name and password will appear.

3Click [OK].

NOTE

For other settings of job accounting, refer to the following:

Printer Driver User Guide

9-9

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Group Authorization Settings

Set restrictions of the machine usage by each individual group registered in the authentication server.

Group Authorization

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2"User Login Setting" [Next] > "Group Authorization Set." [Next] >

"Group Authorization" [Change]

2[On] > [OK]

Group List (Up to 20)

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2"User Login Setting" [Next] > "Group Authorization Set." [Next] > "Group List" [Next]

NOTE

To use the group authorization settings, User Login Administration must be enabled in "Enabling User Login

Administration". Select "On" for "LDAP" in "Protocol Detail".

Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)

Protocol Settings (page 8-37)

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

9-10

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

2Configure the settings.

[Add] > Add information on each item > [OK]

3Register the group.

Select [Save].

A new group is added on the group list.

Item Descriptions

Group ID*1

*1 For "Group ID", specify PrimaryGroupID assigned by Active Directory of Windows. If you

are using Windows Server 2008, check Attribute Editor tab of user properties.

Enter the ID displayed on the group list (between 1 and

4294967295).

Group Name Enter the name displayed on the group list (up to 32 characters).

Access Level Select [Administrator] or [User] for group access privileges.

Print Restriction Select whether or not to reject usage of print functions for the

printer.

Applicable print functions are as follows:

• Print from Box

• Print from Removable Memory

• Print from PC

Duplex Restriction Select whether only duplex printing is allowed.

Combine Restrict. Specify whether only Combine is allowed.

EcoPrint Restriction Specify whether only EcoPrint is allowed.

Storing Restr. in Box Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the document

boxes.

NOTE

For details on entering characters, refer to the following:

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

9-11

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Guest Authorization Set.

When User Login Administration is enabled, set the functions that guest users who cannot log in to the machine are

allowed to use.

Enabling Guest Authorization

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2"User Login Setting" [Next] > "Guest Authorization Set." [Next] >

"Guest Authorization" [Change]

2[On] > [OK]

Configuring Guest Property

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2"User Login Setting" [Next] > "Guest Authorization Set." [Next] > "Guest Property" [Next]

NOTE

• To use Guest Authorization Set., User Login Administration must be enabled in "Enabling User Login

Administration".

Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)

• Cannot be used when the Key Counter option is used.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

If the guest authorization setting is enabled, the [Authentication/Logout] key must be

selected when logging in.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

9-12

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

2Configure the settings.

Check the settings and change or add information as needed.

3Register the group.

Select [Save].

Item Descriptions

User Name Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).

The default setting is "Guest User".

Access Level The authority of the user appears. This cannot be changed.

Account Name Add an account where the user belongs.

If the user does not belong to any account, select [Others].

Authorization

Rules

Set usage authority for each user.

The items you can restrict the access level with are as follows.

Print Restriction:

Select whether or not use of the print function of the printer is

prohibited.

Applicable print functions are as follows:

• Print from Box

• Print from Removable Memory

Duplex Restriction:

Select whether only duplex printing is allowed.

Combine Restrict.:

Specify whether only Combine is allowed.

EcoPrint Restriction:

Specify whether only EcoPrint is allowed.

9-13

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Obtain NW User Property

Set the required information to obtain the network user property from the LDAP server. The user name and E-mail

address obtained with this setting is shown in the user information, the status confirmation screen, and the header of

E-mail.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2[User Login Setting] > [Obtain NW User Property] > [On]

2Configure the settings.

[On] > Add information on each item > [OK]

NOTE

To obtain the network user property from the LDAP server, User Login Administration must be enabled in "Enabling

User Login Administration".

Select "On" for "LDAP" in "Protocol Detail".

Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)

Protocol Settings (page 8-37)

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Item Descriptions

Server Name*1 Enter the LDAP server name or the IP address (up to 64

characters). If a server name is not entered, user

information will be acquired from the server set for Network

Authentication.

Port Port number for LDAP server. The default port number is

389.

Name 1*2 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be

displayed from the LDAP server (up to 32 characters).

Name 2*3 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be

displayed from the LDAP server (up to 32 characters).

E-mail Address*4 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the E-mail address from

the LDAP server (up to 32 characters).

Authentic at Type*5 Set the authentication method. Select [Simple] or [SASL].

After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the

power off and then on.

9-14

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Search Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds

(from 5 to 255 seconds).

LDAP Security Select the type of encryption according to the type of

security employed by the LDAP server. The value is [Off],

[SSL/TLS] or [STARTTLS].

*1 If using Active Directory of Windows, the server name may be the same as the server

name entered in the network authentication.

*2 If using Active Directory of Windows, displayName of Attribute may be used as "Name 1".

*3 "Name 2" can be left out. When you assign displayName in "Name 1" and department in

"Name 2", and if the value of displayName is "Mike Smith" and the value of department is

"Sales" in Active Directory of Windows, the user name appears as "Mike Smith Sales".

*4 If using Active Directory of Windows, mail of Attribute may be used as E-mail Address.

*5 Appears when the server type is set to "Kerberos" in "Network Authentication".

Item Descriptions

9-15

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Simple Login Settings

The simple login function allows users to log in simply by selecting a user name. Users must be registered in advance to

use this functionality.

Enabling Simple Login

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2"User Login Setting" [Next] > "Simple Login Settings" [Next] > "Simple Login" [Change]

2[On] or [Off] > [OK]

Simple Login Key

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2"User Login Setting" [Next] > "Simple Login Settings" [Next] > "Simple Login Key" [Next]

2Enter the user information.

1Select the key to which you want to register a user.

2Select [Add/Edit].

NOTE

• The authentication for this machine uses a network authentication server. The registration of users is done on the

server.

• To use Simple Login, User Login Administration must be enabled in "Enabling User Login Administration".

Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)

• When the guest authorization setting is enabled, the Simple Login screen is not displayed.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

9-16

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

3"Display Name" [Change] > Enter the user name to be displayed > [OK]

4Select "User" [Change].

5To specify the user from local users, select [Local User]. To specify from network users,

select [Network User].

The procedure differs depending on the transmission method selected.

Specifying the user from local users

Select the user to be set for simple login.

Specifying the user from network users

Select [Login User Name] and [Login Password], enter the information of the user to be

registered, and select [OK].

If you are specifying a user for whom a domain is set in network authentication, select the

"Domain" and select the domain where the user is registered.

6"Password Login" [Change] > [On] or [Off] > [OK] > "Icon" [Change]

7Select the user icon to be displayed and select [OK].

3Register the user.

Select [Save].

NOTE

For details on entering characters, refer to the following:

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

NOTE

For details on entering characters, refer to the following:

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

Domain:

# Keys

Simple Login Key: s - User

Enter login user name and password.

Cancel Back

User Name

Password

# Keys

Domain 1

**********

0099

m0310502_01

9-17

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

ID Card Settings

If ID card authentication is enabled, select the authentication type.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2"User Login Setting" [Next] > "ID Card Settings" [Next]

2Configure the settings.

The following settings can be selected.

NOTE

This functions appears when the Card Authentication Kit is activated.

Optional Applications (page 11-7)

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Item Descriptions

Keyboard Login When ID card authentication is enabled, select whether or not

Value: Permit, Prohibit

Additional

Authentication*1

*1 This function does not appear when the server type is set to [NTLM] or [Kerberos] in

"Network Authentication".

Select whether or not to require password entry after

authenticating by ID card.

Value: Off, Use Password, Use PIN

9-18

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

PIN Code Authorization

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2"User Login Setting" [Next] > "PIN Code Authorization" [Change]

2[Off] or [On] > [OK]

NOTE

When using PIN Code Authorization, the network authentication must be enabled and [Ext.] must be selected for

server type.

Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

9-19

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Using User Login Administration

Using User Login Administration

This section explains procedures while setting job accounting.

If user login administration is enabled, the login user name and login password entry screen appears each time you use

this machine.

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, log in by referring to the following:

Logout

When the operations are complete, select the [Authentication/Logout] key to return to the login user name and login

password entry screen.

9-20

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Overview of Job Accounting

Overview of Job Accounting

Job accounting manages the print count accumulated by individual accounts by assigning an ID to each account.

To Manage the Number of Sheets Used on Jobs Printed from a PC

To manage the number of jobs to be printed from the PC on the network, you need to configure settings by using the

printer driver on the PC.

A: 00000001

100 400 200

1Enable job

accounting.

(page 9-21)

3Enter the assigned account

ID when performing the job.

(page 9-19)

4Count the number of pages

printed.

2Setting an account.

(page 9-22)

A: 00000001

B: 00000002

C: 00000003

100 400 200

1Set Job Accounting for the

PC on the network by

using the printer driver.

(page 9-26)

2Execute printing.

3Count the number of

pages printed.

9-21

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enabling Job Accounting

Enabling Job Accounting

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2"Job Accounting Settings" [Next] > "Job Accounting" [Change]

2Configure the settings.

[On] > [OK]

Job Accounting Access

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2[Job Accounting Settings] > [Job Accounting Access]

2Configure the settings.

[Local] or [Network] > [OK]

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

• To disable job accounting, select [Off].

• When the display returns to System Menu default screen, logout is automatically executed

and the screen to enter the Account ID appears. To continue the operation, enter the

Account ID.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

To select [Network], network authentication must be enabled and [Ext.] must be selected

for server type.

9-22

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)

Job Accounting (Local)

You can add, change and delete an account and set the restriction for each account.

Adding an Account

Up to 1000 individual accounts can be added. The following entries are required.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2"Job Accounting Settings" [Next] > "Job Accounting (Local)" [Next] > "Accounting List"

[Add/Edit] > [Add]

2Enter the account information.

1"Account Name" [Change] > Enter the account name > [OK]

2"Account ID" [Change] > Enter the account ID > [OK]

3Activate or deactivate restriction.

4Select [Save].

A new account is added on the Account List.

Item Descriptions

Account Name Enter the account name (up to 32 characters).

Account ID Enter the account ID as many as eight digits (between 0 and 99999999).

Restriction This prohibits printing or restricts the number of sheets to load.

Restricting the Use of the Machine (page 9-23)

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [

]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

For details on entering characters, refer to the following:

Character Entry Method (page 11-9)

NOTE

Any "Account ID" that has already registered cannot be used. Enter any other account ID.

Restricting the Use of the Machine (page 9-23)

9-23

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)

Restricting the Use of the Machine

This section explains how to restrict the use of the machine by account or the number of sheets available.

Restriction Items

Applying Restriction

Restriction can be applied in the following modes:

Editing an Account

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2"Job Accounting Settings" [Next] > "Job Accounting (Local)" [Next] > "Accounting List"

[Add/Edit]

2Edit an account.

1Select [Detail] for the account name you wish to edit.

2Select the account information to be changed and change the account information.

Item Descriptions

Print Restriction (Total) Limits the number of sheets used for printing.

Applicable print functions are as follows:

• Print from Box

• Print from Removable Memory

• Print from PC

Item Descriptions

Off No restriction is applied.

Counter Limit Restricts the print counter in one-page increments up to 9,999,999 copies.

Reject Usage Restriction is applied.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

•Select [Name] or [ID] from the "Sort" to sort the account list.

•Select [Search(Name)] or [Search(ID)] to search by account name or account ID.

9-24

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)

3[Save] > [Yes]

The account information is changed.

9-25

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)

Deleting an Account

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2"Job Accounting Settings" [Next] > "Job Accounting (Local)" [Next] >

"Accounting List" [Add/Edit]

2Delete an account.

1Select the account name you wish to delete.

2[Delete] > [Yes]

The account is deleted.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

9-26

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)

Job Accounting for Printing

The number of jobs to be printed from the computer can be managed by Job Accounting.

Setting Printer Driver

To manage the number of jobs to be printed from the PC on the network, you need configure the following settings by

using the printer driver on the PC. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.

1Display the screen.

1Select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel], and then [Devices

and Printers].

2Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of

the printer driver.

3Click [Administrator] on the [Device Settings] tab.

2Configure the settings.

1Select [Job accounting] on the [Job Accounting] tab.

NOTE

In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows, and then click [Devices and

Printers].

9-27

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Job Accounting (Local)

2Set the Account ID.

[Use specific account ID]:

Enter the Account ID. Printing will be performed using the

entered Account ID. If this option is selected, the user does not have to enter the Account ID

for each print job.

[Prompt for account ID]: A screen for entering the Account ID will be displayed when

attempting a printing. The Account ID must be entered each time a printing is attempted.

[Prompt for account ID and validate]: A screen for entering the Account ID will be

displayed when attempting a printing. The Account ID stored in the Account ID list needs to

be entered. The Account ID must be entered each time a printing is attempted.

[Display account ID list]: The Account ID list is displayed when printing. The Account ID

to be used needs to be selected from the list.

[Validate user name (computer) or prompt for account ID]: When printing, the Windows

user name is searched in the "Account IDs" and printing is possible if the name is

registered. If the Account ID is not registered, the screen for entering the Account ID will

appear.

3Click [OK].

NOTE

For other settings of job accounting, refer to the following:

Printer Driver User Guide

9-28

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting

Configuring Job Accounting

Default Setting

Select the default value for usage limit, and whether or not to enable counting by paper size.

Default Counter Limit

When you add a new account, you can change the default restrictions on the number of sheets used. You can set any

number from 1 to 9,999,999.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2"Job Accounting Settings" [Next] > "Job Accounting (Local)" [Next] > "Default Setting"

[Next] > "Default Counter Limit" [Next]

2Configure the settings.

1Select [Change] for the item you want to modify and then select [+], [-] or use the numeric

keys to enter the default restriction on the number of sheets.

2Select [OK].

3To set another default restriction, repeat steps 1 and 2.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Item Description

Print Restriction

(Total)

Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for

printing.

Applicable print functions are as follows:

• Print from Box

• Print from Removable Memory

• Print from PC

9-29

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting

Count by Paper Size

This counts the number of pages by paper size (e.g. Letter).

In addition to paper size, media type can also be specified (e.g. count the letter-size color paper used). If you do not

specify the media type, the number of used sheets will be counted for the specified sheet size, regardless of the media

type.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting] > "Job Accounting

Settings" [Next]

2"Job Accounting (Local)" [Next] > "Default Setting" [Next] > "Count by Paper Size" [Next] >

"Paper Size 1 (to 5)" [Change]

2Configure the settings.

1Select [On].

2Select the paper size.

3Select [Media Type] to specify media type.

4Select the media type and select [OK].

5Select [OK].

NOTE

Paper size is available in five types, 1 to 5. These types are specified in accounting reports.

Print Accounting Report (page 9-32)

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

9-30

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting

Counting the Number of Pages Printed

This counts the number of pages printed. Counts are classified into Total Job Accounting and Each Job Accounting. A

new count can also be started after resetting the count data which was stored for a certain period of time.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting] > "Job Accounting

Settings" [Next]

2"Job Accounting (Local)" [Next] > "Total Job Accounting" [Next] or "Each Job Accounting"

[Check]

2Configure the settings.

The table below lists the item you can view.

Total Accounting

This counts the number of pages for all accounts and resets the counts for those accounts together at the same time.

1Display the screen.

Select [Check] at the function to check the count. The results will be displayed.

2Check the number of pages.

Confirm the count and select [Close].

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Item Descriptions

Printed Pages Displays the number of pages printed, and the total number of

pages used. You can also use [Count by Paper Size], [by

Duplex] and [by Combine] to check the number of pages

used.

Black & White Displays the number of pages used for black and white

printing.

Total Displays the number of pages printed.

Count by Paper Size Displays the number of pages used in the selected paper size

as well as the number of pages used in other paper sizes.

Count by Duplex/

Combine

Displays the number of pages used in Duplex (1-sided) mode,

Duplex (2-sided) mode and the total for both, as well as the

pages used in Combine (None) mode, Combine (2 in 1) mode,

Combine (4 in 1) mode and the total for all three.

Counter Reset Resets the counter.

Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.

9-31

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting

Each Job Account

This counts the number of pages for each account and resets the counts by account. When checking Each Job

Accounting, select the account for which you want to check the count.

1Display the screen.

1 Select the account to check the count.

2 Select [Detail].

3Select [Check] at the function to check the count.

The results will be displayed.

2Check the number of pages.

Confirm the count and select [Close].

NOTE

•Select [Name] or [ID] from the "Sort" to sort the account names.

•Select [Search(Name)] or [Search(ID)] to search by account name or account ID. To

display an account other than your own account, select [Other Account].

9-32

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting

Print Accounting Report

The total pages counted of all relevant accounts can be printed as an accounting report.

Use the procedure below to print a job accounting report.

1Prepare paper.

Check that A4 or Letter paper is loaded in the cassette.

2Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting] > [Job Accounting Settings]

3Print the report.

[Print Accounting Report] > [Yes]

Accounting report is printed.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name and

password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

ACCOUNT. REPORT

9-33

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Using Job Accounting

Using Job Accounting

This section explains procedures while setting job accounting.

If job accounting is enabled, an account ID entry screen appears each time you use this machine.

1In the account ID entry screen, enter the account ID using the numeric keys and select

[Login].

When the screen to enter the login user name and password appears

If user login administration is enabled, the screen to enter the login user name and password

appears. Enter a login user name and password to login. If the user has already registered the

account information, the account ID entry would be skipped.

2Proceed to complete the rest of the steps.

Logout

When the operations are complete, select the [Authentication/Logout] key to return to the account ID entry screen.

NOTE

• If you entered a wrong character, select the [Clear] key and enter the account ID

again.

• If the entered account ID does not match the registered ID, a warning beep will sound

and login will fail. Enter the correct account ID.

• By selecting [Check Counter], you can refer to the number of pages printed.

Changing User Properties (page 9-4)

9-34

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Apply Limit

Apply Limit

This specifies how the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction. The table below

describes the action taken.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting] > "Job Accounting

Settings" [Next]

2Select "Apply Limit" [Change].

2Configure the settings.

Select [Immediately], [Subsequently], or [Alert Only] > [OK]

Item Descriptions

Immediately*1

*1 If printing using the Job Box, the next job is prohibited when the counter reaches its limit.

Storing in the Job Box or Custom Box is not prohibited.

Job stops when the counter reaches its limit.

Subsequently Printing of the job continues but the subsequent job will be

rejected.

Alert Only Job continues while displaying an alert message.

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

9-35

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Unknown User Settings

Unknown User Settings

Unknown ID Job

This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown or unsent login user names or User ID. If the User

The setting items are as follows.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2"Unknown User Setting" [Next] > [Unknown ID Job].

2Configure the settings.

Select [Permit] or [Reject].

Item Descriptions

Permit The job is permitted to be printed.

Reject The job is rejected (not printed).

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

9-36

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Unknown User Settings

Registering Information for a User whose ID is

Unknown

If you register user information for a user whose ID is unknown, you can check information on the Job Status or Job

History screens. In addition, you can restrict available functions.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2"Unknown User Setting" [Next] > [User Property].

2Enter the user information.

Enter the user information > [OK]

NOTE

This function is displayed when [Unknown ID Job] is set to [Permit].

NOTE

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, enter a login user name

and password, and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator

privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Item Descriptions

User Name Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).

Account Name Register an account for a user whose ID is unknown.

Overview of Job Accounting (page 9-20)

NOTE

• Select [Name] or [ID] from the "Sort" to sort the account list.

• Select [Search(Name)] or [Search(ID)] to search by account

name or account ID.

Authorization Rules Set usage authority.

The following restriction items are available:

Print Restriction:

Select whether or not use of the print function of the printer is

prohibited.

Applicable print functions are as follows:

• Print from PC

10-1

10 Troubleshooting

This chapter explains the following topics:

Regular Maintenance .................................. 10-2

Toner Container Replacement .......... 10-2

Replace the Waste Toner Box .......... 10-5

Loading Paper .................................. 10-6

Replacing Staples (1,000-Sheet

Finisher) ............................................ 10-7

Replacing Staples (4,000-Sheet

Finisher) ............................................ 10-8

Replacing Staples (Folding Unit) .... 10-10

Disposing of the Punch Waste ........ 10-12

Troubleshooting ........................................ 10-16

Solving Malfunctions ....................... 10-16

Machine Operation Trouble ............ 10-16

Printed Image Trouble .................... 10-19

Remote Operation .......................... 10-21

Responding to Messages ............... 10-23

Adjustment/Maintenance .......................... 10-34

Overview of Adjustment/

Maintenance ................................... 10-34

Drum Refresh ................................. 10-34

Calibration ....................................... 10-34

Laser Scanner Cleaning ................. 10-34

Developer Refresh .......................... 10-35

Clearing Paper Jams ................................ 10-36

Jam Location Indicators .................. 10-36

Remove any jammed paper in

Cassette 1 ....................................... 10-37

Remove any jammed paper in

Cassette 2 ....................................... 10-40

Remove any jammed paper in

Cassette 3 and 4 (500-sheet×2) ..... 10-43

Remove any jammed paper in

Cassette 3 (1,500-sheet×2) ............ 10-45

Remove any jammed paper in

Cassette 4 (1,500-sheet×2) ............ 10-47

Remove any jammed paper in

Cassette 5 (Side Feeder) ................ 10-50

Remove any jammed paper in the

Multipurpose Tray ........................... 10-52

Remove any jammed paper in Right

Cover 1 ........................................... 10-53

Remove any jammed paper in Right

Cover 2 (500-sheet×2) .................... 10-57

Remove any jammed paper in Right

Cover 2 (1,500-sheet×2) ................. 10-58

Remove any jammed paper in the

Bridge Unit ...................................... 10-60

Remove any jammed paper in the

Mailbox ........................................... 10-61

Remove any jammed paper in the

1,000-Sheet Finisher ...................... 10-62

Remove any jammed paper in the

4,000-sheet Finisher (Inner) ........... 10-65

Remove any jammed paper in the

4,000-sheet Finisher (Tray A) ......... 10-66

Remove any jammed paper in the

4,000-sheet Finisher (Tray B) ......... 10-70

Remove any jammed paper in the

Folding Unit ..................................... 10-73

Remove any jammed paper in the

Folding Tray .................................... 10-78

Clearing a Staple Jam ............................... 10-83

Clearing a Staple Jam of the 1,000-

Sheet Finisher ................................. 10-83

Clearing a Staple Jam of the 4,000-

Sheet Finisher ................................. 10-86

Clearing a Staple Jam of the

Folding Unit ..................................... 10-88

10-2

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

Regular Maintenance

Toner Container Replacement

When toner is empty, the following message will be displayed.

"Toner is empty."

When toner runs low, the following message will be displayed. Make sure you have a new toner container available for

replacement.

"Toner is low. (Replace when empty.)"

1Open the front cover.

2Remove the toner container.

NOTE

• To maintain quality, we recommend using genuine own brand toner containers, which must pass numerous quality

inspections.

• The memory chip in the toner container of this product stores information necessary for improving customer

convenience, operation of the recycling system for used toner containers, and planning and development of new

products. The stored information does not include information that makes it possible to identify individuals, and is

only used anonymously for the above purposes.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.

NOTE

If you close the toner container cover before replacing the container, select [Open Toner

Container Cover].

10-3

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

3Put used toner container into the plastic waste bag.

4Remove the new toner container from the box.

5Tap the toner container.

6Shake the toner container.

IMPORTANT

Do not touch the points shown below.

5~65~6 5~65~6

5~6

10-4

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

7Install the toner container.

8Close the toner container cover.

9Close the front cover.

IMPORTANT

Insert the toner container all the way.

NOTE

• If the toner container cover or front cover does not close, check that the new toner container is installed correctly.

• Return the exhausted toner container to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner container will be

recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.

CLICK!

10-5

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

Replace the Waste Toner Box

When the waste toner box is full, the following message will be displayed. Immediately replace the waste toner box.

"Waste toner box is full."

1Open the waste toner box cover.

2Remove the Waste Toner Box.

3Put used Waste Toner Box into the plastic waste bag.

4Remove the new Waste Toner Box.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.

10-6

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

5Install the Waste Toner Box.

6Close the waste toner box cover.

Loading Paper

When Cassette # runs out of paper, the following messages will be displayed.

"Add paper in cassette #."

"Add paper in Multipurpose tray."

Loading in Cassette 1 (page 3-4)

Loading in Cassette 2 (page 3-7)

Loading in the Large Capacity Feeder (page 3-14)

Loading in the Side Feeder (page 3-16)

Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray (page 5-2)

NOTE

Return the exhausted waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The collected waste toner box will be

recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.

NOTE

If [Show Paper Setup Message] is set to [On], the confirmation screen for the paper setting will be displayed when a

new paper is set. If a paper is changed, select [Change] and then change the settings of the paper.

Cassette 1 (to 5) (page 8-6)

MP Tray Setting (page 8-7)

CLICK!

10-7

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

Replacing Staples (1,000-Sheet Finisher)

When the Staple Unit runs out of staples, the following messages will be displayed. The staple cartridge holder need to

be replenished with staples.

"Staple is empty."

1Open the finisher front cover.

2Remove the Staple Cartridge Holder.

3Replace the staples.

NOTE

If the Staple Unit runs out of staples, contact your dealer or service representative.

10-8

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

4Install the Staple Cartridge Holder.

5Close the cover.

Replacing Staples (4,000-Sheet Finisher)

When the Staple Unit runs out of staples, the following messages will be displayed. The staple cartridge holder need to

be replenished with staples.

"Staple is empty."

1Open the finisher front cover 1.

NOTE

If the Staple Unit runs out of staples, contact your dealer or service representative.

10-9

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

2Remove the Staple Cartridge Holder (A).

3Replace the staples.

4Install the Staple Cartridge Holder (A).

5Close the cover.

10-10

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

Replacing Staples (Folding Unit)

When the Staple Unit runs out of staples, the following messages will be displayed. The staple cartridge holder need to

be replenished with staples.

"Staple is empty."

1Open the finisher front cover 1 and 2.

2Remove the Staple Cartridge Holder (B) or (C).

3Replace the staples.

NOTE

If the Staple Unit runs out of staples, contact your dealer or service representative.

10-11

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

4Install the Staple Cartridge Holder (B) or (C).

5Close the covers.

10-12

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

Disposing of the Punch Waste

When the waste punch box is full, the following messages will be displayed. Empty the punch waste box.

"Empty the punch waste box."

Leave the power switch on the machine switched ON while performing this procedure.

1,000-Sheet Finisher

1Open the finisher front cover.

2Remove the Punch Waste Box.

3Empty the Punch Waste Box.

NOTE

Take care not to spill the waste hole punch scraps when removing the box.

10-13

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

4Install the Punch Waste Box.

5Close the cover.

4,000-Sheet Finisher

1Open the finisher front cover 1.

10-14

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

2Remove the Punch Waste Box.

3Empty the Punch Waste Box.

4Install the Punch Waste Box.

NOTE

Take care not to spill the waste hole punch scraps when removing the box.

10-15

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

5Close the cover.

10-16

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

Solving Malfunctions

The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving.

If a problem occurs with your machine, look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the following

pages. If the problem persists, contact your Service Representative.

Machine Operation Trouble

When the following machine operation troubles occur, implement appropriate procedures.

NOTE

When contacting us, the serial number will be necessary.

To check the serial number, refer to the following:

Display for Device Information (page 2-16)

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

An application does not

start.

Is the Auto Panel Reset time short? Set the Auto Panel Reset time to 30

seconds or more.

page 8-50

The screen does not

respond when the power

switch is turned on.

Is the machine plugged in? Plug the power cord into an AC

outlet.

―

Is the machine powered on? Turn on the main power switch. page 2-2

Pressing the [Start] key

does not start printing.

Is there a message on the screen? Determine the appropriate response

to the message and respond

accordingly.

page 10-23

Is the machine in Sleep mode? Select any key on the operation

panel to recover the machine from

Sleep mode.

page 2-34

Blank sheets are ejected. ― Check that the settings of the

application software.

―

Paper often jams. Is the paper loaded correctly? Load the paper correctly. page 3-4

― Turn the orientation 180 degrees

around in which the paper is

positioned.

page 3-4

Is the paper of the supported type?

Is it in good condition?

Remove the paper, turn it over, and

reload it.

page 3-4

Is the paper curled, folded or

wrinkled?

Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-4

Are there any loose scraps or

jammed paper in the machine?

Remove any jammed paper. page 10-36

10-17

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

2 or more sheets are

overlaps when ejected.

(multi feed)

― Load the paper correctly. page 3-2

Printouts are wrinkled. Is the paper loaded correctly? Load the paper correctly. page 3-4

― Turn the orientation 180 degrees

around in which the paper is

positioned.

page 3-4

Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-4

Printouts are curled. Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-4

Printer driver cannot be

installed.

Is the driver installed with the host

name while Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct

function is available?

Specify the IP address instead of

the host name.

page 2-41

Cannot print. Is the machine plugged in? Plug the power cord into an AC

outlet.

―

Is the machine powered on? Turn on the main power switch. page 2-2

Are the USB cable and network

cable connected?

Connect the correct USB cable and

network cable securely.

page 2-7

Is the print job paused? Resume printing. page 7-9

When the wired or Wi-Fi network is

configured using the name

resolution, does the IP address

(private address) of the other

network which can not access

coexists?

The number of host name and

domain name which can be used

with the machine is one

respectively. Configure the network

under this restriction.

―

Change the settings of name

resolution such as NetBEUI and

DNS, or network environment

settings.

Command

Center RX

User

Guide

Select Wi-Fi, Wired Network or

Optional Network as an unlimited-

use network on Primary Network

(Client).

page 8-45

Set to [Wired Network] or [Wi-Fi]

either one of [On], and set the other

setting to [Off].

page 8-37

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-18

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Cannot print with USB

memory.

USB memory not

recognized.

Is the USB host blocked? Select [Unblock] in the USB host

settings.

page 8-46

― Check that the USB memory is

securely plugged into the machine.

―

While "Auto-IP" is already

set to [On], the IP

address is not assigned

automatically.

Is a value other than "0.0.0.0"

entered for the link local address of

TCP/IP(v4)?

Enter "0.0.0.0" for the IP address of

TCP/IP(v4).

page 2-25

Cannot connect to this

machine by using Wi-Fi

Direct.

Are three handheld devices

connected simultaneously?

Release the connection of handheld

devices being connected manually

or set a connection after setting the

connection time and releasing the

connection by automatic

disconnection.

page 8-30

Cannot send via the

e-mail.

Is the E-mail send size limit set in

the SMTP server registered on the

machine?

Check the limit value is entered to

"E-mail Size Limit" of [E-mail]

setting in Command Center RX and

change the value as necessary.

page 2-55

The machine is emitting

steam in the area around

the paper ejection slot.

Check the room temperature to see

if it is low, or if damp paper was

used.

Depending on the printing

environment and the paper's

condition, the heat generated during

printing will cause the moisture in

the paper to evaporate, and the

steam emitted may look like smoke.

This is not a problem, and you can

continue printing. If the steam

concerns you, raise the room

temperature, or replace the paper

with a newer, dryer paper.

―

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-19

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Printed Image Trouble

When the following printed image trouble occurs, implement appropriate procedures.

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Printouts are totally too

light.

Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-2

Is EcoPrint mode enabled? Disable [EcoPrint] mode. page 8-15

―Run [Developer Refresh]. page 10-35

―Run [Laser Scanner Cleaning]. page 10-34

― Make sure the paper type setting is

correct for the paper being used.

page 8-12

White background parts

of the image appear to

have a slight overall

coloration.

Run [Calibration]. page 10-34

Black or color dots appear

on the white background.

―Run [Developer Refresh]. page 10-35

Printouts are fuzzy.

Printouts are cut off.

Is the device used in an

environment with high humidity or

where the temperature or humidity

changes suddenly?

Use in an environment that has

suitable humidity.

―

Set [Drum Heater] to [On]. page 8-53

―Run [Drum Refresh]. page 10-34

Images are skewed. Is the paper loaded correctly? Check the position of the paper

width guides.

page 3-4

Printouts have vertical

lines.

―Run [Laser Scanner Cleaning]. page 10-34

10-20

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Dirt on the top edge or

back of the paper.

Is the interior of the machine dirty? Open the right cover. If the machine

interior is dirty with toner, clean it

using soft, dry, lint-free cloth.

―

Part of the image is

periodically faint or shows

white lines.

― Open and then close the right cover. ―

―Run [Drum Refresh]. page 10-34

―Run [Developer Refresh]. page 10-35

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-21

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Remote Operation

This function enables the system administrator to explain how to operate the panel and troubleshoot to user, by

accessing operation panel of the machine at remote using browser and VNC software.

Executing Remote Operation from Browser

The supported browser is as follows:

• Google Chrome (Version 21.0 or later)

• Internet Explorer (Version 9.0 or later)

• Microsoft Edge

• Mozilla Firefox (Version 14.0 or later)

• Safari (Version 5.0 or later)

This procedure explains how to execute Remote Operation from Command Center RX using Google Chrome.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Protocol Settings]

2Set "Enhanced VNC over SSL" to [On].

3Configure settings for remote operation.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Remote Operation] > [Change] >

[On]

2Select [Off], [Use Password], or [Administrator Only].

When you select [Use Password], enter the password in "Password" and "Confirm

Password", then select [OK].

4Restart the machine.

NOTE

To execute Remote Operation using other browsers, refer to the following:

Command Center RX User Guide

Protocol Settings (page 8-37)

NOTE

You can configure the protocol settings using Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

Remote Operation (page 8-49)

NOTE

You can configure settings for remote operation using Command Center RX

Command Center RX User Guide

Restart Entire Device (page 8-49)

10-22

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

5Start up the browser.

Enter "https://" and host name of the machine to access the Command Center RX.

6Select [Device Information/Remote Operation] > [Remote

Operation].

7Click [Start] button.

When the Remote Operation is started up, the operation panel screen will be displayed on the

system administrator's or user's PC screen.

Executing Remote Panel from VNC Software

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Protocol Settings]

2Set "Enhanced VNC (RFB)" to [On].

3Startup the remote operation.

1Start up the VNC software.

2Enter the following format separated by a colon to start up the remote operation.

"IP address: port number"

Accessing Command Center RX (page 2-52)

NOTE

• If the user is logged in to the device, the permission confirmation screen will be displayed

on the operation panel. Select [Yes].

• If pop-up blocking of the browser occurs during connection of the Remote Operation,

select Always allow pop-ups from https:// [host name], and click Done. Perform Remote

Operation after waiting 1 minute or more.

Protocol Settings (page 8-37)

NOTE

• When setting "VNC (RFB) over SSL" to [On], the communication is encrypted.

• You can configure the protocol settings using Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

NOTE

When setting "VNC (RFB)" to [On] in step 2, the default port number is 9062. When

setting "VNC (RFB) over SSL " to [On], the default port number is 9063.

Protocol Settings (page 8-37)

10-23

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Responding to Messages

If the touch panel or the computer displays any of these messages, follow the corresponding procedure.

NOTE

When contacting us, the serial number will be necessary. To check the serial number, refer to the following:

Display for Device Information (page 2-16)

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Acceptable fold count

exceeded.

Is the acceptable number of

sheets exceeded?

Select [Continue] to print using

Fold per acceptable number of

sheets. Select [Cancel] to

cancel the job.

—

Acceptable staple

count exceeded.*1

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time

elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Error Clear (page 8-50)

Is the acceptable number of

sheets exceeded?

Select [Continue] to print

without using Staple. Select

[Cancel] to cancel the job.

—

Access point was not

detected.

― Check if the access point has

been set correctly.

―

Activation error. ― Failed to activate the

application. Contact

administrator.

―

― Expansion Authentication is

disabled. Turn the power switch

off and on. If the error exists,

contact administrator.

―

Add paper in cassette

Is the indicated cassette out of

paper?

Load paper.

Select the available paper.

Select [Continue] to print.

page 3-2

Are five or less envelopes

loaded in the cassette?

Pull the cassette and loosen the

paper length and width guides

slightly.

―

Add paper in

multipurpose tray.

Is the paper of the selected size

loaded in the multipurpose tray?

Load paper.

Select the available paper.

Select [Continue] to print.

page 5-2

10-24

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Box is not found. — The specified box cannot be

found. Job is canceled. Select

[End].

—

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Calibrating... ― The machine is under the

adjustment to maintain its

quality. Please wait.

―

Cannot Banner Print. ― System stamp is set up.

Banner print cannot be carried

out.

Job is canceled. Select [End].

―

Cannot connect. ― This appears when the Wi-Fi or

Wi-Fi Direct connection did not

complete. Check the settings,

and check the signal conditions.

page 8-30

page 8-31

Cannot connect to

Authentication

Server.*1

— Set machine time to match the

server’s time.

page 2-24

— Check the domain name. page 9-2

— Check the host name. page 9-2

— Check the connection status

with the server.

—

Cannot connect to

Server.

— Check the connection status

with the server.

—

Cannot duplex print

on this paper.*1

Did you select a paper size/type

that cannot be duplex printed?

If the selected paper is not

changed and [Continue] is

selected, duplex is released.

Select the available paper.

Select [Continue] to print.

page 6-18

Cannot fold this

paper.

Did you select a paper size/type

that cannot be folded?

If the selected paper is not

changed and [Continue] is

selected, fold is released.

Select the available paper.

Select [Continue] to print.

page 6-7

Cannot offset this

paper.*1

Did you select a paper size/type

that cannot be offset?

If the selected paper is not

changed and [Continue] is

selected, offset is released.

Select the available paper.

Select [Continue] to print.

page 6-8

Cannot perform

remote printing.

— Remote printing is prohibited.

The job is canceled. Select

[End].

—

10-25

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Cannot print the

specified number of

copies.*1

— Only one copy is available.

Select [Continue] to continue

printing. Select [Cancel] to

cancel the job.

—

Cannot process this

job.*1

― Restricted by Authorization

settings. The job is canceled.

Select [End].

―

― Restricted by Job Accounting.

The job is canceled. Select

[End].

page 9-21

Cannot punch at the

specified position.

Have you selected a position

that cannot be punched?

If the selected paper is not

changed and [Continue] is

selected, punch is released.

Select the available paper.

Select [Continue] to print.

page 6-11

Cannot punch this

paper.

Did you select a paper size/type

that cannot be punched?

If the selected paper is not

changed and [Continue] is

selected, punch is released.

Select the available paper.

Select [Continue] to print.

page 6-11

Cannot read data in

this ID card.

― In registration process, the ID

card information was not read

correctly. Hold again the ID card

over the ID card reading part.

If the same message still

appears, the ID card may not be

compatible with this product.

Change it to another ID card.

―

Cannot recognize. ― Make sure your ID card has

been registered.

―

Cannot staple at the

specified position.

Have you selected a position

that cannot be stapled?

If the selected paper is not

changed and [Continue] is

selected, staple is released.

Select the available paper.

Select [Continue] to print.

page 6-9

Cannot staple this

paper.*1

Did you select a paper size/type

that cannot be stapled?

If the selected paper is not

changed and [Continue] is

selected, staple is released.

Select the available paper.

Select [Continue] to print.

page 6-9

Cannot use ##### due

to a failure.

― Call service. ―

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-26

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Checking the waste

toner box.

####

Is the waste toner box full? Replace the toner container.

Reuse the black (K) toner

container as a waste toner box.

Handle the color toner

containers according to the

instructions supplied with them.

Select [Next]. The instructions

will be displayed.

NOTE

If you select [Open Toner

Container Cover], you can

open the Toner Container Cover

that you closed accidentally.

―

Check the paper in the

multipurpose tray.

— The paper size is different. Set

selected size paper and select

[Continue].

page 5-2

Check the side feeder. — The side feeder is not installed

correctly. Attach the side feeder.

―

Check the toner

container.

— Open the main unit front cover

and remove the toner container.

Shake carefully and replace.

NOTE

If you select [Open Toner

Container Cover], you can

open the Toner Container Cover

that you closed accidentally.

―

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time

elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Error Clear (page 8-50)

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Empty the punch

waste box.

Is the punch waste box full? Follow the instructions on the

screen. and empty the punch

waste box.

page 10-12

Error occurred at

cassette #.

― Open the cassette. Check inside

the machine and remove the

paper.

―

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-27

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Failed to specify Job

Accounting.*1

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time

elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Error Clear (page 8-50)

— Failed to specify Job Accounting

when processing the job

externally. The job is canceled.

Select [End].

—

Failed to store job

retention data.

— The job is canceled. Select

[End].

—

Finisher tray is full of

paper.

Is the acceptable storage

capacity exceeded?

Remove the paper. Printing then

resumes.

—

Folding tray is full of

paper.

Is the acceptable storage

capacity exceeded?

Remove the paper. Printing then

resumes.

—

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Hard Disk error. — An error has occurred on the

hard disk. Job is canceled.

Select [End].

The error codes are as follows.

01: The amount of data that can

be saved at once has been

exceeded. Restart the system or

turn the power OFF/ON. If the

error still occurs, divide the file

into smaller files.

If the error occurs after the file is

divided, the hard disk is

damaged. Execute [System

Initialization].

04: Insufficient space on the

hard disk to complete this

operation. Move data or delete

unneeded data.

—

Hard disk failure. Call

service.

— Call service. —

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Incorrect account

ID.*1

— The account ID was incorrect

when processing the job

externally. The job is canceled.

Select [End].

—

10-28

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Incorrect box

password.

— The box password was incorrect

when processing the job

externally. The job is canceled.

Select [End].

—

Incorrect Login User

Name or Password.*1

— The login user name or

password was incorrect when

processing the job externally.

The job is canceled. Select

[End].

—

Install the punch

waste box.

— Follow the instructions on the

screen. and install the punch

waste box.

page 10-12

Install the waste toner

box.

— The waste toner box is not

installed correctly. Set it

correctly.

page 10-5

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time

elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Error Clear (page 8-50)

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Job Accounting

restriction

exceeded.*1

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time

elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Error Clear (page 8-50)

Is the acceptable printing count

restricted by Job Accounting

exceeded?

The printing count exceeded the

acceptable count restricted by

Job Accounting. Cannot print

any more. The job is canceled.

Select [End].

—

Job separator tray is

full of paper.

Is the acceptable storage

capacity exceeded?

Remove the paper and select

[Continue]. Printing then

resumes.

—

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

KPDL error. *1

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time

elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Error Clear (page 8-50)

― PostScript error has occurred.

The job is canceled. Select

[End].

―

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-29

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Machine failure. — Internal error has occurred.

Make a note of the error code

displayed on the screen. Call

service.

—

Mailbox tray is full of

paper.

Is the acceptable storage

capacity exceeded?

Remove the paper. Printing then

resumes.

—

Main unit main tray is

full of paper.

Is the acceptable storage

capacity exceeded?

Remove the paper. Printing then

resumes.

—

Memory is full.*1

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time

elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Error Clear (page 8-50)

— The process cannot be

performed due to insufficient

memory. If only [End] is

available, select [End]. The job

will be canceled.

When insufficient memory

occurred frequently, contact

your dealer or service

representative.

—

— The memory is full and the job

cannot be continued. Select

[Continue] to print the scanned

pages. The print job cannot be

processed completely. Select

[Cancel] to cancel the job.

—

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Non-genuine toner

installed.

Is the installed toner container

our own brand?

We will not be liable for any

damage caused by the use of

third party supplies in this

machine.

—

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Paper jam. ― If a paper jam occurs, the

machine will stop and the

location of the jam will be

indicated on the screen. Leave

the machine on and follow the

instructions to remove the

jammed paper.

page 10-36

10-30

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Paper left. — Remove paper from the

document finisher.

—

— Remove paper from the finisher

tray.

—

— Remove the paper from the

folding tray of the finisher.

—

Performing Drum

Refresh...

— The machine is under the

adjustment to maintain its

quality. Please wait.

—

Preparing to print. — The machine is under the

adjustment to maintain its

quality. Please wait.

—

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Regulating the

temperature…

― The machine is under the

adjustment to maintain its

quality. Please wait.

―

Running security

function...

— Running security function.

Please wait.

—

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-31

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

SSD error. — An error has occurred on the

SSD. Job is canceled. Select

[End].

The error cords are as follows.

01: The amount of data that can

be saved at once has been

exceeded. Restart the system or

turn the power OFF/ON. If the

error still occurs, divide the file

into smaller files. If the error

occurs after the file is divided,

the SSD is damaged. Execute

[System Initialization].

04: Insufficient space on the

SSD to complete this operation.

Move data or delete unneeded

data.

NOTE

Please be aware that when you

carry out initialization of the

system, the data saved in SSD

will be erased.

—

Staple is empty. *1

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time

elapses. For details on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Error Clear (page 8-50)

Has the staple cartridge holder

run out of staples?

If the staples are depleted, the

machine will stop and the

location of staple depletion will

be indicated on the screen.

Leave the machine on and

follow the instructions to replace

the staple case. Select

[Continue] to print without

stapling. Select [Cancel] to

cancel the job.

page 10-7

page 10-8

page 10-10

Staple is empty.

(Manual Staple)

Has staple cartridge holder A

run out of staples?

Add staples to staple cartridge

holder A.

page 10-8

Staple jam. — If a staple jam occurs, the

machine will stop and the

location of the jam will be

indicated on the screen. Leave

the machine on and follow the

instructions to remove the

jammed staple.

page 10-83

System error. — System error has occurred.

Follow the instructions on the

screen.

—

10-32

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

The cover is open. Is there any cover which is

open?

Close the cover indicated on the

screen.

―

The device cannot be

connected because

allowed connections

would be exceeded.

Are three handheld devices

connected simultaneously?

Cancel a connection to a

portable device that is not being

used, or set the machine's auto

disconnect time to break

portable device connections.

page 8-30

The folding unit is

open.

― Close the folding unit. ―

The toner container is

improperly installed.

— The toner container is

improperly installed or not

installed.

Open the front cover and set the

toner container correctly.

—

This ID card is already

registered to another

user.

— Your ID card has already been

registered. Change it to another

ID card.

—

Time for maintenance

soon. #####

— Call service. —

Toner is empty. — Replace the toner container to

our specified toner container.

page 10-2

Toner is low. (Replace

when empty.)

— It is almost time to replace the

toner container. Obtain a new

toner container.

—

Tray # is full of paper. Is the acceptable storage

capacity exceeded?

Remove the paper. Printing then

resumes.

—

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Unknown Toner

Installed. PC

Does the installed toner

container's regional

specification match the

machine's?

Install the specified container. —

10-33

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Warning for high

temperature. Adjust

the room temperature.

― Print quality may be

deteriorated. Adjust the

temperature and the humidity of

your room.

―

Warning for low

temperature. Adjust

the room temperature.

— Print quality may be

deteriorated. Adjust the

temperature and the humidity of

your room.

—

Warning low memory. — Cannot start the job. Try again

later.

—

Waste toner box

almost full.

— It is almost time to replace the

waste toner box. Obtain a new

waste toner box.

—

Waste toner box is

full.

Is the waste toner box full? Replace the waste toner box. page 10-5

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

You cannot use this

box.

— You cannot use the specified

box. Job is canceled. Select

[End].

—

10-34

Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance

Adjustment/Maintenance

Overview of Adjustment/Maintenance

If there is an image problem and the message to run adjustment or maintenance menu appears, run Adjustment/

Maintenance in the system menu.

The table below lists the item you can carry out.

Drum Refresh

Remove image blur and white dots from the printout.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Drum Refresh" [Next]

2Perform the drum refresh.

Select [Start]. "Drum Refresh" begins.

Calibration

Calibrate the device to ensure consistency with the original tone.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Calibration" [Next]

2Perform the calibration.

Select [Start]. "Calibration" begins.

Laser Scanner Cleaning

Remove vertical white lines from the printout.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Laser Scanner Cleaning"

[Next]

Item Description Reference Page

Drum Refresh Remove image blur and white dots from the printout. page 10-34

Calibration Calibrate the device to ensure consistency with the original tone. page 10-34

Laser Scanner Cleaning Remove vertical white lines from the printout. page 10-34

Developer Refresh Adjust the printed image that is too light or incomplete, even though

there is enough toner.

page 10-35

NOTE

Drum Refresh cannot be performed while printing. Execute Drum Refresh after the printing is done.

10-35

Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance

2Perform the laser scanner cleaning.

Select [Start]. "Laser Scanner Cleaning" begins.

Developer Refresh

Adjust the printed image that is too light or incomplete, even though there is enough toner.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > "Developer Refresh" [Next]

2Perform the Developer Refresh.

Select [Start]. "Developer Refresh" begins.

NOTE

Waiting time may be longer when the toner is refilled during developer refresh.

10-36

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Clearing Paper Jams

If a paper jam occurs, printing stops and the location at which the paper jam has occurred and the following message

appear on the touch panel.

"Paper Jam."

Refer to these procedures to remove the jammed paper.

Jam Location Indicators

If a paper jam occurs, the location of the jam will be displayed on the touch panel as well as the clearing instructions.

1 Shows the location of a paper jam.

2 Shows the previous step.

3 Shows the next step.

4 Shows the removal procedure.

JAM s

Paper jam.

1/12

1. Open main unit right cover 1.

2. Open cover (A3) and

remove the paper.

3. Close the main unit right cover.

4. Open cassette 1.

5. Remove the paper.

To remove paper which is difficult

to get access to, the cassette

can be removed.

6. Close the cassette.

e011001_01

JAM s

Paper jam.

1/12

1. Open main unit right cover 1.

2. Open cover (A3) and

remove the paper.

3. Close the main unit right cover.

4. Open cassette 1.

5. Remove the paper.

To remove paper which is difficult

to get access to, the cassette

can be removed.

6. Close the cassette.

e011001_01

10-37

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

After you remove the jam, the machine will warm up again and the error message will be cleared. The machine resumes

with the page that was printing when the jam occurred.

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 1

1If the optional side feeder is installed, detach the side feeder.

Paper Jam Location Indicator

Paper Jam Location Reference Page

ACassette 1 page 10-37

BCassette 2 page 10-40

CCassette 3 (500-sheet×2) page 10-43

Cassette 3 (1,500-sheet×1) page 10-45

DCassette 4 (500-sheet×2) page 10-43

ECassette 4 (1,500-sheet×2) page 10-47

FCassette 5 (Side Feeder) page 10-50

GMultipurpose Tray page 10-52

HRight Cover 1 page 10-53

IRight Cover 2 page 10-57

JBridge Unit page 10-60

KMailbox page 10-61

L1,000-Sheet Finisher page 10-62

M4,000-Sheet Finisher (Inner) page 10-65

N4,000-Sheet Finisher (Tray A) page 10-66

O4,000-Sheet Finisher (Tray B) page 10-70

PFolding Unit page 10-73

QFolding Tray page 10-78

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-38

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

2Open Right Cover 1.

3Open the cover (A3).

4Remove any jammed paper.

5Return the cover to the original position.

10-39

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

6Pull Cassette 1 out toward you until it stops.

7Remove any jammed paper.

8Push Cassette 1 back in.

NOTE

To remove paper which is difficult to get access to, the cassette can be removed.

10-40

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

9If the optional side feeder is installed, return the side feeder to

the original position.

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 2

1If the optional side feeder is installed, detach the side feeder.

2Open Right Cover 1.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-41

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

3Close the duplex unit (A5).

4Remove any jammed paper.

5Return the cover to the original position.

6Pull Cassette 2 out toward you until it stops.

10-42

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

7Remove any jammed paper.

8Push Cassette 2 back in.

9If the optional side feeder is installed, return the side feeder to

the original position.

NOTE

To remove paper which is difficult to get access to, the cassette can be removed.

10-43

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 3 and 4

(500-sheet×2)

See the explanation for Cassette 3 below.

1If the optional side feeder is installed, detach the side feeder.

2Open Right Cover 2.

3Remove any jammed paper.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-44

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

4Pull Cassette 3 out toward you until it stops.

5Remove any jammed paper.

6Push Right Cover 2 and Cassette 3 back in.

NOTE

To remove paper which is difficult to get access to, the cassette can be removed.

10-45

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

7If the optional side feeder is installed, return the side feeder to

the original position.

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 3

(1,500-sheet×2)

1If the optional side feeder is installed, detach the side feeder.

2Open Right Cover 2.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-46

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

3Remove any jammed paper.

4Pull Cassette 3 out toward you until it stops.

5Remove any jammed paper.

6Push Right Cover 2 and Cassette 3 back in.

10-47

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

7If the optional side feeder is installed, return the side feeder to

the original position.

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 4

(1,500-sheet×2)

1If the optional side feeder is installed, detach the side feeder.

2Open Right Cover 2.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-48

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

3Remove any jammed paper.

4Pull Cassette 3 out toward you until it stops.

5Pull Cassette 4 out toward you until it stops.

6Pull out paper feed unit (B1).

10-49

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

7Open cover (B2).

8Remove any jammed paper.

9Push paper feed unit, Cassette 3 and Cassette 4 back in.

10 Return the cover to the original position.

10-50

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

11 If the optional side feeder is installed, return the side feeder to

the original position.

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 5 (Side

Feeder)

1Detach the side feeder.

2Remove any jammed paper.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-51

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

3Pull Cassette 5 out toward you until it stops.

4Remove any jammed paper.

5Return the Cassette 5 and side feeder to the original position.

10-52

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in the Multipurpose Tray

1Remove any jammed paper.

2Remove all the paper.

3Reload the paper.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-53

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 1

1If the optional side feeder is installed, detach the side feeder.

2Open Right Cover 1.

3Close the duplex unit (A5).

4Remove any jammed paper.

CAUTION

The fixing unit is extremely hot. Take sufficient care when working in this area, as there is a danger of getting

burned.

10-54

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

5Open the paper feed unit cover (A1).

6Remove any jammed paper.

7Open the fuser cover (A2).

8Remove any jammed paper.

10-55

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

9Open the cover (A3).

10 Remove any jammed paper.

11 Lift the cover (A4).

12 Remove any jammed paper.

10-56

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

13 Lift the duplex unit (A5).

14 Remove any jammed paper.

15 Remove the paper from the paper ejector.

16 Return the cover to the original position.

10-57

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

17 If the optional side feeder is installed, return the side feeder to

the original position.

Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 2

(500-sheet×2)

1If the optional side feeder is installed, detach the side feeder.

2Open Right Cover 2.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-58

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

3Remove any jammed paper.

4Return the cover to the original position.

5If the optional side feeder is installed, return the side feeder to

the original position.

Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 2

(1,500-sheet×2)

1If the optional side feeder is installed, detach the side feeder.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-59

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

2Open Right Cover 2.

3Remove any jammed paper.

4Return the cover to the original position.

5If the optional side feeder is installed, return the side feeder to

the original position.

10-60

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in the Bridge Unit

1 Open the bridge unit cover.

2Remove any jammed paper.

3Close the cover.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-61

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in the Mailbox

1Open the mailbox cover.

2Remove any jammed paper.

3Close the cover.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-62

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in the 1,000-Sheet

Finisher

1Remove any jammed paper.

2Open the finisher top cover.

3Open the conveyor guide (D2).

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-63

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

4Remove any jammed paper.

5Return the conveyor guide (D2) to the original position.

6Open the finisher front cover.

7Open the conveyor guide (D1).

10-64

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

8Remove any jammed paper.

9Return the conveyor guide (D1) to the original position.

10 Return the covers to the original position.

10-65

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in the 4,000-sheet

Finisher (Inner)

1Open the finisher front cover 1.

2Open the conveyor guide (D1).

3Remove any jammed paper.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-66

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

4Return the conveyor guide (D1) to the original position.

5Return the cover to the original position.

Remove any jammed paper in the 4,000-sheet

Finisher (Tray A)

1Remove any jammed paper.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-67

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

2Open the finisher front cover 1.

3Open the conveyor guide (D6).

4Remove any jammed paper.

5Return the conveyor guide (D6) to the original position.

10-68

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

6Open the conveyor guide (D4).

7Turn knob (D5).

8Remove any jammed paper.

9Return the conveyor guide (D4) to the original position.

10-69

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

10 Open the conveyor guide (D1).

11 Remove any jammed paper.

12 Return the conveyor guide (D1) to the original position.

13 Return the cover to the original position.

10-70

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in the 4,000-sheet

Finisher (Tray B)

1Remove any jammed paper.

2Open the finisher front cover 1.

3Open the conveyor guide (D2).

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-71

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

4Turn knob (D3).

5Remove any jammed paper.

6Return the conveyor guide (D2) to the original position.

7Open the conveyor guide (D1).

10-72

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

8Remove any jammed paper.

9Return the conveyor guide (D1) to the original position.

10 Return the cover to the original position.

10-73

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in the Folding Unit

1Open the finisher front cover 1 and 2.

2Open the conveyor guide (D7).

3Remove any jammed paper.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-74

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

4Return the conveyor guide (D7) to the original position.

5Open the conveyor guide (D8).

6Remove any jammed paper.

7Return the conveyor guide (D8) to the original position.

10-75

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

8Remove paper from inside the finisher.

9Return the covers to the original position.

10 Lift the folding tray.

11 Remove any jammed paper.

10-76

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

12 Press the release lever to pull the folding unit out.

13 Open the folding unit left cover.

14 Turn dial (D9).

15 Remove any jammed paper.

10-77

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

16 Return the folding unit left cover to the original position.

17 Open the folding unit top cover.

18 Turn dial (D9).

19 Remove any jammed paper.

10-78

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

20 Return the folding unit top cover to the original position.

21 Return the folding unit to the original position.

Remove any jammed paper in the Folding Tray

1Lift the folding tray.

2Remove any jammed paper.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-79

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

3Press the release lever to pull the folding unit out.

4Open the folding unit left cover.

5Turn dial (D9).

6Remove any jammed paper.

10-80

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

7Return the folding unit left cover to the original position.

8Open the folding unit top cover.

9Turn dial (D9).

10 Remove any jammed paper.

10-81

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

11 Return the folding unit top cover to the original position.

12 Return the folding unit to the original position.

13 Open the finisher front cover 1 and 2.

14 Remove paper from inside the finisher.

10-82

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

15 Return the covers to the original position.

10-83

Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam

Clearing a Staple Jam

Clearing a Staple Jam of the 1,000-Sheet Finisher

1Open the finisher top cover.

2Open the conveyor guide (D2).

3Remove any jammed paper.

4Return the conveyor guide (D2) to the original position.

10-84

Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam

5Open the finisher front cover.

6Open the conveyor guide (D1).

7Remove any jammed paper.

8Return the conveyor guide (D1) to the original position.

10-85

Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam

9Remove the Staple Cartridge Holder.

10 Remove the jammed staple.

11 Install the Staple Cartridge Holder.

12 Return the covers to the original position.

10-86

Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam

Clearing a Staple Jam of the 4,000-Sheet Finisher

1Open the finisher front cover 1.

2Open the conveyor guide (D4).

3Turn knob (D5).

4Remove any jammed paper.

10-87

Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam

5Return the conveyor guide (D4) to the original position.

6Remove the Staple Cartridge Holder (A).

7Remove the jammed staple.

8Install the Staple Cartridge Holder (A).

10-88

Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam

9Return the cover to the original position.

Clearing a Staple Jam of the Folding Unit

1Open the finisher front cover 1 and 2.

2Remove paper from inside the finisher.

10-89

Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam

3Remove the Staple Cartridge Holder (B) or (C).

4Remove the jammed staple.

5Install the Staple Cartridge Holder (B) or (C).

6Return the covers to the original position.

10-90

Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam

7Lift the folding tray.

8Remove any jammed paper.

9Press the release lever to pull the folding unit out.

10 Open the folding unit left cover.

10-91

Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam

11 Turn dial (D9).

12 Remove any jammed paper.

13 Return the folding unit left cover to the original position.

14 Open the folding unit top cover.

10-92

Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam

15 Turn dial (D9).

16 Remove any jammed paper.

17 Return the folding unit top cover to the original position.

18 Return the folding unit to the original position.

11-1

11 Appendix

This chapter explains the following topics:

Optional Equipment .......................................................................................................................................... 11-2

Overview of Optional Equipment ............................................................................................................ 11-2

Optional Applications .............................................................................................................................. 11-7

Starting Application Use .......................................................................................................................... 11-7

Checking Details of Application .............................................................................................................. 11-8

Character Entry Method .................................................................................................................................... 11-9

Entry Screens ......................................................................................................................................... 11-9

Entering Characters .............................................................................................................................. 11-11

Paper .............................................................................................................................................................. 11-12

Basic Paper Specifications ................................................................................................................... 11-12

Choosing the Appropriate Paper ........................................................................................................... 11-13

Special Paper ....................................................................................................................................... 11-15

Specifications .................................................................................................................................................. 11-19

Machine ................................................................................................................................................ 11-19

Printer Functions ................................................................................................................................... 11-21

Paper Feeder (500-sheet×2) ................................................................................................................ 11-22

Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2) ............................................................................................... 11-22

Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) .................................................................................................................... 11-22

1,000-Sheet Finisher ............................................................................................................................ 11-23

4,000-Sheet Finisher ............................................................................................................................ 11-24

Punch Unit (For 1,000-Sheet/4,000-Sheet Finisher) ............................................................................ 11-24

Mailbox ................................................................................................................................................. 11-25

Folding Unit ........................................................................................................................................... 11-25

Job Separator Tray ............................................................................................................................... 11-26

Banner Tray .......................................................................................................................................... 11-26

Glossary .......................................................................................................................................................... 11-27

11-2

Appendix > Optional Equipment

Optional Equipment

Overview of Optional Equipment

The following optional equipment is available for the machine.

* If the following option is installed, toppling prevention kit must be installed: PF-7100, PF-7110

(1) MT-730(B)

(3) DF-7120 (4) BF-730 (5) PF-7100* (6) PF-7110*

(7) PF-7120

(10) PH-7A, PH-7C,

PH-7D

(2) DF-7110

(8) Banner Guide 10

(9) JS-7100

11-3

Appendix > Optional Equipment

Software option

(17) Data Security Kit(E)

(18) UG-33

(19) UG-34

(20) USB Keyboard

(11) IB-50 (12) IB-51

(14) Key Counter

(16) Card

Authentication Kit(B)

(13) NK-7100, NK-7110 (15) IB-35

11-4

Appendix > Optional Equipment

(1) MT-730 (B) "Mailbox"

Makes it easy to sort output into separate trays. Installing this option adds 7 output trays. When multiple computer users

share the printer, each user can print to a specified tray. Installs on the 4,000-Sheet Finisher.

(2) DF-7110 "4,000-Sheet Finisher"

This is a large-capacity 4,000-Sheet Finisher capable of holding large print runs and of separating and offsetting multiple

copies of a printout into individual copies. It can also staple or hole-punch (optional) the offset printouts.

(3) DF-7120 "1,000-Sheet Finisher"

This is a document finisher capable of holding large print runs and of separating and offsetting multiple copies of a

printout into individual copies. It can also staple or hole-punch (optional) the offset printouts.

(4) BF-730 "Folding Unit"

Folds printed output at the center or in tri-fold to enable the creation of simple booklets. Installs on the 4,000-Sheet

Finisher.

(5) PF-7100 "Paper Feeder (500-sheet×2)"

Two additional cassettes identical to the machine’s cassette can be installed in the machine. Paper capacity and loading

method are the same as the standard cassettes.

Loading in Cassette 1 (page 3-4)

(6) PF-7110 "Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2)"

In addition to the machine’s cassettes, you can also install an optional large capacity feeder (1,500-sheet×2) capable of

holding up to 3,000 sheets of A4, B5 or Letter paper.

Loading in the Large Capacity Feeder (page 3-14)

(7) PF-7120 "Side Feeder (3,000-sheet)"

In addition to the machine’s cassettes, you can also install an optional side feeder (3,000-sheet) capable of holding up to

3,000 sheets of A4, B5 or Letter paper.

Loading in the Side Feeder (page 3-16)

(8) Banner Guide 10 "Banner Tray"

This tray enables continuous feeding of banner paper. Up to 10 sheets of banner paper can be loaded. To attach the tray

and load paper, refer to the following:

Using the Banner Tray (Option) (page 4-12)

NOTE

To deliver output to the mail box, change the Paper Output selection on the operation panel or in the printer driver, or

change in the default settings.

Paper Output (page 6-12)

11-5

Appendix > Optional Equipment

(9) JS-7100 "Job Separator"

Separate paper according to output tray for easier sorting. Specify as the output tray for print jobs. Or, specify as the

default output tray for printing from the Document Box screen, and printing from the PC.

(10) PH-7A, PH-7C, PH-7D "Punch Unit"

Attaches to the Document Finisher and is used to punch holes.

(11) IB-50 "Network Interface Kit"

The Network Interface Kit provides a high-speed connection for the Gigabit-per-second interface. This kit supports

traditional protocols such as AppleTalk, Netware and so on.

It also supports only the least functions in the standard utilities.

IB-50 User's Manual

(12) IB-51 "Wireless Network Interface Kit"

This is a wireless LAN interface card which supports the wireless LAN specifications IEEE802.11n (Max 300 Mbps) and

11 g/b. This supports traditional protocols such as AppleTalk, Netware and so on.

It also supports only the least functions in the standard utilities.

The IB-51 Steup utility supports Windows OS and Mac OS X.

IB-51 User's Manual

(13) NK-7100, NK-7110 "Numeric Keypad"

The numeric keypad is added to the operation panel. If the numeric keypad is installed, numeric keys do not appear on

the touch panel.

(14) Key Counter "Key Counter"

Use the key counter to monitor machine usage. The key counter offers a convenient solution for centralized

management of print volume for different departments in a large company.

Inserting the Key Counter

(15) IB-35 "Wireless Network Interface Kit"

This is a wireless LAN interface card which supports the wireless LAN specifications IEEE802.11n (max. 65 Mbps) and

IEEE802.11 g/b. In addition, network printing is possible without using the wireless LAN router because Wi-Fi Direct is

supported. IB-35 is standard for some models.

NOTE

To ensure that paper is delivered to the Job Separator, select the output destination or change the default setting.

Paper Output (page 6-12)

11-6

Appendix > Optional Equipment

(16) Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card Authentication Kit"

User login administration can be performed using ID cards. To do so, it is necessary to register ID card information on

the previously registered local user list. For more information about how to register this information, refer to the

following:

Card Authentication Kit(B) Operation Guide

(17) Data Security Kit(E) "Data Security Kit"

The Security Kit overwrites all unnecessary data in the data storage area after printing and deletion so that it cannot be

retrieved. The Security Kit encrypts and writes data in the hard disk/SSD. It guarantees higher security because no data

can be read (decoded) even in case of emergency.

(18) UG-33 "ThinPrint Option"

This application allows print data to be printed directly without a print driver.

(19) UG-34 "Emulation Upgrade Kit"

Enables emulation whereby the machine operates using commands for other printers. Installing this option enables IBM

Proprinter, Line Printer, and EPSON LQ-850 emulation.

(20) USB Keyboard "USB Keyboard"

A USB keyboard can be used to enter information into the text fields on the operation panel. A special mount is also

available to install the keyboard on the machine. Please contact your dealer or service representative for information on

keyboards that are compatible with your machine before you purchase one.

11-7

Appendix > Optional Equipment

Optional Applications

Overview of the Applications

The applications listed below are installed on this machine.

Starting Application Use

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > "Optional Function" [Next]

2Select the desired application > [Activate]

You can view detailed information on the selected application by selecting [Detail].

3Select [Official] in the license key entry screen.

Some applications do not require you to enter a license key. If the license key entry screen

does not appear, go to Step 5.

To use the application as a trial, select [Trial] without entering the license key.

4Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.

Application

Data Security Kit

Card Authentication Kit

ThinPrint Option*1

*1 This can be used on a trial basis for a limited time.

Emulation Upgrade Kit

NOTE

• Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ depending on the

application.

• If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will no longer be able to use the

application.

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password

and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. The factory

default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

Icons of activated application are displayed in the Home screen.

11-8

Appendix > Optional Equipment

Checking Details of Application

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/NetWork] > "Optional Function" [Next]

2Select the desired application and select [Detail].

You can view detailed information on the selected application.

The table below lists the item you can view.

Extend the trial period.

[Extend] > [Yes]

The trial period is extended.

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password

and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. The factory

default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Item

Function Name

License

Remaining Counts

Expiration Date

Status

11-9

Appendix > Character Entry Method

Character Entry Method

To enter characters for a name, use the on-display keyboard in the touch panel following the steps as explained below.

Entry Screens

Lower-case Letter Entry Screen

NOTE

Keyboard Layout

"QWERTY", "QWERTZ" and "AZERTY" are available as keyboard layouts the same as a PC keyboard. Select the

[System Menu/Counter] key, [Common Settings] and then [Keyboard Layout] to choose the desired layout.

"QWERTY" layout is used here as an example. You may use another layout following the same steps.

No. Display/Key Description

1Display Displays entered characters.

2[Upper-case] Select to use upper-case letters.

3[Lower-case] Select to use lower-case letters.

4[No./Symbol] Select to enter numbers and symbols.

5[Space] Select to insert a space.

6[Cancel] Select to cancel entered characters and return to the screen

before the entry.

7[OK] Select to finalize entry and return to the screen before the

entry.

8Keyboard Select a character to enter.

9[Backspace] Select to delete a character to the left of the cursor.

10 Limit Display Displays maximum number of characters.

11 Cursor Key Select to move the cursor on the display.

Status

Use the keyboard to enter.

Backspace

Upper-case Lower-case No./Symbol Space

Cancel OK

Lower-case

!@#$%^& * ( ) _+ ˜

QWE R T Y U I O P { }

ASDFGHJKL : "

ZXCVBNM<>?

Input: characters

Limit: characters

128

k0101_01_al

110

34 5 6 7

11-10

Appendix > Character Entry Method

Upper-case Letter Entry Screen

Number/Symbol Entry Screen

No. Display/Key Description

12 [ ]/[ ] To enter a number or symbol not shown in the keyboard,

select the cursor key and scroll the screen to view other

numbers or symbols to enter.

Status

Use the keyboard to enter.

Backspace

Upper-case Lower-case No./Symbol Space

Cancel OK

Lower-case

!@#$%^& * ( ) _+ ˜

QWE R T Y U I O P { }

ASDFGHJKL : "

ZXCVBNM<>?

Input: characters

Limit: characters

128

k0101_01_al

Status

Use the keyboard to enter.

Backspace

Upper-case Lower-case No./Symbol Space

Cancel OK

Lower-case

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ! " #

$%& ’ ( ) * + , - . / :

;<=>?@[ \ ]^_` {

|}˜

Input: characters

Limit: characters

k0101_02_al

11-11

Appendix > Character Entry Method

Entering Characters

Follow the steps below to enter 'List A-1' for an example.

1Select [Upper-case].

2Select [L]. The letter "L" is shown on the display.

3Select [Lower-case].

4Select [i], [s], [t] and [Space].

5Select [Upper-case].

6Select [A].

7Select [No./Symbol].

8Select [ ] or [ ] repeatedly to view the keyboard containing [-] and [1].

9Select [-] and [1].

10Check that the entry is correct. Press [OK].

Status

Use the keyboard to enter.

Backspace

Upper-case Lower-case No./Symbol Space

Cancel OK

Lower-case

!@#$%^& * ( ) _+ ˜

QWE R T Y U I O P { }

ASDFGHJKL : "

ZXCVBNM<>?

Input: characters

Limit: characters

k0101_03_al

Status

Use the keyboard to enter.

Backspace

Upper-case No./Symbol Space

Cancel OK

Lower-case

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ! = `

q w e r t y u i o p [ ]

a s d f g h j k l ; ’

z x c v b n m, . /

List Input: characters

Limit: characters

k0101_04_al

Status

Use the keyboard to enter.

Backspace

Upper-case Lower-case No./Symbol Space

Cancel OK

Lower-case

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ! " #

$%& ’ ( ) * + , - . / :

;<=>?@[ \ ]^_` {

|}˜

List_A-1 Input: characters

Limit: characters

k0101_05_al

11-12

Appendix > Paper

Paper

This section explains the paper sizes and types that can be used in the paper source.

For details on the sizes, types, and number of sheets of paper that can be loaded in each paper tray, refer to the

following:

Specifications (page 11-19)

Basic Paper Specifications

This machine is designed to print on standard copy paper as used in regular ('dry') copiers and page printers such as

laser printers. It also supports a variety of other types of paper that conform to the specifications given in this appendix.

Be careful when choosing paper. Paper unsuitable for the machine may cause jams or may be wrinkled.

Supported Paper

Use standard copy paper for regular copiers or laser printers. The printing quality will be affected by the quality of paper.

Poor quality paper may result in unsatisfactory output.

Basic Paper Specifications that can be Used with This Machine

The following table lists the specifications of paper that is supported with this machine. Refer to the subsequent sections

for further details.

We are not responsible for the problems occurred from the use of paper that does not conform to our specifications.

Criteria Specifications

Weight Cassettes: 52 to 300 g/m2

Multipurpose tray: 52 to 300 g/m2

Dimensional accuracy ±0.7 mm

Squareness of corners 90° ±0.2°

Moisture content 4 to 6%

Pulp content 80% or more

NOTE

Some recycled paper does not meet requirements for use with this machine as listed in the Basic Paper Specifications

shown below, such as moisture or pulp content. For this reason, we recommend purchasing a small amount of

recycled paper as a sample for testing prior to use. Choose recycled paper that gives the best printing results and

contains low levels of paper dust.

11-13

Appendix > Paper

Choosing the Appropriate Paper

This section describes guidelines for choosing paper.

Condition

Avoid using paper with bent corners or that is curled, dirty, or torn. Do not use paper that has a rough surface or paper

fiber lint, or that is especially delicate. Use of paper in any of these conditions will not only deliver poor copies but may

also cause jams and shorten the useful life of the machine. Choose paper with a smooth and even surface; however,

avoid coated paper or paper with a treated surface as it may damage the drum or fusing unit.

Ingredients

Do not use paper such as paper that has been coated or surface-treated or paper that contains plastic or carbon. Those

types of paper may produce harmful fumes from the heat of printing and may damage the drum.

Be sure to use the standard paper that contains at least 80% pulp, i.e., not more than 20% of the total paper content

consists of cotton or other fibers.

Smoothness

The paper surface should be smooth, but it must be uncoated. With paper that is too smooth and slippery, several

sheets may accidentally be supplied at once, causing jams.

Basis Weight

In countries that use the metric system, basis weight is the weight in grams of one sheet of paper one square meter in

area. In the United States, basis weight is the weight in pounds of one ream (500 sheets) of paper cut to the standard

size (or trade size) for a specific grade of paper. Paper that is too heavy or too light may be supplied incorrectly or cause

paper jams, which may cause excessive wear of the machine. Mixed paper weight (i.e., thickness) may cause several

sheets to be supplied at once accidentally and may also cause blurring or other printing problems if the toner fails to

adhere correctly.

Moisture Content

Paper moisture content is the ratio of moisture to dryness expressed as a percentage. Moisture affects how the paper is

supplied, the electrostatic chargeability of the paper, and how the toner adheres.

Paper moisture content varies depending on the relative humidity in the room. High relative humidity causes paper to

become damp, making the edges expand so it appears wavy. Low relative humidity causes paper to lose moisture,

making the edges tighten and weakening print contrast.

Wavy or tight edges may cause the paper to slip when it is supplied. Try to keep the moisture content between 4 to 6%.

To maintain the right level of moisture content, bear in mind the following considerations.

• Store paper in a cool, well-ventilated place.

• Store paper flat and unopened in the package. Once the package is opened, reseal it if the paper is not to be used for

a while.

• Store paper sealed in the original package and box. Put a pallet under the carton to keep it raised above the floor.

Especially during rainy seasons keep the paper a sufficient distance away from wooden or concrete floors.

• Before using paper that has been stored, keep it at the proper moisture level for at least 48 hours.

• Do not store paper where it is exposed to heat, sunlight, or dampness.

11-14

Appendix > Paper

Other Paper Specifications

Porosity: The density of the paper fibers.

Stiffness: Paper must be stiff enough or it may buckle in the machine, causing jams.

Curl: Most paper naturally tends to curl after the package is opened. When paper passes through the fixing unit, it curls

upward slightly. To deliver flat printouts, load the paper so that the curl faces towards the bottom of the paper tray.

Static electricity: During printing, paper is electrostatically charged so that the toner adheres. Choose paper that can be

discharged quickly so that copies do not cling together.

Whiteness: Paper whiteness affects print contrast. Use whiter paper for sharper, brighter copies.

Quality: Machine problems may occur if sheet sizes are not uniform or if corners are not square, edges are rough,

sheets are uncut, or edges or corners are crushed. In order to prevent these problems, be especially careful when you

cut the paper yourself.

Packaging: Choose paper that is properly packaged and stacked in boxes. Ideally, the packaging itself should have

been treated with a coating to inhibit moisture.

Specially treated paper: We do not recommend printing onto the following types of paper, even if it conforms to the

basic specifications. When you use these kinds of paper, purchase a small amount first as a sample to test.

• Glossy paper

• Watermarked paper

• Paper with an uneven surface

• Perforated paper

Paper Sizes that can be Used with This Machine

Paper of the following sizes is supported by the machine.

Measurements in the table take into account a ±0.7 mm dimensional accuracy for length and width. Corner angles must

be 90° ± 0.2°.

• A3 (297 × 420 mm) *1

• A4 (297 × 210 mm)

• A5 (210 × 148 mm)

• A6 (148 × 105 mm)

• B4 (257 × 364 mm) *1

• B5 (257 × 182 mm)

• B6 (182 × 128 mm)

• 216×340 mm*1

• SRA3 (320 × 450 mm) *1

• Ledger*1

•Letter

• Legal

• Statement

• Executive (7-1/4 × 10-1/2")

• 12×18" (304.8 × 457 mm) *1

• Oficio II

• Folio (210 × 330 mm)

• 8K (273 × 394 mm) *1

• 16K (273 × 197 mm)

*1 This paper cannot be used in cassette 1.

• ISO B5 (176 × 250 mm)

• Envelope #10 (4-1/8 × 9-1/2")

• Envelope #9 (3-7/8 × 8-7/8")

• Envelope #6 3/4 (3-5/8 × 6-1/2")

• Envelope Monarch (3-7/8 × 7-1/2")

• Envelope DL (110 × 220 mm)

• Envelope C5 (162 × 229 mm)

• Envelope C4 (229 × 324 mm) *1

• Hagaki (Cardstock) (100 × 148 mm)

• Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard) (148 × 200 mm)

• Youkei 4 (105 × 235 mm)

• Youkei 2 (114 × 162 mm)

•Custom

Cassette 1: 98 × 148 to 297 × 356 mm

Cassette 2 to 4: 98 × 148 to 320 × 457 mm*2

Multipurpose Tray: 98 × 148 to 320 × 457 mm

*2 The Paper Feeder (500-sheets×2) can only be used for cassettes 3 and 4.

11-15

Appendix > Paper

Special Paper

This section describes printing onto special paper and print media.

Special Paper that can be Used with This Machine

• Transparencies

• Preprinted paper

• Bond paper

• Recycled paper

• Thin paper

• Letterhead

• Colored paper

• Prepunched paper

• Envelopes

• Hagaki (Cardstock)

• Thick paper

• Labels

•Coated

• High-quality paper

• Index tab dividers (136 to 256 g/m2)

When using these paper and media, choose those that are designed specifically for copiers or page printers (such as

laser printers). Use the multipurpose tray for transparencies, label paper, coated paper and index tab dividers.

Choosing Special Paper

Although special paper that meets the following requirements can be used with the machine, print quality will vary

considerably due to differences in the construction and quality of special paper. Thus, special paper is more likely than

regular paper to cause printing problems. Before purchasing special paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the

print quality is satisfactory. General precautions when printing onto special paper are given below. Note that we are not

responsible for any harm to the user or damage to the machine caused by moisture or specifications of special paper.

Select a cassette or multipurpose tray for special paper.

Transparencies

Transparencies must be able to withstand the heat of printing. Transparencies must meet the following conditions.

To avoid problems, use the multipurpose tray for transparencies and load transparencies with the long side facing the

machine.

If transparencies jam frequently at output, try pulling the leading edge of sheets gently as they are ejected.

Heat resistance Must withstand at least 190°C

Thickness 0.100 to 0.110 mm

Material Polyester

Dimensional

accuracy

±0.7 mm

Squareness of

corners

90° ±0.2°

11-16

Appendix > Paper

Label

Be sure to feed labels from the multipurpose tray.

For selecting labels, use extreme care so that the adhesive may not come in direct contact with any part of the machine

and that the labels are not easily peeled from the carrier sheet. Adhesives that stick to the drum or rollers and peeled

labels remaining in the machine may cause a failure.

When printing onto labels, you must be liable for the print quality and possible trouble.

Labels consist of three layers as shown in the illustration. The adhesive layer contains materials that are easily affected

by the force applied in the machine. The carrier sheet bears the top sheet until the label is used. This composition of

labels may cause more problems.

The label surface must be covered completely with the top sheet. Gaps between labels may cause peeling of labels,

resulting in a serious failure.

Some label paper has large margins on the top sheet. When using such paper, do not peel these margins from the

carrier sheet before completing output.

Use label paper that conforms to the following specifications.

Top sheet weight 44 to 74 g/m²

Basis weight

(overall paper weight)

104 to 151 g/m²

Top sheet thickness 0.086 to 0.107 mm

Overall paper thickness 0.115 to 0.145 mm

Moisture content 4 to 6 % (composite)

Top sheet

Adhesive

Carrier sheet

Not allowedAllowed

Top sheet

Carrier

11-17

Appendix > Paper

Hagaki (Cardstock)

Before loading Hagaki (Cardstock), fan them and align the edges. Hagaki (Cardstock) should be fed from the

multipurpose tray with the print-side down or the cassette and the optional paper feeder with the print-side up. If the

Hagaki (Cardstock) paper is curled, straighten it before loading. Printing onto curled Hagaki (Cardstock) may cause

jams.

Use unfolded Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard) (available at post offices). Some Hagaki (Cardstock) may still have rough

edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges by placing the Hagaki (Cardstock)

on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler.

Envelopes

Envelopes should be fed from the multipurpose tray with the print-side down or the cassette and the optional paper

feeder with the print-side up.

Due to the structure of envelopes, printing evenly over the entire surface may not be possible in some cases. Thin

envelopes in particular may be wrinkled by the machine in some cases as they pass through. Before purchasing

envelopes in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the print quality.

Storing envelopes for a long period may cause them to become wrinkled. Thus, keep the package sealed until you are

ready to use them.

Keep the following points in mind.

• Do not use envelopes with exposed adhesive. In addition, do not use the type of envelope in which the adhesive is

exposed after the top layer is peeled off. Serious damage may be caused if the paper covering the adhesive comes

off in the machine.

• Do not use envelopes with certain special features. For example, do not use envelopes with a grommet for winding a

string to close the flap or envelopes with an open or film-covered window.

• If paper jams occur, load fewer envelopes at once.

Thick Paper

Before loading thick paper, fan it and align the edges. Some thick paper may still have rough edges developed by a

paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges just as with Hagaki (Cardstock) by placing the paper on a

flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler. Printing onto paper with rough edges may cause jams.

NOTE

Do not load paper above the load limits located on the paper width guide of the cassette and the optional paper

feeder.

NOTE

If the paper is not supplied correctly even after it is smoothed, load the paper with the leading edge raised a few

millimeters.

Burrs

11-18

Appendix > Paper

Colored Paper

Colored paper must conform to the specifications.

Basic Paper Specifications (page 11-12)

In addition, the pigments in the paper must be able to withstand the heat of printing (up to 200°C or 392°F).

Preprinted Paper

Preprinted paper must conform to the specifications.

Basic Paper Specifications (page 11-12)

The colored ink must be able to withstand the heat of printing. It must be resistant to silicone oil as well. Do not use

paper with a treated surface such as glossy paper used for calendars.

Recycled Paper

Recycled paper must conform to the specifications; however, its whiteness may be considered separately.

Basic Paper Specifications (page 11-12)

Coated Paper

Coated paper is created by treating the surface of the base paper with a coating that provides higher printing quality than

plain paper. Coated paper is used for particularly high quality printing.

The surface of high-quality or medium-quality paper is coated with special agents that improve ink adhesion by making

the paper surface smoother. These agents are used either to coat both sides of the paper or just one side. The coated

side appears slightly glossy.

NOTE

Before purchasing recycled paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure satisfactory print quality.

IMPORTANT

When printing on coated paper in very humid environments, ensure that the paper is kept dry as moisture

may cause sheets to stick together when they are fed into the machine. If printing in very humid

environments, set coated paper for one sheet each.

11-19

Appendix > Specifications

Specifications

Machine

IMPORTANT

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Item Description

Type Desktop

Printing Method Electrophotography by semiconductor laser

Paper Weight Cassette 52 to 300 g/m2

Multipurpose

Tray

52 to 300 g/m2

Paper Type Cassette

Plain, Rough, Vellum, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond,

Cardstock,

Color,

Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick, High Quality, Custom

(Duplex: Same as Simplex)

Multipurpose

Tray

Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted,

Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick, High

Quality, Coated, Index Tab Dividers, Custom 1 to 8

Paper Size Cassette 1 A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, Folio, 16K,

ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch,

Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return

postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom (98 × 148 mm to 297 × 356 mm)

Cassette 2 A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Letter, Legal,

Statement, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10,

Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,

Envelope C4, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4,

Youkei 2, Custom (98 × 148 mm to 320 × 457 mm)

Multipurpose

Tray

A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Letter, Legal,

Statement, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10,

Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,

Envelope C4, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4,

Youkei 2, Custom (98 × 148 mm to 320 × 457 mm)

Banner sheet (210 × 470.1 to 304.8 × 1,220 mm/8.26" × 18.5" to 12" × 48")

Printable Area Print margin for top, bottom and both sides is 4 mm

Warm-up Time

(22°C/71.6°F,

60%)

Power on 17 seconds or less

Low Power 15 seconds or less

Sleep 17 seconds or less

Paper Capacity Cassette 500 sheets (80 g/m2)*1

Multipurpose

Tray

150 sheets (A4/Letter or smaller) (80 g/m2),

50 sheets (larger than A4/Letter) (80 g/m2)

1 sheet (Banner sheet (210 × 470.1 to 304.8 × 1,220 mm/8.26" × 18.5" to

12" × 48")) (136 to 163 g/m2)

11-20

Appendix > Specifications

Output Tray

Capacity

Main tray 500 sheets (80 g/m2)

Image Write System Semiconductor laser and electrophotography

Memory 4.0 GB

Large Capacity Storage SSD 8 GB/Hard Disk 320 GB

Interface Standard USB Interface Connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)

Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T (IPv6, IPv4,

IPSec), 802.3a supported)

USB Port: 4 (Hi-Speed USB)

Option eKUIO: 2

Wireless LAN: 1*2

Operating

Environment

Temperature 10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F

Humidity 10 to 80 %

Altitude 3,500 m/11,482 ft maximum

Brightness 1,500 lux maximum

Dimension (W × D × H) 23.71 " × 26.19" × 31.11"

602 × 665 × 790 mm

Weight Approx. 169 lb/Approx. 76.9 kg (without toner container)

Space Required (W × D)

(Using multipurpose tray)

36.23" × 26.19"

920 × 665 mm

Power Source 120 V Specification Model: 120 V 60 Hz 12 A

230 V Specification Model: 220 to 240 V 50/60 Hz 7.2 A

The power consumption of the

product in networked standby (If

all network ports are connected.)

The information is available at the website below.

(https://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.eu/en/about-us/our-brand/

environmental-policy.html)

Options Optional Equipment (page 11-2)

*1 Up to upper limit height line in the cassette.

*2 This is standard for some models.

Item Description

11-21

Appendix > Specifications

Printer Functions

Item Description

Printing Speed A4/Letter

A4-R/Letter-R

A3/Ledger

Legal

B5-R

A5-R

A6-R

12×18"/SRA3

60 sheets/min

42 sheets/min

30 sheets/min

36 sheets/min

60 sheets/min

42 sheets/min

30 sheets/min

First Print Time (A4, feed from

Cassette)

3.8 seconds or less

Resolution 4800 dpi equivalent × 1200 dpi

Operating System Windows 7, Windows 8.1, Windows 10, Windows Server 2008/R2, Windows

Server 2012/R2, Windows Server 2016, Windows Server 2019, Mac OS X 10.9

or later

Interface USB Interface Connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)

Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T (IPv6, IPv4,

IPSec), 802.3a supported)

Optional Interface (Option): 2 (For IB-50/IB-51 mounting)

Wireless LAN (Option): 1 (For IB-35 mounting)*1

*1 This is standard for some models.

Page Description Language PRESCRIBE

Emulations PCL6 (PCL-XL, PCL-5c), KPDL3 (PostScript3 compatible), PDF, XPS,

OpenXPS

11-22

Appendix > Specifications

Paper Feeder (500-sheet×2)

Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2)

Side Feeder (3,000-sheet)

Item Description

Paper Supply Method Friction roller feeder

(No. Sheets: 550, 64 g/m2, 2 cassettes/

No. Sheets: 500, 80 g/m2, 2 cassettes)

Paper Size A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Letter, Legal,

Statement, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10,

Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,

Envelope C4, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4,

Youkei 2, Custom (98 × 148 mm to 320 × 457 mm)

Supported Paper Paper weight: 52 to 300 g/m2

Media types: Plain, Recycled, Special paper

Dimensions (W × D × H) 23.63" × 26.19" × 12.73"

600 × 665 × 323.2 mm

Weight Approx. 50.8 lbs. / Approx. 23 kg

Item Description

Paper Supply Method Friction roller feeder

(No. Sheets: 1,750, 64 g/m2, 2 cassettes/

No. Sheets: 1,500, 80 g/m2, 2 cassettes)

Paper Size A4,B5, Letter

Supported Paper Paper weight: 52 to 300 g/m2

Media types: Plain, Recycled, Special paper

Dimensions (W × D × H) 23.63" × 26.19" × 12.73"

600 × 665 × 323.2 mm

Weight Approx. 66.2 lbs. / Approx. 30 kg

Item Description

Paper Supply Method Feed & reverse roller method

(No. Sheets: 3,500, 64 g/m2/ No. Sheets: 3,750, 80 g/m2)

Paper Size A4,B5, Letter

Supported Paper Paper weight: 52 to 300 g/m2

Media types: Plain, Recycled, Special paper

Dimensions (W × D × H) 13.82" × 23.04" × 18.47"

351 × 585 × 469 mm

Weight Approx. 58.5 lbs. / Approx. 26.5 kg

11-23

Appendix > Specifications

1,000-Sheet Finisher

Item Description

Number of Trays 1 tray

Paper Size

(80 g/m2)

Finisher tray

(Non-stapling)

A3, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B6-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Legal, Statement-R,

Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-R: 500

sheets

A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K: 1,000

sheets

Supported Paper Weight Stapling: 90 g/m2 or less

Stapling Number of

Sheets

A3, B4, B5-R,

216×340 mm, Ledger,

Legal, 12×18", Oficio II,

16K-R, 8K

30 sheets (52 to 105 g/m2)

2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m2)

A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R,

Letter, 16K

50 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2)

40 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)

2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m2)

Media types Plain, Recycled, Prepunched, Preprinted, Bond, Letterhead, Color, Coated,

Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8

Dimensions (W × D × H) 21.58" × 24.36" × 41.34"

548 × 618.5 × 1,050 mm

Weight Approx. 66.2 lbs. or less / Approx. 30 kg or less

Space Required (W × D)

(When pulling the tray)

26.23" × 24.36"

666 × 618.5 mm

11-24

Appendix > Specifications

4,000-Sheet Finisher

Punch Unit (For 1,000-Sheet/4,000-Sheet Finisher)

Item Description

Number of Trays 2 trays

Paper

Size

(80 g/m2)

Tray A (Non-Stapling) A3, B4, B5-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Legal, Executive, 12×18",

Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-R: 1,500

sheets

A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K: 4,000

sheets

A5-R, B6-R, Statement-R: 500

sheets

Tray B A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3,

Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II,

Folio, 8K, 16K-R, 16K, ISO B5, Cardstock, Oufuku hagaki (Return

postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2: 200 sheets

Supported Paper Weight Stapling: 90 g/m2 or less

Stapling

Maximum

Number A3, B4, B5-R,

216×340 mm, Ledger,

Legal, 12×18", Oficio II,

8K, 16K-R

30 sheets (52 to 105 g/m2)

2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m2)

A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R,

Letter, 16K

65 sheets (52 to 90 g/m2)

55 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)

2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m2)

Media types Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, Letterhead, Color, Prepunched, Thick,

Coated, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8

Dimensions (W × D × H) 23.91" × 26.32" × 41.79"

607.2 × 668.5 × 1,061.3 mm

Weight Approx. 88.2 lbs. or less / Approx. 40 kg or less

Space Required (W × D)

(When pulling the tray)

28.55" × 26.32"

725 × 668.5 mm

Item Description

Paper

Size

Inch 2 Hole A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal,

Statement-R, 12×18", Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R

3 Hole A3, A4, Letter, Ledger, 12×18", 8K, 16K

cm 2 Hole A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal,

Statement-R, 12×18", Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R

4 Hole A3, A4, Letter, Ledger, 12×18", 8K, 16K

Paper Weight 45 - 300 g/m2

Media types Plain, Rough, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, Letterhead, Color, Thick, Coated,

High Quality, Custom 1 to 8

11-25

Appendix > Specifications

Mailbox

Folding Unit

Item Description

Number of Trays 7 trays

Paper Size

(80 g/m2)

A3, B4, Ledger, Legal, 8K: 50 sheets

A4-R, A4, A5-R, B5-R, B5, 216×340 mm, Letter-R, Letter, Statement-R,

Executive, Oficio II, Folio, 16K-R, 16K: 100 sheets

Dimensions (W × D × H) 20.08" × 15.75" × 18.51"

510 × 400 × 470 mm

Weight Approx. 22.1 lbs. / Approx. 10 kg

Item Description

Sizes Bi-Fold A3, B4, A4-R, Ledger, Legal, Letter-R, Oficio II, 8K

Saddle Stitch A3, B4, A4-R, Ledger, Letter-R, Legal, Oficio II, 8K

Tri-Fold A4-R, Letter-R

Number of Sheets Bi-Fold 5 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)

3 sheets (91 to 120 g/m2)

1 sheet (121 to 256 g/m2)

Saddle Stitch 16 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)

13 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)

1 cover sheet only (106 g/m2 or heavier)

Tri-Fold 5 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)

3 sheets (91 to 120 g/m2)

Maximum Number for Storage

(80 g/m2)

Bi-Fold 5 sheets or less per set: 30 sets or more

6 to 10 sheets per set: 20 sets or more

11 to 16 sheets per set: 10 sets or more.

Saddle Stitch 5 sheets or less per set: 30 sets or more

6 to 10 sheets per set: 20 sets or more

11 to 16 sheets per set: 10 sets or more.

Tri-Fold 1 sheet per set: 30 sets or more

2 to 5 sheets per set: 5 sets or more

Media types Bi-Fold Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color,

Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, Coated,

High Quality, Custom 1 to 8

Saddle Stitch Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color,

Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, Coated,

High Quality, Custom 1 to 8

Tri-Fold Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color,

Prepunched, Letterhead, Coated, High Quality,

Custom 1 to 8

11-26

Appendix > Specifications

Job Separator Tray

Banner Tray

Item Description

Number of Trays 1 tray

Maximum Sheets 100 Sheets (80 g/m2)

Paper Size A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3,

Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio,

8K, 16K-R, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope

Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4, Hagaki (Cardstock),

Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom (98 × 148 to

304.8 × 1,220 mm)

Paper Type Paper weight: 52 to 300 g/m2

Media types: Plain, Recycled, Special paper

Dimensions (W × D × H) 18.90" × 16.93" × 3.94"

480 × 430 × 100 mm

Weight Approx. 1.4 lbs. / Approx. 0.6 kg

Item Description

Max. number of sheets 10 sheets (Multipurpose tray)

Paper length 210 to 304.8 mm (8.26" to 12")

Paper width Max. 1220.0 mm (48")

Paper Type Paper weight: 136 to 163 g/m2

Paper type: Heavy 2

Dimensions (W × D × H) 15.78" × 15.67" × 7.63"

400.6 × 397.8 × 193.6 mm

Weight Approx. 1.2 lbs. / Approx. 0.5 kg

NOTE

Consult your dealer or service representative for recommended paper types.

11-27

Appendix > Glossary

Glossary

Apple Talk

AppleTalk offers file sharing and printer sharing and it also enables you to utilize application software that is on another

computer on the same AppleTalk network.

Auto Form Feed Timeout

During data transmission, the machine may sometimes have to wait until receiving the next data. This is the auto form

feed timeout. When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically prints output. However, no output is

performed if the last page has no data to be printed.

Auto-IP

Auto-IP is a module that enables dynamic IPv4 addresses to be assigned to a device on startup. However, DHCP

requires a DHCP server. Auto-IP is a server-less method of choosing an IP address. IP addresses between 169.254.0.0

to 169.254.255.255 are reserved for Auto-IP and assigned automatically.

Auto Paper Selection

A function to automatically select paper in the same size as originals when printing.

Auto Sleep

A mode designed for electrical power saving, activated when the machine is left unused or there is no data transfer for a

specific period. In Sleep mode, power consumption is kept to a minimum.

Bonjour

Bonjour, also known as zero-configuration networking, is a service that automatically detects computers, devices and

services on an IP network. Bonjour, because an industry-standard IP protocol is used, allows devices to automatically

recognize each other without an IP address being specified or DNS server being set. Bonjour also sends and receives

network packets by UDP port 5353. If a firewall is enabled, the user must check that UDP port 5353 is left open so that

Bonjour will run correctly. Some firewalls are set up so as to reject only certain Bonjour packets. If Bonjour does not run

stably, check the firewall settings and ensure that Bonjour is registered on the exceptions list and that Bonjour packets

are accepted. If you install Bonjour on Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later, the Windows firewall will be set up correctly

for Bonjour.

Custom Box

The Custom Box function stores print data for each individual user on the printer and allows the user to print single or

multiple copies of the stored data later using the printer's operation panel.

Default Gateway

This indicates the device, such as a computer or router, that serves as the entrance/exit (gateway) for accessing

computers outside the network that you are on. When no specific gateway is designated for a destination IP address,

data is sent to the host designated as the Default Gateway.

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) that automatically resolves IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateway

addresses on a TCP/IP network. DHCP minimizes the load of network management employing a large number of client

computers because it relieves individual clients including printers from the IP address being assigned.

11-28

Appendix > Glossary

DHCP (IPv6)

DHCP (IPv6) is the next-generation of the Internet's Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol and supports IPv6. It extends

the BOOTP startup protocol that defines the protocols used for transferring configuration information to hosts on the

network. DHCP (IPv6) permits the DHCP server to use its expanded functionality to send configuration parameters to an

IPv6 node. Because the network addresses that can be used are allocated automatically, the IPv6 node management

workload is reduced in systems where the administrator has to exercise close control over IP address allocation.

dpi (dots per inch)

A unit for resolution, representing the number of dots printed per inch (25.4 mm).

EcoPrint Mode

A printing mode that helps save toner. Copies made in this mode are thus lighter than normal.

Emulation

The function to interpret and execute other printers' page description languages. The machine emulates operation of

PCL6, KPDL3 (PostScript 3 compatible).

Enhanced WSD

Kyocera's proprietary web services.

FTP (File Transfer Protocol)

A protocol to transfer files on the TCP/IP network, whether the Internet or an intranet. Along with HTTP and SMTP/POP,

FTP is now frequently used on the Internet.

Grayscale

A computer color expression. Displayed images of this sort are typically composed of shades of gray, varying from black

at the weakest intensity to white at the strongest, without any other colors. Gray levels are displayed in numerical levels:

that is, white and black only for 1 bit; 256 gray levels (including white and black) for 8 bits; and 65,536 gray levels for 16

bits.

Help

A ? (Help) key is provided on this machine's operation panel. If you are unsure of how to operate the machine, would like

more information on its functions or are having problems getting the machine to work properly, press the ? (Help) key to

view a detailed explanation on the touch panel.

IP Address

An Internet protocol address is a unique number that represents a specific computer or related device on the network.

The format of an IP address is four sets of numbers separated by dots, e.g. 192.168.110.171. Each number should be

between 0 and 255.

IPP

IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) is a standard that uses TCP/IP networks such as the Internet to enable print jobs to be

sent between remote computers and printers. IPP is an extension of the HTTP protocol used to view websites and

enables printing to be carried out via routers on printers in remote locations. It also supports the HTTP authentication

mechanisms along with SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption.

11-29

Appendix > Glossary

Job Box

The Job Box function stores print data on the printer and allows users to print single or multiple copies of the stored data

later using the printer's operation panel.

KPDL (Kyocera Page Description Language)

Kyocera's PostScript page description language compatible with Adobe PostScript Level 3.

Multipurpose (MP) Tray

The paper supply tray on the front side of the machine. Use this tray instead of the cassettes when printing onto

envelopes, Hagaki (Cardstock), transparencies, or labels.

NetBEUI (NetBIOS Extended User Interface)

An interface, developed by IBM in 1985, as an update from NetBIOS. It enables more advanced functions on smaller

networks than other protocols such as TCP/IP, etc. It is not suitable for larger networks due to lack of routing capabilities

to choose the most appropriate routes. NetBEUI has been adopted by IBM for its OS/2 and Microsoft for its Windows as

a standard protocol for file sharing and printing services.

Outline font

With outline fonts, character outlines are represented with numerical expressions and fonts can be enlarged or reduced

in different ways by changing the numeric values of those expressions. Printing remains clear even if you enlarge fonts,

since the characters are defined with outlines represented with numerical expressions. You can specify the font size in

steps of 0.25 points up to 999.75 points.

POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3)

A standard protocol to receive E-mail from the server in which the mail is stored on the Internet or an intranet.

PostScript

A page description language developed by Adobe Systems. It enables flexible font functions and highly-functional

graphics, allowing higher quality printing. The first version called Level 1 was launched in 1985, followed by Level 2 that

enabled color printing and two-byte languages (e.g. Japanese) in 1990. In 1996, Level 3 was released as an update for

the Internet access and PDF format as well as gradual improvements in implementation technologies.

PPM (prints per minute)

This indicates the number of A4 size printouts made in one minute.

Printer Driver

The software to enable you to print data created on any application software. The printer driver for the machine is

contained in the DVD enclosed in the package. Install the printer driver on the computer connected to the machine.

RA (Stateless)

The IPv6 router communicates (transmits) information such as the global address prefix using ICMPv6. This information

is the Router Advertisement (RA).

ICMPv6 stands for Internet Control Message Protocol, and is a IPv6 standard defined in the RFC 2463 "Internet Control

Message Protocol (ICMPv6) for the Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) Specification".

11-30

Appendix > Glossary

RAM Disk

Using part of the printer's memory as a virtual disk, you can set any amount of memory from overall printer memory as a

RAM disk in order to use features such as electronic sorting (shortening print time).

SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)

A protocol for E-mail transmission over the Internet or an intranet. It is used for transferring mail between mail servers as

well as for sending mail from clients to their servers.

Status Page

The page lists machine conditions, such as the memory capacity, total number of prints, and paper source settings.

Subnet Mask

The subnet mask is a way of augmenting the network address section of an IP address.

A subnet mask represents all network address sections as 1 and all host address sections as 0. The number of bits in

the prefix indicates the length of the network address. The term "prefix" refers to something added to the beginning and,

in this context, indicates the first section of the IP address. When an IP address is written, the length of the network

address is indicated by the prefix length after a forward slash (/). For example, "24" in the address "133.210.2.0/24". In

this way, "133.210.2.0/24" denotes the IP address "133.210.2.0" with a 24-bit prefix (network section). This new network

address section (originally part of the host address) made possible by the subnet mask is referred to as the subnet

address. When you enter the subnet mask, be sure to set the "DHCP" setting to "Off".

TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol)

TCP/IP is a suite of protocols designed to define the way computers and other devices communicate with each other

over a network.

TCP/IP (IPv6)

TCP/IP (IPv6) is based on the current Internet protocol, TCP/IP (IPv4). IPv6 is the next-generation Internet protocol and

expands the available address space, which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under IPv4, while also

introducing other improvements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to prioritize data transmission.

USB (Universal Serial Bus) 2.0

A USB interface standard for Hi-Speed USB 2.0. The maximum transfer rate is 480 Mbps. This machine is equipped with

USB 2.0 for high-speed data transfer.

WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)

WPS is a network security standard created by Wi-Fi Alliance, to make it easy to connect with the wireless devices and

set up the Wi-Fi Protected Access. The WPS-supported services can connect to the wireless access points by pushing

a button or entering passphrases.

Index-1

Index

Numerics

1,000-Sheet Finisher 11-4

4,000-Sheet Finisher 11-4

Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle 2-11

Adjustment/Maintenance 8-53, 10-34

Auto Drum Refresh 8-53

Calibration 8-54, 10-34

Calibration Cycle 8-54

Developer Refresh 8-54, 10-35

Display Brightness 8-54

Drum Heater 8-53

Drum Refresh 8-53, 10-34

Laser Scanner Cleaning 8-53, 10-34

Memory Diagnostics 8-54

Silent Mode 8-54

System Initialization 8-54

AirPrint 4-16

Apache License (Version 2.0) 1-13

AppleTalk 11-27

Application 5-9, 8-55

Auto Error Clear 8-50

Auto Form Feed Timeout 11-27

Auto Panel Reset 8-50

Auto Paper Selection 11-27

Auto Sleep 2-35, 11-27

Auto-IP 11-27

Settings 8-33, 8-35

Automatic 2-Sided Print Function 1-16

Banner Printing 4-9

Banner Tray 11-4

Using 4-12

Bates Stamp 6-24

Bluetooth Settings 8-48

Bonjour 11-27

Settings 8-37

Booklet 6-16

Buzzer 8-9

Cables 2-6

Canceling Jobs 5-14

Canceling Printing 4-15

Card Authentication Kit 11-6

Cardstock 11-17

Cassette

Loading Envelopes or Cardstock 3-10

Loading Paper 3-4, 3-7

Paper Size and Media Type 8-6

Cassette 1 2-2

Cassette 2 2-2

Cassette 3 2-5

Cassette 4 2-5

Cassette 5 2-5

Cassette/MP Tray Settings 8-6

Centering 6-15

Character Entry Method 11-9

Checking the Counter 2-48

Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner 7-12

Coated Paper 11-18

Collate/Offset 6-8

Default 8-15

Colored Paper 11-18

Combine 6-14

Command Center RX 2-51

Common Settings 8-9

Buzzer 8-9

Customize Status Display 8-20

Default Screen 8-9

Display Status/Log 8-20

Error Handling 8-13

Function Defaults 8-15

Function Key Assignment 8-15

Language 8-9

Low Toner Alert Level 8-19

Manual Staple 8-18

Measurement 8-12

Message Banner Print 8-20

Message Board Settings 8-21

Numeric Keypad Settings 8-21

Offset Documents by Job 8-18

Offset One Page Documents 8-19

Paper Output 8-14

Paper Settings 8-10

Show Power Off Message 8-22

System Stamp 8-16

Toner Waste Full Alert 8-19

USB Keyboard Type 8-16

Connecting

LAN Cable 2-7

Power Cable 2-8

USB cable 2-8

Connection Method 2-6

Control Section of the Finisher 2-5

Conventions Used in This Guide xiv

Counting the Number of Pages Printed

Count by Paper Size 9-29

Counter 2-48

Each Job Account 9-31

Print Accounting Report 9-32

Total Accounting 9-30

Unknown ID Job 9-35

Cover 6-19

Custom Box 5-15, 11-27

Creating a New Custom Box 5-21

Deleting Custom Box 5-23

Deleting Documents 5-25

Editing Custom Box 5-22

Moving Documents 5-25

Printing Documents 5-24

Storing Documents 5-23

Customize Status Display 8-20

Index-2

Data Sanitization 8-48

Data Security 8-47

Data Security Kit 11-6

Date Format 8-50

Date/Time 8-50

Date/Timer/Energy Saver 8-50

Auto Error Clear 8-50

Auto Panel Reset 8-50

Date Format 8-50

Date/Time 8-50

EnergySaver RecoveryLevel 8-52

Error Clear Timer 8-51

Error Job Skip 8-51

Low Power Timer 8-50

Panel Reset Timer 8-50

Ping Timeout 8-51

Sleep Level 8-52

Sleep Rules 8-51

Sleep Timer 8-51

Time Zone 8-50

Weekly Timer Settings 8-52

Default

Collate/Offset 8-15

EcoPrint 8-15

File Name Entry 8-15

JPEG/TIFF Print 8-16

Margin 8-15

Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) 8-15

XPS Fit to Page 8-16

Zoom 8-15

Default Gateway 11-27

Settings 8-33, 8-35

Default Screen 8-9

Delete after Printed 6-26

Developer Refresh 8-54, 10-35

Device 7-11

Device Information 2-16

DHCP 11-27

Settings 8-33, 8-35

DHCP (IPv6) 11-28

Settings 8-34, 8-36

Display Setting Screen 2-16

Display Status/Log 8-20

Disposing of the Punch Waste

1,000-Sheet Finisher 10-12

4,000-Sheet Finisher 10-13

Document Box

Basic Operation 5-16

Custom Box 5-15

Job Box 4-18, 5-15

Document Box/Removable Memory

Custom Box 8-22

Job Box 8-22

Quick Setup Registration 8-22

dpi 11-28

Drum Refresh 8-53, 10-34

Duplex 6-18

EcoPrint 6-13, 11-28

Default 8-15

Printer 8-23

E-mail Settings 2-55

Emulation 11-28

Selection 8-23

Emulation Upgrade Kit 11-6

Encrypted PDF Password 6-26

Energy Saver Recovery Level 2-35, 8-52

Energy Saving Control Function 1-16

Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program 1-16

Enhanced VNC over SSL

Protocol Settings 8-41

Enhanced WSD 11-28

Protocol Settings 8-39

Enhanced WSD over SSL

Protocol Settings 8-39

Enter key 2-20

Entering Numbers 2-19

Entry

File Name 6-25

Envelope Feed Guide 3-10

Envelope Stack Guide 3-18

Envelopes 11-17

Environment 1-3

Error Clear Timer 8-51

Error Handling 8-13

Duplexing Error 8-13

Finished Pages Exceeded 8-13

Finishing Error 8-13

Inserted Paper Mismatch 8-14

No Staple Error 8-13

Paper Jam before Staple 8-14

Paper Mismatch Error 8-13

Punch Waste Full Error 8-13

File Name Entry 6-25

Default 8-15

Finisher Tray 2-5

First Print Time 11-21

First Printed Side Support 2-2

Fold 6-7

Folding Tray 2-5

Folding Unit 11-4

Form Overlay 6-20

Front Cover 2-2

FTP 11-28

FTP Server (Reception)

Protocol Settings 8-38

Function Key Assignment 2-12, 8-15

Functions Key 2-17

Glossary 11-27

Google Cloud Print 4-16

GPL/LGPL 1-11

Grayscale 11-28

Index-3

Group Authorization Settings 9-9

Group Authorization 9-9

Group List 9-9

Guest Authorization Set. 9-11

Guest Authorization 9-11

Guest Property 9-11

Guides Provided with the Machine xii

Handles 2-2

Hard Disk/SSD Initialization 8-47

Help 11-28

Help Screen 2-21

Home 8-22

Customize Desktop 2-14

Customize Taskbar 2-14

Wallpaper 2-14

Home Screen 2-13

Host Name 8-30

HTTP

Protocol Settings 8-40

HTTPS

Protocol Settings 8-40

Install

Macintosh 2-46

Software 2-39

Uninstalling 2-45

Windows 2-40

Interface Block Setting 8-46

Internet 8-55

Proxy 8-41

Internet Browser 5-28

IP Address 11-28

Settings 8-33, 8-35

IPP 11-28

Protocol Settings 8-39

IPP over SSL

Protocol Settings 8-40

IPSec 8-37

Job

Available Status 7-2

Canceling 7-9

Checking History 7-7

Checking Status 7-2

Detailed Information 7-6

Detailed Information of Histories 7-8

Details of the Status Screens 7-3

Displaying History Screen 7-7

Displaying Status Screens 7-2

Pause and Resumption 7-9

Priority Override 7-9

Reordering Print Jobs 7-10

Sending the Log History 7-8, 8-27

Job Accounting 9-20

Adding an Account 9-22

Apply Limit 9-34

Counting the Number of Pages Printed 9-30

Default Setting 9-28

Deleting an Account 9-25

Editing an Account 9-23

Enabling Job Accounting 9-21

Job Accounting Access 9-21

Logout 9-33

Overview of Job Accounting 9-20

Print Accounting Report 9-32

Printing 9-26

Restricting the Use of the Machine 9-23

Job Box 4-18, 11-29

Deletion of Job Retention 8-22

Private Print Box 4-19

Proof and Hold Box 4-22

Quick Copy Box 4-21

Quick Copy Job Retention 8-22

Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing

the Job 4-18

Stored Job Box 4-20

Job Finish Notice 6-25

Job Separator 11-5

Job Separator Tray 2-5

JPEG/TIFF Print 6-26

Default 8-16

Key Counter 11-5

Knopflerfish License 1-13

KPDL 11-29

Label 11-16

LAN Cable 2-6

Connecting 2-7

LAN Interface 8-37

Language 8-9

Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2) 11-4

Loading Paper 3-14

Laser Scanner Cleaning 8-53, 10-34

LDAP

Protocol Settings 8-40

Legal Information 1-10

Limited Use of This Product 1-9

Loading Paper 10-6

Logout 2-23

Low Power Mode 2-34

Low Power Timer 8-50

Low Toner Alert Level 8-19

LPD

Protocol Settings 8-38

Mailbox 11-4

Index-4

Main Power Switch 2-2

Main Tray 2-2

Management 9-1

Manual Setting (IPv6) 8-34, 8-36

Manual Staple 5-30, 8-18

Margin 6-15

Default 8-15

Margin/Centering 6-15

Measurement 8-12

Media Type Setting 8-12

Memory Diagnostics 8-54

Message Banner Print 8-20

Message Board Settings 8-21

Monotype Imaging License Agreement 1-12

Mopria 4-16

MP Tray Setting

Paper Size and Media Type 8-7

Multipurpose Tray 2-3, 11-29

Loading Envelopes or Cardstock 5-4

Loading Index Paper 5-5

Loading Paper 5-2

Paper Size and Media Type 8-7

NetBEUI 11-29

Protocol Settings 8-38

NetWare

Settings 8-42

Network Interface 2-6

Network Interface Connector 2-4

Network Interface Kit 11-5

NFC

Printing 4-17

Settings 2-33, 8-49

Notice 1-2

Numeric Keypad 11-5

Numeric Keypad Settings 8-21

Offset Documents by Job 8-18

Offset One Page Documents 8-19

OpenSSL License 1-11

Operation Panel 2-2

Option

1,000-Sheet Finisher 11-4

4,000-Sheet Finisher 11-4

Banner Tray 11-4

Card Authentication Kit 11-6

Data Security Kit 11-6

Emulation Upgrade Kit 11-6

Folding Unit 11-4

Job Separator 11-5

Key Counter 11-5

Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2) 11-4

Mailbox 11-4

Network Interface Kit 11-5

Numeric Keypad 11-5

Overview 11-2

Paper Feeder (500-sheet×2) 11-4

Punch Unit 11-5

Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) 11-4

ThinPrint Option 11-6

Wireless Network Interface Kit 11-5

Option Interface Slot 2-4

Optional Applications 11-7

Optional Function 8-48

Optional Network

Basic 8-42

Wireless Network 8-43

Original SSLeay License 1-11

Outline font 11-29

Page # 6-21

Panel Reset Timer 8-50

Paper

Checking the Remaining Amount of Paper 7-12

Appropriate Paper 11-13

Custom Paper Size 8-10

Default Paper Source 8-10

Loading Cardstock 3-10, 5-4

Loading Envelopes 3-10, 5-4

Loading in the Large Capacity Feeder 3-14

Loading in the Side Feeder 3-16

Loading Index Paper 5-5

Loading Paper 3-2, 5-2

Loading Paper in the Cassette 1 3-4

Loading Paper in the Cassette 2 3-7

Loading Paper in the Multipurpose Tray 5-2

Media Type Setting 8-10

Paper Source for Cover 8-11

Precaution for Loading Paper 3-2

Selecting the Paper Feeder Units 3-3

Settings 8-10

Show Paper Setup Message 8-11

Size and Media Type 8-6, 11-12

Special Paper 11-15

Special Paper Action 8-11

Specifications 11-12

Weight 8-12

Paper Feed Mode 8-24

Paper Feeder (500-sheet×2) 11-4

Index-5

Paper Jams 10-36

1,000-Sheet Finisher 10-62

4,000-sheet Finisher (Inner) 10-65

4,000-sheet Finisher (Tray A) 10-66

4,000-sheet Finisher (Tray B) 10-70

Bridge Unit 10-60

Cassette 1 10-37

Cassette 2 10-40

Cassette 3 (1,500-sheet×2) 10-45

Cassette 3 and 4 (500-sheet×2) 10-43

Cassette 4 (1,500-sheet×2) 10-47

Cassette 5 (Side Feeder) 10-50

Folding Tray 10-78

Folding Unit 10-73

Jam Location Indicators 10-36

Mailbox 10-61

Multipurpose Tray 10-52

Right Cover 1 10-53

Right Cover 2 (1,500-sheet×2) 10-58

Right Cover 2 (500-sheet×2) 10-57

Paper Length Guide 2-3, 3-4, 3-7

Paper Output 6-12, 8-14

Paper Selection 6-5

Paper Settings 8-10

Paper Stopper 2-2, 3-18

Paper Width Adjusting Tab 2-3

Paper Width Guide 2-3, 3-5, 3-8

Part Names 2-2

PIN Code Authorization 9-18

Ping 8-42

POP3 11-29

POP3 (E-mail RX)

Protocol Settings 8-37

PostScript 11-29

Power Cable

Connecting 2-8

Power Management 1-16

Power Off 2-9

Power On 2-9

Power Switch 2-2

PPM 11-29

Precaution for Loading Paper 3-2

Precautions for Use 1-4

Preprinted Paper 11-18

Primary Network (Client) 8-45

Print Report

Configuration List 8-27

Font List 8-26

Network Status 8-26

Optional Network Status 8-27

Service Status 8-26

Status Page 8-26

Print Settings 4-2

Printer 8-23

Auto Cassette Change 8-24

Copies 8-23

CR Action 8-24

Duplex 8-23

EcoPrint 8-23

Emulation 8-23

Form Feed TimeOut 8-23

Job Name 8-24

KIR 8-25

LF Action 8-24

MP Tray Priority 8-24

Orientation 8-23

Override A4/Letter 8-23

Paper Feed Mode 8-24

Print Setting 4-2

Printing Job Terminator 8-25

Resolution 8-25

Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) 8-23

User Name 8-24

Wide A4 8-24

Printer Driver 11-29

Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings 4-3

Help 4-3

Print Settings 4-2

Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB

Memory 5-26

Printing from PC 4-4

Banner Printing 4-9

Non-standard Sized Paper 4-6

Standard Sized Paper 4-4

Priority Override 6-25, 7-9

Product Library xii

Program 5-6

Deleting 5-8

Editing 5-7

Recalling 5-7

Registering 5-6

Punch 6-11

Punch Unit 11-5

Quick No. Search key 2-20

Quick Setup Registration 8-22

Quick Setup Wizard 2-37

RA (Stateless) 11-29

Settings 8-34, 8-36

RAM Disk 11-30

Raw

Protocol Settings 8-38

Recycled Paper 11-18

Regarding Trade Names 1-10

Regular Maintenance 10-2

Replace the Waste Toner Box 10-5

Replacing Staples

1,000-Sheet Finisher 10-7

4,000-Sheet Finisher 10-8

Folding Unit 10-10

Index-6

Report 8-26

Device Log History Settings 8-28

Print Report 8-26

Secure Comm. Error Log 8-29

Sending Log History 8-27

Resolution 8-25, 11-21

Resource Saving - Paper 1-16

Responding to Messages 10-23

Restart Entire Device 8-49

Restart Network 8-34, 8-42

Right Cover 1 2-3

Right Cover 1 Lever 2-3

Safety Conventions in This Guide 1-2

Security Level 8-45

Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN 1-8

Setting Date and Time 2-24

Shortcuts 5-12

Adding 5-12

Deleting Shortcuts 5-13

Editing Shortcuts 5-13

Show Power Off Message 8-22

Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) 11-4

Loading Paper 3-16

Silent Mode 8-54

Simple Login 2-23

Simple Login Settings

Simple Login 9-15

Simple Login Setup 9-15

Sleep 2-34

Sleep Level 2-35, 8-52

Energy Saver 8-52

Quick Recovery 8-52

Sleep Rules 2-35, 8-51

Sleep Timer 8-51

SMTP 11-30

SMTP (E-mail TX)

Protocol Settings 8-37

SNMPv1/v2c

Protocol Settings 8-39

SNMPv3

Protocol Settings 8-39

Software Verification 8-48

Solving Malfunctions 10-16

Specifications 11-19

1,000-Sheet Finisher 11-23

4,000-Sheet Finisher 11-24

Banner Tray 11-26

Folding Unit 11-25

Job Separator Tray 11-26

Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2) 11-22

Machine 11-19

Mailbox 11-25

Paper Feeder (500-sheet×2) 11-22

Printer Functions 11-21

Punch Unit (For 1,000-Sheet/4,000-Sheet

Finisher) 11-24

Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) 11-22

SSD Initialization 8-47

SSL

Security Settings 8-41

Stack Level Adjuster 3-19

Staple Jam

1,000-Sheet Finisher 10-83

4,000-Sheet Finisher 10-86

Folding Unit 10-88

Staple/Punch 6-9

Status Monitor 4-23

Accessing 4-23

Exiting 4-23

Notification Settings 4-26

Status Page 11-30

Status/Job Cancel 7-1

Subnet Mask 11-30

Settings 8-33, 8-35

Supplies

Checking the Remaining Amount 7-12

Support Tray Section of the Multipurpose Tray 2-3

Symbols 1-2

System Initialization 8-54

System Menu 8-2

Adjustment/Maintenance 8-53

Application 8-55

Cassette/MP Tray Settings 8-6

Common Settings 8-9

Counter 2-48

Date/Timer/Energy Saver 8-50

Document Box/Removable Memory 8-22

Home 2-13

Internet 8-55

Operation Method 8-2

Printer 8-23

Quick Setup Wizard 2-37

Report 8-26

System/Network 8-30

User Login/Job Accounting 8-49

User Property 8-50, 9-5

System Stamp 8-16

System/Network 8-30

Bluetooth Settings 8-48

Data Security 8-47

Interface Block Setting 8-46

Network 8-30

NFC 8-49

Optional Function 8-48

Optional Network 8-42

Primary Network (Client) 8-45

Restart Entire Device 8-49

Security Level 8-45

TCP/IP 11-30

Settings 8-33, 8-35

TCP/IP (IPv4)

Settings 2-25, 8-33, 8-35

TCP/IP (IPv6) 11-28

Settings 8-34, 8-36

Text Stamp 6-23

Index-7

Thick Paper 11-17

Thin Print over SSL

Protocol Settings 8-38

ThinPrint

Protocol Settings 8-38

ThinPrint Option 11-6

Time Zone 8-50

Toner Container (Black) 2-4

Toner Container Replacement 10-2

Toner Waste Full Alert 8-19

Touch Panel 2-13

Transparencies 11-15

Tray 1 to 7 2-5

Tray A 2-5

Tray B 2-5

Troubleshooting 10-16

Machine Operation Trouble 10-16

Printed Image Trouble 10-19

Solving Malfunctions 10-16

USB 11-30

USB Cable 2-6

Connecting 2-8

USB Interface 2-6

USB Interface Connector 2-4

USB Keyboard Type 8-16

USB Memory

Check the Information 5-27

Printing 5-26

Remove 5-27

USB Memory Slot 2-2

USB Port 2-4

User Login Administration 9-2

Changing User Properties 9-4

Enabling User Login Administration 9-3

Group Authorization Settings 9-9

Guest Authorization Set. 9-11

ID Card Settings 9-17

Logout 2-23

Obtain NW User Property 9-13

Overview of User Login Administration 9-2

PIN Code Authentication 9-18

Printing 9-7

Simple Login Settings 9-15

User Login/Job Accounting 8-49

Job Accounting 9-20

Unknown User Settings 9-35

User Login 9-2

User Property 8-50

VNC (RFB)

Protocol Settings 8-40

VNC (RFB) over SSL

Protocol Settings 8-40

Waste Toner Box 2-4

Waste Toner Box Cover 2-2, 2-4

Weekly Timer Settings 2-35, 8-52

Wide A4 8-24

Wi-Fi

Settings 2-27, 8-31

Wi-Fi Direct

Printing 4-16

Settings 2-31, 8-30

Wireless Connection 1-8

Wireless Network

Settings 2-27, 8-43

Wireless Network Interface Kit 11-5

WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) 11-30

WSD Print

Protocol Settings 8-39

XPS Fit to Page 6-26

Default 8-16

Zoom 6-13

Default 8-15

KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc.

Headquarters

225 Sand Road,

Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008, USA

Phone: +1-973-808-8444

Fax: +1-973-882-6000

Latin America

8240 NW 52nd Terrace Dawson Building, Suite 100

Miami, Florida 33166, USA

Phone: +1-305-421-6640

Fax: +1-305-421-6666

KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada

, Ltd.

6120 Kestrel Rd., Mississauga, ON L5T 1S8,

Canada

Phone: +1-905-670-4425

Fax: +1-905-670-8116

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Mexico, S.A. de C.V.

Calle Arquimedes No. 130, 4 Piso, Colonia Polanco

Chapultepec, Delegacion Miguel Hidalgo,

Distrito Federal, C.P. 11560, México

Phone: +52-555-383-2741

Fax: +52-555-383-7804

KYOCERA Document Solutions Brazil, Ltda.

Alameda África, 545, Pólo Empresarial Consbrás,

Tamboré, Santana de Parnaíba, State of São Paulo, CEP

06543-306, Brazil

Phone: +55-11-2424-5353

Fax: +55-11-2424-5304

KYOCERA Document Solutions Chile SpA

Jose Ananias 505, Macul. Santiago, Chile

Phone: +562-2350-7000

Fax: +562-2350-7150

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 3, 6-10 Talavera Road North Ryde N.S.W, 2113,

Australia

Phone: +61-2-9888-9999

Fax: +61-2-9888-9588

KYOCERA Document Solutions

New Zealand Ltd.

Ground Floor, 19 Byron Avenue, Takapuna, Auckland,

New Zealand

Phone: +64-9-415-4517

Fax: +64-9-415-4597

KYOCERA Document Solutions Asia Limited

13/F.,Mita Centre, 552-566, Castle Peak Road Tsuen Wan,

New Territories, Hong Kong

Phone: +852-2496-5678

Fax: +852-2610-2063

KYOCERA Document Solutions

(China) Corporation

8F, No. 288 Nanjing Road West, Huangpu District,

Shanghai,200003, China

Phone: +86-21-5301-1777

Fax: +86-21-5302-8300

KYOCERA Document Solutions

(Thailand) Corp., Ltd.

335 Ratchadapisek Road, Wongsawang, Bangsue,

Bangkok 10800,

Thailand

Phone: +66-2-586-0333

Fax: +66-2-586-0278

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Singapore Pte. Ltd.

12 Tai Seng Street #04-01A,

Luxasia Building, Singapore 534118

Phone: +65-6741-8733

Fax: +65-6748-3788

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Hong Kong Limited

16/F.,Mita Centre, 552-566, Castle Peak Road Tsuen Wan,

New Territories, Hong Kong

Phone: +852-3582-4000

Fax: +852-3185-1399

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Taiwan Corporation

6F., No.37, Sec. 3, Minquan E. Rd.,

Zhongshan Dist., Taipei 104, Taiwan R.O.C.

Phone: +886-2-2507-6709

Fax: +886-2-2507-8432

KYOCERA Document Solutions Korea Co., Ltd.

#10F Daewoo Foundation Bldg 18, Toegye-ro, Jung-gu,

Seoul, Korea

Phone: +822-6933-4050

Fax: +822-747-0084

KYOCERA Document Solutions

India Private Limited

Second Floor, Centrum Plaza, Golf Course Road,

Sector-53, Gurgaon, Haryana 122002, India

Phone: +91-0124-4671000

Fax: +91-0124-4671001

KYOCERA Document Solutions Europe B.V.

Bloemlaan 4, 2132 NP Hoofddorp,

The Netherlands

Phone: +31-20-654-0000

Fax: +31-20-653-1256

KYOCERA Document Solutions Nederland B.V.

Beechavenue 25, 1119 RA Schiphol-Rijk,

The Netherlands

Phone: +31-20-5877200

Fax: +31-20-5877260

KYOCERA Document Solutions (U.K.) Limited

Eldon Court, 75-77 London Road,

Reading, Berkshire RG1 5BS,

United Kingdom

Phone: +44-118-931-1500

Fax: +44-118-931-1108

KYOCERA Document Solutions Italia S.p.A.

Via Monfalcone 15, 20132, Milano, Italy,

Phone: +39-02-921791

Fax: +39-02-92179-600

KYOCERA Document Solutions Belgium N.V.

Sint-Martinusweg 199-201 1930 Zaventem,

Belgium

Phone: +32-2-7209270

Fax: +32-2-7208748

KYOCERA Document Solutions France S.A.S.

Espace Technologique de St Aubin

Route de I’Orme 91195 Gif-sur-Yvette CEDEX,

France

Phone: +33-1-69852600

Fax: +33-1-69853409

KYOCERA Document Solutions Espana, S.A.

Edificio Kyocera, Avda. de Manacor No.2,

28290 Las Matas (Madrid), Spain

Phone: +34-91-6318392

Fax: +34-91-6318219

KYOCERA Document Solutions Finland Oy

Atomitie 5C, 00370 Helsinki,

Finland

Phone: +358-9-47805200

Fax: +358-9-47805212

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Europe B.V., Amsterdam (NL) Zürich Branch

Hohlstrasse 614, 8048 Zürich,

Switzerland

Phone: +41-44-9084949

Fax: +41-44-9084950

KYOCERA Bilgitas Document Solutions

Turkey A.S.

Gülbahar Mahallesi Otello Kamil Sk. No:6 Mecidiyeköy

34394 ùiúli østanbul, Turkey

Phone: +90-212-356-7000

Fax: +90-212-356-6725

is a trademark of KYOCERA Corporation

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Deutschland GmbH

Otto-Hahn-Strasse 12, 40670 Meerbusch,

Germany

Phone: +49-2159-9180

Fax: +49-2159-918100

KYOCERA Document Solutions Austria GmbH

Wienerbergstraße 11, Turm A, 18. OG, 1100 Wien,

Austria

Phone: +43-1-863380

Fax: +43-1-86338-400

KYOCERA Document Solutions Nordic AB

Esbogatan 16B 164 75 Kista, Sweden

Phone: +46-8-546-550-00

Fax: +46-8-546-550-10

KYOCERA Document Solutions Norge Nuf

Olaf Helsetsv. 6, 0619 Oslo, Norway

Phone: +47-22-62-73-00

Fax: +47-22-62-72-00

KYOCERA Document Solutions Danmark A/S

Ejby Industrivej 60, DK-2600 Glostrup,

Denmark

Phone: +45-70223880

Fax: +45-45765850

KYOCERA Document Solutions Portugal Lda.

Rua do Centro Cultural, 41 (Alvalade) 1700-106 Lisboa,

Portugal

Phone: +351-21-843-6780

Fax: +351-21-849-3312

KYOCERA Document Solutions

South Africa (Pty) Ltd.

KYOCERA House, Hertford Office Park,

90 Bekker Road (Cnr. Allandale), Midrand, South Africa

Phone: +27-11-540-2600

Fax: +27-11-466-3050

KYOCERA Document Solutions Russia LLC.

Building 2, 51/4, Schepkina St., 129110, Moscow,

Russia

Phone: +7(495)741-0004

Fax: +7(495)741-0018

KYOCERA Document Solutions Middle East

Dubai Internet City, Bldg. 17,

Office 157 P.O. Box 500817, Dubai,

United Arab Emirates

Phone: +971-04-433-0412

KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc.

2-28, 1-chome, Tamatsukuri, Chuo-ku

Osaka 540-8585, Japan

Phone: +81-6-6764-3555

http://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com

2019.10

2RSKDEN000

is a trademark of KYOCERA Corporation